Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches

Transcription

1 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Release 15.1 Modified:

2 Juniper Networks, Inc Innovation Way Sunnyvale, California USA Juniper Networks, Junos, Steel-Belted Radius, NetScreen, and ScreenOS are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. in the United States and other countries. The Juniper Networks Logo, the Junos logo, and JunosE are trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. All other trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks, or registered service marks are the property of their respective owners. Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document. Juniper Networks reserves the right to change, modify, transfer, or otherwise revise this publication without notice. Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches 15.1 All rights reserved. The information in this document is current as of the date on the title page. YEAR 2000 NOTICE Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant. Junos OS has no known time-related limitations through the year However, the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT The Juniper Networks product that is the subject of this technical documentation consists of (or is intended for use with) Juniper Networks software. Use of such software is subject to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement ( EULA ) posted at By downloading, installing or using such software, you agree to the terms and conditions of that EULA. ii

3 Table of Contents About the Documentation xv Documentation and Release Notes xv Supported Platforms xv Using the Examples in This Manual xv Merging a Full Example xvi Merging a Snippet xvi Documentation Conventions xvii Documentation Feedback xix Requesting Technical Support xix Self-Help Online Tools and Resources xix Opening a Case with JTAC xx Part 1 Overview Chapter 1 Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network Firewall Filters Overview Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters Using Firewall Filters to Affect Local Packets Trusted Sources Flood Prevention Using Firewall Filters to Affect Data Packets Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode Stateless Firewall Filter Overview Packet Flow Control Data Packet Flow Control Local Packet Flow Control Stateless and Stateful Firewall Filters Purpose of Stateless Firewall Filters Stateless Firewall Filter Types Firewall Filters Service Filters Simple Filters Stateless Firewall Filter Components Protocol Family Filter Type Terms Match Conditions Actions Filter-Terminating Actions Nonterminating Actions Flow Control Action iii

4 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Stateless Firewall Filter Application Points How Firewall Filters Evaluate Packets Firewall Filter Packet Evaluation Overview Packet Evaluation at a Single Firewall Filter Best Practice: Explicitly Accept Any Traffic That Is Not Specifically Discarded Best Practice: Explicitly Reject Any Traffic That Is Not Specifically Accepted Multiple Firewall Filters Attached to a Single Interface Single Firewall Filter Attached to Multiple Interfaces Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Firewall Filters Firewall Filter Protocol Families Firewall Filter Names and Options Firewall Filter Terms Firewall Filter Match Conditions Firewall Filter Actions Guidelines for Applying Firewall Filters Applying Firewall Filters Overview Statement Hierarchy for Applying Firewall Filters Protocol-Independent Firewall Filters on MX Series Routers All Other Firewall Filters on Logical Interfaces Restrictions on Applying Firewall Filters Filters or Filter Actions Applied to Incompatible FPC Filters Applied to Multiple Interfaces on MPCs Number of Input and Output Filters Per Logical Interface MPLS and Layer 2 CCC Firewall Filters in Lists Layer 2 CCC Firewall Filters on MX Series Routers Supported Standards for Filtering Chapter 2 Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Numbers or Text Aliases Matching on a Single Numeric Value Matching on a Range of Numeric Values Matching on a Text Alias for a Numeric Value Matching on a List of Numeric Values or Text Aliases Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Bit-Field Values Match Conditions for Bit-Field Values Match Conditions for Common Bit-Field Values or Combinations Logical Operators for Bit-Field Values Matching on a Single Bit-Field Value or Text Alias Matching on Multiple Bit-Field Values or Text Aliases Matching on a Negated Bit-Field Value Matching on the Logical OR of Two Bit-Field Values Matching on the Logical AND of Two Bit-Field Values Grouping Bit-Field Match Conditions iv

5 Table of Contents Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Fields Implied Match on the 0/0 except Address for Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Fields Matching an Address Field to a Noncontiguous Subnet Mask or Prefix IPv4 Noncontiguous Subnet Mask Notation Prefix Notation Default Prefix Length for IPv4 Addresses Default Prefix Length for IPv6 Addresses Default Prefix Length for MAC Addresses Matching an Address Field to an Excluded Value Excluding IP Addresses in IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic Excluding IP Addresses in VPLS or Layer 2 Bridging Traffic Excluding MAC Addresses in VPLS or Layer 2 Bridging Traffic Excluding All Addresses Requires an Explicit Match on the 0/0 Address Matching Either IP Address Field to a Single Value Matching Either IP Address Field in IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic Matching Either IP Address Field in VPLS or Layer 2 Bridging Traffic Matching an Address Field to Noncontiguous Prefixes Matching an Address Field to a Prefix List Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Classes Source-Class Usage Destination-Class Usage Guidelines for Applying SCU or DCU Firewall Filters to Output Interfaces Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Protocol-Independent Traffic Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic Matching on IPv4 or IPv6 Packet Header Address or Port Fields in MPLS Flows IP Address Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic IP Port Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 CCC Traffic Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 Bridging Traffic Firewall Filter Terminating Actions Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions Chapter 3 Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic Example: Configuring a Filter to Limit TCP Access to a Port Based On a Prefix List Specifying BGP Peers Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Accept Traffic from Trusted Sources Example: Configuring a Filter to Block Telnet and SSH Access Example: Configuring a Filter to Block TFTP Access Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept Packets Based on IPv6 TCP Flags Example: Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set v

6 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Example: Configuring a Filter to Block TCP Access to a Port Except from Specified BGP Peers Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Protect Against TCP and ICMP Floods Chapter 4 Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Interface-Specific Firewall Filters Example: Configuring a Filter to Match on IPv6 Flags Example: Configuring a Filter to Match on Port and Protocol Fields Example: Configuring a Filter to Count Accepted and Rejected Packets Example: Configuring a Filter to Count and Discard IP Options Packets Example: Configuring a Filter to Count IP Options Packets Example: Configuring a Filter to Count and Sample Accepted Packets Example: Configuring a Filter to Set the DSCP Bit to Zero Example: Configuring a Filter to Match on Two Unrelated Criteria Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept DHCP Packets Based on Address Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept OSPF Packets from a Prefix Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Handle Fragments Example: Configuring a Rate-Limiting Filter Based on Destination Class Chapter 5 Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Overview Logical Systems Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Identifiers for Firewall Objects in Logical Systems Guidelines for Configuring and Applying Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Filter Types in Logical Systems Firewall Filter Protocol Families in Logical Systems Firewall Filter Match Conditions in Logical Systems Firewall Filter Actions in Logical Systems Statement Hierarchy for Applying Firewall Filters in Logical Systems References from a Firewall Filter in a Logical System to Subordinate Objects Resolution of References from a Firewall Filter to Subordinate Objects Valid Reference from a Firewall Filter to a Subordinate Object References from a Firewall Filter in a Logical System to Nonfirewall Objects Resolution of References from a Firewall Filter to Nonfirewall Objects Valid Reference to a Nonfirewall Object Outside of the Logical System References from a Nonfirewall Object in a Logical System to a Firewall Filter Resolution of References from a Nonfirewall Object to a Firewall Filter Invalid Reference to a Firewall Filter Outside of the Logical System Valid Reference to a Firewall Filter Within the Logical System Valid Reference to a Firewall Filter Outside of the Logical System Unsupported Firewall Filter Statements for Logical Systems Unsupported Actions for Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Protect a Logical System Against ICMP Floods Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on Logical Systems vi

7 Table of Contents Chapter 6 Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting and Logging Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting Profiles Statement Hierarchy for Applying Firewall Filter Accounting Profiles Accounting for Firewall Filters Overview System Logging Overview System Logging of Events Generated for the Firewall Facility Logging of Packet Headers Evaluated by a Firewall Filter Term Example: Configuring Statistics Collection for a Firewall Filter Example: Configuring Logging for a Stateless Firewall Filter Term Chapter 7 Attaching Multiple Firewall Filters to a Single Interface Statement Hierarchy for Applying Interface-Specific Firewall Filters Understanding Multiple Firewall Filters in a Nested Configuration The Challenge: Simplify Large-Scale Firewall Filter Administration A Solution: Configure Nested References to Firewall Filters Configuration of Nested Firewall Filters Application of Nested Firewall Filters to a Router or Switch Interface Guidelines for Nesting References to Multiple Firewall Filters Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Nested Firewall Filters Filter-Defining Terms and Filter-Referencing Terms Types of Filters Supported in Nested Configurations Number of Filter References in a Single Filter Depth of Filter Nesting Understanding Multiple Firewall Filters Applied as a List The Challenge: Simplify Large-Scale Firewall Filter Administration A Solution: Apply Lists of Firewall Filters Configuration of Multiple Filters for Filter Lists Application of Filter Lists to a Router Interface Interface-Specific Names for Filter Lists How Filter Lists Evaluate Packets When the Matched Term Includes Terminating or Next Term Actions How Filter Lists Evaluate Packets When the List Includes Protocol-Independent and IP Firewall Filters Guidelines for Applying Multiple Firewall Filters as a List Statement Hierarchy for Applying Lists of Multiple Firewall Filters Filter Input Lists and Output Lists for Router or Switch Interfaces Types of Filters Supported in Lists Restrictions on Applying Filter Lists for MPLS or Layer 2 CCC Traffic Example: Applying Lists of Multiple Firewall Filters Example: Nesting References to Multiple Firewall Filters Chapter 8 Attaching a Single Firewall Filter to Multiple Interfaces Statement Hierarchy for Applying Interface-Specific Firewall Filters Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Instances Overview Instantiation of Interface-Specific Firewall Filters Interface-Specific Names for Firewall Filter Instances Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Counters Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Policers Filtering Packets Received on a Set of Interface Groups Overview vii

8 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview Statement Hierarchy for Defining an Interface Set Statement Hierarchy for Configuring a Filter to Match on an Interface Set Statement Hierarchy for Configuring a Filter to Match on a Set of Interface Groups Statement Hierarchy for Assigning Interfaces to Interface Groups Statement Hierarchy for Applying Filters to an Interface Group Example: Configuring Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Counters Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter on an Interface Group Chapter 9 Configuring Service Filters Service Filter Overview Services Service Rules Service Rule Refinement Service Filter Counters How Service Filters Evaluate Packets Service Filters That Contain a Single Term Service Filters That Contain Multiple Terms Service Filter Terms That Do Not Contain Any Match Conditions Service Filter Terms That Do Not Contain Any Actions Service Filter Default Action Guidelines for Configuring Service Filters Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Service Filters Service Filter Protocol Families Service Filter Names Service Filter Terms Service Filter Match Conditions Service Filter Terminating Actions Guidelines for Applying Service Filters Restrictions for Adaptive Services Interfaces Adaptive Services Interfaces System Logging to a Remote Host from M Series Routers Statement Hierarchy for Applying Service Filters Associating Service Rules with Adaptive Services Interfaces Filtering Traffic Before Accepting Packets for Service Processing Postservice Filtering of Returning Service Traffic Example: Configuring and Applying Service Filters Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic Service Filter Terminating Actions Service Filter Nonterminating Actions Chapter 10 Configuring Simple Filters Simple Filter Overview How Simple Filters Evaluate Packets Simple Filters That Contain a Single Term Simple Filters That Contain Multiple Terms Simple Filter Terms That Do Not Contain Any Match Conditions Simple Filter Terms That Do Not Contain Any Actions Simple Filter Default Action viii

9 Table of Contents Guidelines for Configuring Simple Filters Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Simple Filters Simple Filter Protocol Families Simple Filter Names Simple Filter Terms Simple Filter Match Conditions Simple Filter Terminating Actions Simple Filter Nonterminating Actions Guidelines for Applying Simple Filters Statement Hierarchy for Applying Simple Filters Restrictions for Applying Simple Filters Example: Configuring and Applying a Simple Filter Part 2 Configuring Firewall Filters for Forwarding, Fragments, and Policing Filter-Based Forwarding Overview Filters That Classify Packets or Direct Them to Routing Instances Input Filtering to Classify and Forward Packets Within the Router or Switch Output Filtering to Forward Packets to Another Routing Table Restrictions for Applying Filter-Based Forwarding Firewall Filters That Handle Fragmented Packets Overview Stateless Firewall Filters That Reference Policers Overview Statement Hierarchy for Configuring FBF for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic Statement Hierarchy for Configuring FBF for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 Traffic Matching on IPv4 Address and TCP/UDP Port Fields Configuration Example Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Routing Instances for FBF Statement Hierarchy for Applying FBF Filters to Interfaces Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on the Source Address Chapter 11 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address Understanding Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Destination IP Address Part 3 Configuration Statements Chapter 12 Configuration Statements [edit firewall] Hierarchy Level Common Firewall Actions Common IP Firewall Actions Common IPv4 and IPv6 Firewall Actions Common IP Firewall Match Conditions Common IPv4 Firewall Match Conditions ix

10 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Common Layer 2 Firewall Match Conditions Complete [edit firewall] Hierarchy accounting-profile destination-address destination-port enhanced-mode family (Firewall) filter (Applying to a Logical Interface) filter (Configuring) firewall interface-set interface-specific (Firewall Filters) ip-version prefix-list protocol service-filter (Firewall) simple-filter (Configuring) source-address source-checking source-port term (Firewall Filter) x

11 List of Figures Chapter 3 Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic Figure 1: Typical Network with BGP Peer Sessions Figure 2: Firewall Filter to Protect Against TCP and ICMP Floods Chapter 5 Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Figure 3: Logical System with a Stateless Firewall Figure 4: Logical Systems with Filter-Based Forwarding Chapter 8 Attaching a Single Firewall Filter to Multiple Interfaces Figure 5: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter on an Interface Group Part 2 Configuring Firewall Filters for Forwarding, Fragments, and Policing Figure 6: Filter-Based Forwarding Chapter 11 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address Figure 7: Filter-Based Forwarding to Specified Outgoing Interfaces Figure 8: Filter-Based Forwarding to Specified Outgoing Interfaces xi

12 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches xii

13 List of Tables About the Documentation xv Table 1: Notice Icons xvii Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions xvii Part 1 Overview Chapter 1 Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network Table 3: Firewall Filter Protocol Families Table 4: Filter Types Table 5: Stateless Firewall Filter Configuration and Application Summary Table 6: Packet Evaluation at a Single Firewall Filter Table 7: Firewall Filter Match Conditions by Protocol Family Table 8: Firewall Filter Action Categories Table 9: Firewall Filter Behavior by Filter Attachment Point Chapter 2 Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 10: Binary and Bit-Field Match Conditions for Firewall Filters Table 11: Bit-Field Match Conditions for Common Combinations Table 12: Bit-Field Logical Operators Table 13: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Protocol-Independent Traffic Table 14: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic Table 15: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic Table 16: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic Table 17: IP Address-Specific Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic Table 18: IP Port-Specific Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic Table 19: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic Table 20: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 CCC Traffic Table 21: Standard Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 Bridging (MX Series Routers and EX Series Switches Only) Table 22: Terminating Actions for Firewall Filters Table 23: Nonterminating Actions for Firewall Filters Chapter 5 Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Table 24: Unsupported Firewall Statements for Logical Systems Table 25: Unsupported Actions for Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Chapter 6 Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting and Logging Table 26: Syslog Message Destinations for the Firewall Facility Table 27: Packet-Header Logs for Stateless Firewall Filter Terms Chapter 7 Attaching Multiple Firewall Filters to a Single Interface xiii

14 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 28: Firewall Filter List Behavior Chapter 9 Configuring Service Filters Table 29: Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic Table 30: Terminating Actions for Service Filters Table 31: Nonterminating Actions for Service Filters Chapter 10 Configuring Simple Filters Table 32: Simple Filter Match Conditions xiv

15 About the Documentation Documentation and Release Notes Documentation and Release Notes on page xv Supported Platforms on page xv Using the Examples in This Manual on page xv Documentation Conventions on page xvii Documentation Feedback on page xix Requesting Technical Support on page xix Supported Platforms To obtain the most current version of all Juniper Networks technical documentation, see the product documentation page on the Juniper Networks website at If the information in the latest release notes differs from the information in the documentation, follow the product Release Notes. Juniper Networks Books publishes books by Juniper Networks engineers and subject matter experts. These books go beyond the technical documentation to explore the nuances of network architecture, deployment, and administration. The current list can be viewed at For the features described in this document, the following platforms are supported: EX Series Using the Examples in This Manual If you want to use the examples in this manual, you can use the load merge or the load merge relative command. These commands cause the software to merge the incoming configuration into the current candidate configuration. The example does not become active until you commit the candidate configuration. If the example configuration contains the top level of the hierarchy (or multiple hierarchies), the example is a full example. In this case, use the load merge command. xv

16 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Merging a Full Example If the example configuration does not start at the top level of the hierarchy, the example is a snippet. In this case, use the load merge relative command. These procedures are described in the following sections. To merge a full example, follow these steps: 1. From the HTML or PDF version of the manual, copy a configuration example into a text file, save the file with a name, and copy the file to a directory on your routing platform. For example, copy the following configuration to a file and name the file ex-script.conf. Copy the ex-script.conf file to the /var/tmp directory on your routing platform. system { scripts { commit { file ex-script.xsl; interfaces { fxp0 { disable; unit 0 { family inet { address /24; 2. Merge the contents of the file into your routing platform configuration by issuing the load merge configuration mode command: [edit] user@host# load merge /var/tmp/ex-script.conf load complete Merging a Snippet To merge a snippet, follow these steps: 1. From the HTML or PDF version of the manual, copy a configuration snippet into a text file, save the file with a name, and copy the file to a directory on your routing platform. For example, copy the following snippet to a file and name the file ex-script-snippet.conf. Copy the ex-script-snippet.conf file to the /var/tmp directory on your routing platform. commit { file ex-script-snippet.xsl; 2. Move to the hierarchy level that is relevant for this snippet by issuing the following configuration mode command: xvi

17 About the Documentation [edit] edit system scripts [edit system scripts] 3. Merge the contents of the file into your routing platform configuration by issuing the load merge relative configuration mode command: [edit system scripts] load merge relative /var/tmp/ex-script-snippet.conf load complete Documentation Conventions For more information about the load command, see the CLI User Guide. Table 1: Notice Icons Table 1 on page xvii defines notice icons used in this guide. Icon Meaning Description Informational note Indicates important features or instructions. Caution Indicates a situation that might result in loss of data or hardware damage. Warning Alerts you to the risk of personal injury or death. Laser warning Alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser. Tip Indicates helpful information. Best practice Alerts you to a recommended use or implementation. Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions Table 2 on page xvii defines the text and syntax conventions used in this guide. Convention Description Examples Bold text like this Represents text that you type. To enter configuration mode, type the configure command: user@host> configure xvii

18 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions (continued) Convention Description Examples Fixed-width text like this Italic text like this Represents output that appears on the terminal screen. Introduces or emphasizes important new terms. Identifies guide names. Identifies RFC and Internet draft titles. show chassis alarms No alarms currently active A policy term is a named structure that defines match conditions and actions. Junos OS CLI User Guide RFC 1997, BGP Communities Attribute Italic text like this Text like this Represents variables (options for which you substitute a value) in commands or configuration statements. Represents names of configuration statements, commands, files, and directories; configuration hierarchy levels; or labels on routing platform components. Configure the machine s domain name: [edit] root@# set system domain-name domain-name To configure a stub area, include the stub statement at the [edit protocols ospf area area-id] hierarchy level. The console port is labeled CONSOLE. < > (angle brackets) Encloses optional keywords or variables. stub <default-metric metric>; (pipe symbol) Indicates a choice between the mutually exclusive keywords or variables on either side of the symbol. The set of choices is often enclosed in parentheses for clarity. broadcast multicast (string1 string2 string3) # (pound sign) Indicates a comment specified on the same line as the configuration statement to which it applies. rsvp { # Required for dynamic MPLS only [ ] (square brackets) Encloses a variable for which you can substitute one or more values. community name members [ community-ids ] Indention and braces ( { ) ; (semicolon) Identifies a level in the configuration hierarchy. Identifies a leaf statement at a configuration hierarchy level. [edit] routing-options { static { route default { nexthop address; retain; GUI Conventions Bold text like this Represents graphical user interface (GUI) items you click or select. In the Logical Interfaces box, select All Interfaces. To cancel the configuration, click Cancel. xviii

19 About the Documentation Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions (continued) Convention Description Examples > (bold right angle bracket) Separates levels in a hierarchy of menu selections. In the configuration editor hierarchy, select Protocols>Ospf. Documentation Feedback We encourage you to provide feedback, comments, and suggestions so that we can improve the documentation. You can provide feedback by using either of the following methods: Online feedback rating system On any page at the Juniper Networks Technical Documentation site at simply click the stars to rate the content, and use the pop-up form to provide us with information about your experience. Alternately, you can use the online feedback form at Send your comments to [email protected]. Include the document or topic name, URL or page number, and software version (if applicable). Requesting Technical Support Technical product support is available through the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC). If you are a customer with an active J-Care or Partner Support Service support contract, or are covered under warranty, and need post-sales technical support, you can access our tools and resources online or open a case with JTAC. JTAC policies For a complete understanding of our JTAC procedures and policies, review the JTAC User Guide located at Product warranties For product warranty information, visit JTAC hours of operation The JTAC centers have resources available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year. Self-Help Online Tools and Resources For quick and easy problem resolution, Juniper Networks has designed an online self-service portal called the Customer Support Center (CSC) that provides you with the following features: Find CSC offerings: Search for known bugs: Find product documentation: Find solutions and answer questions using our Knowledge Base: xix

20 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Download the latest versions of software and review release notes: Search technical bulletins for relevant hardware and software notifications: Join and participate in the Juniper Networks Community Forum: Open a case online in the CSC Case Management tool: To verify service entitlement by product serial number, use our Serial Number Entitlement (SNE) Tool: Opening a Case with JTAC You can open a case with JTAC on the Web or by telephone. Use the Case Management tool in the CSC at Call JTAC ( toll-free in the USA, Canada, and Mexico). For international or direct-dial options in countries without toll-free numbers, see xx

21 PART 1 Overview Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network on page 3 1

22 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches 2

23 CHAPTER 1 Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network Firewall Filters Overview Firewall Filters Overview on page 3 Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5 Stateless Firewall Filter Overview on page 7 Stateless Firewall Filter Types on page 8 Stateless Firewall Filter Components on page 9 Stateless Firewall Filter Application Points on page 15 How Firewall Filters Evaluate Packets on page 18 Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Guidelines for Applying Firewall Filters on page 27 Supported Standards for Filtering on page 31 Firewall filters provide a means of protecting your router (and switch) from excessive traffic transiting the router (and switch) to a network destination or destined for the Routing Engine. Firewall filters that control local packets can also protect your router (and switch) from external incidents. You can configure a firewall filter to do the following: Restrict traffic destined for the Routing Engine based on its source, protocol, and application. Limit the traffic rate of packets destined for the Routing Engine to protect against flood, or denial-of-service (DoS) attacks. Address special circumstances associated with fragmented packets destined for the Routing Engine. Because the device evaluates every packet against a firewall filter (including fragments), you must configure the filter to accommodate fragments that do not contain packet header information. Otherwise, the filter discards all but the first fragment of a fragmented packet. 3

24 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Related Documentation Stateless Firewall Filter Types on page 8 Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Guidelines for Applying Firewall Filters on page 27 Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters This topic covers the following information: Using Firewall Filters to Affect Local Packets on page 4 Using Firewall Filters to Affect Data Packets on page 5 Using Firewall Filters to Affect Local Packets On a router (or switch), you can configure one physical loopback interface, lo0, and one or more addresses on the interface. The loopback interface is the interface to the Routing Engine, which runs and monitors all the control protocols. The loopback interface carries local packets only. Firewall filters applied to the loopback interface affect the local packets destined for or transmitted from the Routing Engine. NOTE: When you create an additional loopback interface, it is important to apply a filter to it so the Routing Engine is protected. We recommend that when you apply a filter to the loopback interface, you include the apply-groups statement. Doing so ensures that the filter is automatically inherited on every loopback interface, including lo0 and other loopback interfaces. Trusted Sources The typical use of a firewall filter is to protect the Routing Engine processes and resources from malicious or untrusted packets. To protect the processes and resources owned by the Routing Engine, you can use a firewall filter that specifies which protocols and services, or applications, are allowed to reach the Routing Engine. Applying this type of filter to the loopback interface ensures that the local packets are from a trusted source and protects the processes running on the Routing Engine from an external attack. Flood Prevention You can create standard stateless firewall filters that limit certain TCP and ICMP traffic destined for the Routing Engine. A router (or switch) without this kind of protection is vulnerable to TCP and ICMP flood attacks, which are also called denial-of-service (DoS) attacks. For example: A TCP flood attack of SYN packets initiating connection requests can overwhelm the device until it can no longer process legitimate connection requests, resulting in denial of service. 4

25 Chapter 1: Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network An ICMP flood can overload the device with so many echo requests (ping requests) that it expends all its resources responding and can no longer process valid network traffic, also resulting in denial of service. Applying the appropriate firewall filters to the Routing Engine protects against these types of attacks. Using Firewall Filters to Affect Data Packets Firewall filters that you apply to your router s (or switch s) transit interfaces evaluate only the user data packets that transit the router from one interface directly to another as they are being forwarded from a source to a destination. To protect the network as a whole from unauthorized access and other threats at specific interfaces, you can apply firewall filters router transit interfaces. Related Documentation How Firewall Filters Evaluate Packets on page 18 Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Guidelines for Applying Firewall Filters on page 27 Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode This topic describes some of the basic commands that you must use to enter configuration mode in the command-line interface (CLI) editor, navigate through the configuration hierarchy, get help, and commit or revert the changes that you make during the configuration session. Task Command/Statement Example Edit Your Configuration Enter configuration mode. When you first log in to the device, the device is in operational mode. You must explicitly enter configuration mode. When you do, the CLI prompt changes from user@host> to user@host# and the hierarchy level appears in square brackets. configure user@host> configure [edit] user@host# Create a statement hierarchy. You can use the edit command to simultaneously create a hierarchy and move to that new level in the hierarchy. You cannot use the edit command to change the value of identifiers. edit hierarchy-level value [edit] user@host# edit security zones security-zone myzone [edit security zones security-zone myzone] user@host# 5

26 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Task Command/Statement Example Create a statement hierarchy and set identifier values. The set command is similar to edit except that your current level in the hierarchy does not change. set hierarchy-level value [edit] user@host# set security zones security-zone myzone [edit] user@host# Navigate the Hierarchy Navigate down to an existing hierarchy level. edit hierarchy-level [edit] user@host# edit security zones [edit security zones] user@host# Navigate up one level in the hierarchy. up [edit security zones] user@host# up [edit security] user@host# Navigate to the top of the hierarchy. top [edit security zones] user@host# top [edit] user@host# Commit or Revert Changes Commit your configuration. commit [edit] user@host# commit commit complete Roll back changes from the current session. Use the rollback command to revert all changes from the current configuration session. When you run the rollback command before exiting your session or committing changes, the software loads the most recently committed configuration onto the device. You must enter the rollback statement at the edit level in the hierarchy. rollback [edit] user@host# rollback load complete Exit Configuration Mode Commit the configuration and exit configuration mode. commit and-quit [edit] user@host# commit and-quit user@host> 6

27 Chapter 1: Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network Task Command/Statement Example Exit configuration mode without committing your configuration. You must navigate to the top of the hierarchy using the up or top commands before you can exit configuration mode. exit [edit] exit The configuration has been changed but not committed Exit with uncommitted changes? [yes,no] (yes) Get Help Display a list of valid options for the current hierarchy level.? [edit ] user@host# edit security zones? Possible completions: <[Enter]> Execute this command > functional-zone Functional zone > security-zone Security zones Pipe through a command [edit] Related Documentation Understanding Junos OS CLI Configuration Mode Entering and Exiting the Junos OS CLI Configuration Mode Displaying the Current Junos OS Configuration Stateless Firewall Filter Overview This topic covers the following information: Packet Flow Control on page 7 Stateless and Stateful Firewall Filters on page 8 Purpose of Stateless Firewall Filters on page 8 Packet Flow Control To influence which packets are allowed to transit the system and to apply special actions to packets as necessary, you can configure stateless firewall filters. A stateless firewall specifies a sequence of one or more packet-filtering rules, called filter terms. A filter term specifies match conditions to use to determine a match and actions to take on a matched packet. A stateless firewall filter enables you to manipulate any packet of a particular protocol family, including fragmented packets, based on evaluation of Layer 3 and Layer 4 header fields. You typically apply a stateless firewall filter to one or more interfaces that have been configured with protocol family features. You can apply a stateless firewall filter to an ingress interface, an egress interface, or both. Data Packet Flow Control To control the flow of data packets transiting the device as the packets are being forwarded from a source to a destination, you can apply stateless firewall filters to the input or output of the router s or switch s physical interfaces. 7

28 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches To enforce a specified bandwidth and maximum burst size for traffic sent or received on an interface, you can configure policers. Policers are a specialized type of stateless firewall filter and a primary component of the Junos OS class-of-service (CoS). Local Packet Flow Control To control the flow of local packets between the physical interfaces and the Routing Engine, you can apply stateless firewall filters to the input or output of the loopback interface. The loopback interface (lo0) is the interface to the Routing Engine and carries no data packets. Stateless and Stateful Firewall Filters A stateless firewall filter, also known as an access control list (ACL), does not statefully inspect traffic. Instead, it evaluates packet contents statically and does not keep track of the state of network connections. In contrast, a stateful firewall filter uses connection state information derived from other applications and past communications in the data flow to make dynamic control decisions. The Routing Policies, Firewall Filters, and Traffic Policers Feature Guide for Routing Devices describes stateless firewall filters. Purpose of Stateless Firewall Filters The basic purpose of a stateless firewall filter is to enhance security through the use of packet filtering. Packet filtering enables you to inspect the components of incoming or outgoing packets and then perform the actions you specify on packets that match the criteria you specify. The typical use of a stateless firewall filter is to protect the Routing Engine processes and resources from malicious or untrusted packets. Related Documentation Router Data Flow Overview Stateless Firewall Filter Types on page 8 Traffic Policing Overview Packet Flow Through the Junos OS CoS Process Overview Stateless Firewall Filter Types This topic covers the following information: Firewall Filters on page 8 Service Filters on page 9 Simple Filters on page 9 Firewall Filters The Junos OS standard stateless firewall filters support a rich set of packet-matching criteria that you can use to match on specific traffic and perform specific actions, such as forwarding or dropping packets that match the criteria you specify. You can configure firewall filters to protect the local router or to protect another device that is either directly 8

29 Chapter 1: Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network or indirectly connected to the local router. For example, you can use the filters to restrict the local packets that pass from the router s physical interfaces to the Routing Engine. Such filters are useful in protecting the IP services that run on the Routing Engine, such as Telnet, SSH, and BGP, from denial-of-service attacks. NOTE: If you configured targeted broadcast for virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) by including the forward-and-send-to-re statement, any firewall filter that is configured on the Routing Engine loopback interface (lo0) cannot be applied to the targeted broadcast packets that are forwarded to the Routing Engine. This is because broadcast packets are forwarded as flood next hop traffic and not as local next hop traffic, and you can only apply a firewall filter to local next hop routes for traffic directed toward the Routing Engine. Service Filters A service filter defines packet-filtering (a set of match conditions and a set of actions) for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. You can apply a service filter to the inbound or outbound traffic at an adaptive services interface to perform packet filtering on traffic before it is accepted for service processing. You can also apply a service filter to the traffic that is returning to the services interface after service processing to perform postservice processing. Service filters filter IPv4 and IPv6 traffic only and can be applied to logical interfaces on Adaptive Services PICs, MultiServices PICs, and MultiServices DPCs only. Service filters are not supported on Branch SRX devices. Simple Filters Simple filters are supported on Gigabit Ethernet intelligent queuing (IQ2) and Enhanced Queuing Dense Port Concentrator (EQ DPC) interfaces only. Unlike standard filters, simple filters support IPv4 traffic only and have a number of restrictions. For example, you cannot configure a terminating action for a simple filter. Simple filters always accept packets. Also, simple filters can be applied only as input filters. They are not supported on outbound traffic. Simple filters are recommended for metropolitan Ethernet applications. Related Documentation Stateless Firewall Filter Overview on page 7 Stateless Firewall Filter Components on page 9 Stateless Firewall Filter Components This topic covers the following information: Protocol Family on page 10 Filter Type on page 10 Terms on page 11 9

30 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Match Conditions on page 12 Actions on page 13 Protocol Family Under the firewall statement, you can specify the protocol family for which you want to filter traffic. Table 3 on page 10 describes the firewall filter protocol families. Table 3: Firewall Filter Protocol Families Type of Traffic to Be Filtered Configuration Statement Comments Protocol Independent family any All protocol families configured on a logical interface. Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) family inet The family inet statement is optional for IPv4. Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) family inet6 MPLS family mpls MPLS-tagged IPv4 family mpls Supports matching on IP addresses and ports, up to five MPLS stacked labels. MPLS-tagged IPv6 family mpls Supports matching on IP addresses and ports, up to five MPLS stacked labels. Virtual private LAN service (VPLS) family vpls Layer 2 Circuit Cross-Connection family ccc Layer 2 Bridging family bridge (for MX Series routers) and family ethernet-switching (for EX Series switches) MX Series routers and EX Series switches only. Filter Type Under the family family-name statement, you can specify the type and name of the filter you want to configure. Table 4 on page 11 describes the firewall filter types. 10

31 Chapter 1: Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network Table 4: Filter Types Filter Type Configuration Statement Description Standard Firewall Filter filter filter-name Filters the following traffic types: Protocol independent IPv4 IPv6 MPLS MPLS-tagged IPv4 MPLS-tagged IPv6 VPLS Layer 2 CCC Layer 2 bridging (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Service Filter service-filter service-filter-name Defines packet-filtering to be applied to ingress or egress before it is accepted for service processing or applied to returning service traffic after service processing has completed. Filters the following traffic types: IPv4 IPv6 Supported at logical interfaces configured on the following hardware only: Adaptive Services (AS) PICs on M Series and T Series routers Multiservices (MS) PICs on M Series and T Series routers Multiservices (MS) DPCs on MX Series routers (and EX Series switches) Simple Filter simple-filter simple-filter-name Defines packet filtering to be applied to ingress traffic only. Filters the following traffic type: IPv4 Supported at logical interfaces configured on the following hardware only: Gigabit Ethernet Intelligent Queuing (IQ2) PICs installed on M120, M320, or T Series routers Enhanced Queuing Dense Port Concentrators (EQ DPCs) installed on MX Series routers (and EX Series switches) Terms Under the filter, service-filter, or simple-filter statement, you must configure at least one firewall filter term. A term is a named structure in which match conditions and actions are defined. Within a firewall filter, you must configure a unique name for each term. TIP: For each protocol family on an interface, you can apply no more than one filter in each direction. If you try to apply additional filters for the same protocol family in the same direction, the last filter overwrites the previous 11

32 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches filter. You can, however, apply filters from the same protocol family to the input and output direction of the same interface. All stateless firewall filters contain one or more terms, and each term consists of two components match conditions and actions. The match conditions define the values or fields that the packet must contain to be considered a match. If a packet is a match, the corresponding action is taken. By default, a packet that does not match a firewall filter is discarded. If a packet arrives on an interface for which no firewall filter is applied for the incoming traffic on that interface, the packet is accepted by default. NOTE: A firewall filter with a large number of terms can adversely affect both the configuration commit time and the performance of the Routing Engine. Additionally, you can configure a stateless firewall filter within the term of another filter. This method enables you to add common terms to multiple filters without having to modify all filter definitions. You can configure one filter with the desired common terms, and configure this filter as a term in other filters. Consequently, to make a change in these common terms, you need to modify only one filter that contains the common terms, instead of multiple filters. Match Conditions A firewall filter term must contain at least one packet-filtering criteria, called a match condition, to specify the field or value that a packet must contain in order to be considered a match for the firewall filter term. For a match to occur, the packet must match all the conditions in the term. If a packet matches a firewall filter term, the router (or switch) takes the configured action on the packet. If a firewall filter term contains multiple match conditions, a packet must meet all match conditions to be considered a match for the firewall filter term. If a single match condition is configured with multiple values, such as a range of values, a packet must match only one of the values to be considered a match for the firewall filter term. The scope of match conditions you can specify in a firewall filter term depends on the protocol family under which the firewall filter is configured. You can define various match conditions, including the IP source address field, IP destination address field, TCP or UDP source port field, IP protocol field, Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet type, IP options, TCP flags, incoming logical or physical interface, and outgoing logical or physical interface. These are pre-defined, or fixed, match conditions. On MX Series 3D Universal Edge Routers with MPCs or MICs, it is possible to build flexible match conditions for IPv4, IPv6, Layer 2 bridge, CCC, and VPLS protocol families. These flexible match conditions allow a user to specify start location, byte offset, match length, and other parameters within the packet. 12

33 Chapter 1: Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network Each protocol family supports a different set of match conditions, and some match conditions are supported only on certain routing devices. For example, a number of match conditions for VPLS traffic are supported only on the MX Series 3D Universal Edge Routers. In the from statement in a firewall filter term, you specify characteristics that the packet must have for the action in the subsequent then statement to be performed. The characteristics are referred to as match conditions. The packet must match all conditions in the from statement for the action to be performed, which also means that the order of the conditions in the from statement is not important. If an individual match condition can specify a list of values (such as multiple source and destination addresses) or a range of numeric values, a match occurs if any of the values matches the packet. If a filter term does not specify match conditions, the term accepts all packets and the actions specified in the term s then statement are optional. NOTE: Some of the numeric range and bit-field match conditions allow you to specify a text synonym. For a complete list of synonyms: If you are using the J-Web interface, select the synonym from the appropriate list. If you are using the CLI, type a question mark (?) after the from statement. Actions The actions specified in a firewall filter term define the actions to take for any packet that matches the conditions specified in the term. Actions that are configured within a single term are all taken on traffic that matches the conditions configured. BEST PRACTICE: We strongly recommend that you explicitly configure one or more actions per firewall filter term. Any packet that matches all the conditions of the term is automatically accepted unless the term specifies other or additional actions. Firewall filter actions fall into the following categories: Filter-Terminating Actions A filter-terminating action halts all evaluation of a firewall filter for a specific packet. The router (or switch) performs the specified action, and no additional terms are examined. 13

34 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Nonterminating Actions Nonterminating actions are used to perform other functions on a packet, such as incrementing a counter, logging information about the packet header, sampling the packet data, or sending information to a remote host using the system log functionality. The presence of a nonterminating action, such as count, log, or syslog, without an explicit terminating action, such as accept, discard, or reject, results in a default terminating action of accept. If you do not want the firewall filter action to terminate, use the next term action after the nonterminating action. In this example, term 2 is never evaluated, because term 1 has the implicit default accept terminating action. [edit firewall filter test] term 1 { from { source-address { /0; then { log; <accept> #By default if not specified term 2 { then { reject; In this example, term 2 is evaluated, because term 1 has the explicit next term flow control action. [edit firewall filter test] term 1 { from { source-address { /0; then { log; next term; term 2 { then { reject; 14

35 Chapter 1: Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network Flow Control Action For standard stateless firewall filters only, the action next term enables the router (or switch) to perform configured actions on the packet and then evaluate the following term in the filter, rather than terminating the filter. A maximum of 1024 next term actions are supported per standard stateless firewall filter configuration. If you configure a standard filter that exceeds this limit, your candidate configuration results in a commit error. Related Documentation Stateless Firewall Filter Types on page 8 Firewall Filter Flexible Match Conditions Inserting a New Identifier in a Junos OS Configuration in the CLI User Guide Stateless Firewall Filter Application Points After you define the firewall filter, you must apply it to an application point. These application points include logical interfaces, physical interfaces, routing interfaces, and routing instances. In most cases, you can apply a firewall filter as an input filter or an output filter, or both at the same time. Input filters take action on packets being received on the specified interface, whereas output filters take action on packets that are transmitted through the specified interface. You typically apply one filter with multiple terms to a single logical interface, to incoming traffic, outbound traffic, or both. However, there are times when you might want to chain together multiple firewall filters (with single or multiple terms) and apply them to an interface. You use an input list to apply multiple firewall filters to the incoming traffic on an interface. You use an output list to apply multiple firewall filters to the outbound traffic on an interface. You can include up to 16 filters in an input list or an output list. There is no limit to the number of filters and counters you can set, but there are some practical considerations. More counters require more terms, and a large number of terms can take a long time to process during a commit operation. However, filters with more than 4000 terms and counters have been implemented successfully. Table 5 on page 16 describes each point to which you can apply a firewall filter. For each application point, the table describes the types of firewall filters supported at that point, the router (or switch) hierarchy level at which the filter can be applied, and any platform-specific limitations. 15

36 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 5: Stateless Firewall Filter Configuration and Application Summary Filter Type Application Point Restrictions Stateless firewall filter Configurebyincludingthefilterfilter-name statement the [edit firewall] hierarchy level: filter filter-name; NOTE: If you do not include the family statement, the firewall filter processes IPv4 traffic by default. Logical interface Apply at the [edit interfaces interface-name unit unit-number family inet] hierarchy level by including the input filter-name or output filter-name statements: filter { input filter-name; output filter-name; NOTE: A filter configured with the implicit inet protocol family cannot be included in an input filter list or an output filter list. Supported on the following routers: T Series routers M320 routers M7i routers with the enhanced CFEB (CFEB-e) M10i routers with the enhanced CFEB-e Also supported on the following Modular Port Concentrators (MPCs) on MX Series routers: 10-Gigabit Ethernet MPC 60-Gigabit Ethernet Queuing MPC 60-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing MPC 100-Gigabit Ethernet MPC Also supported on EX Series switches NOTE: On T4000 Type 5 FPCs, a filter attached at the Layer 2 application point (that is, at the logical interface level) is unable to match with the forwarding class of a packet that is set by a Layer 3 classifier such as DSCP, DSCP V6, inet-precedence, and mpls-exp. Stateless firewall filter Configure at the [edit firewall family family-name] hierarchy level by including the following statement: filter filter-name; The family-name can be any of the following protocol families: any bridge ethernet-switching ccc inet inet6 mpls vpls Protocol family on a logical interface Apply at the [edit interfaces interface-name unit unit-number family family-name] hierarchy level by, including the input, input-list, output, or output-list statements: filter { input filter-name; input-list [ filter-names ]; output filter-name; output-list [ filter-names ]; The protocol family bridge is supported only on MX Series routers. Stateless firewall filter Routing Engine loopback interface 16

37 Chapter 1: Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network Table 5: Stateless Firewall Filter Configuration and Application Summary (continued) Filter Type Application Point Restrictions Service filter Configure at the [edit firewall family (inet inet6)] hierarchy level by including the following statement: service-filter service-filter-name; Family inet or inet6 on a logical interface Apply at the [edit interfaces interface-name unit unit-number family (inet inet6)] hierarchy level by using the service-set statement to apply a service filter as an input or output filter to a service set: Supported only on Adaptive Services (AS) and Multiservices (MS) PICs. service { input { service-set service-set-name service-filter filter-name; output { service-set service-set-name service-filter filter-name; Configure a service set at the [edit services] hierarchy level by including the following statement: service-set service-set-name; Postservice filter Configure at the [edit firewall family (inet inet6)] hierarchy level by including the following statement: service-filter service-filter-name; Family inet or inet6 on a logical interface Apply at the [edit interfaces interface-name unit unit-number family (inet inet6)] hierarchy level by including the post-service-filter statement to apply a service filter as an input filter: A postservice filter is applied to traffic returning to the services interface after service processing. The filter is applied only if a service set is configured and selected. service { input { post-service-filter filter-name; Simple filter Configure at the [edit firewall family inet] hierarchy level by including the following statement: simple-filter filter-name Family inet on a logical interface Apply at the [edit interfaces interface-name unit unit-number family inet] hierarchy level by including the following statement: simple-filter simple-filter-name; Simple filters can only be applied as input filters. Supported on the following platforms only: Gigabit Ethernet intelligent queuing (IQ2) PICs on the M120, M320, and T Series routers. Enhanced Queuing Dense Port Concentrators (EQ DPC) on MX Series routers (and EX Series switches). 17

38 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 5: Stateless Firewall Filter Configuration and Application Summary (continued) Filter Type Application Point Restrictions Reverse packet forwarding (RPF) check filter Family inet or inet6 on a logical interface Supported on MX Series routers and EX Series switches only. Configured at the [edit firewall family (inet inet6)] hierarchy level by including the following statement: filter filter-name; Apply at the [edit interfaces interface-name unit unit-number family (inet inet6)] hierarchy level by including the following statement: rpf-check fail-filter filter-name to apply the stateless firewall filter as an RPF check filter. rpf-check { fail-filter filter-name; mode loose; Related Documentation Stateless Firewall Filter Components on page 9 Supported Standards for Filtering on page 31 How Firewall Filters Evaluate Packets This topic covers the following information: Firewall Filter Packet Evaluation Overview on page 18 Packet Evaluation at a Single Firewall Filter on page 19 Best Practice: Explicitly Accept Any Traffic That Is Not Specifically Discarded on page 20 Best Practice: Explicitly Reject Any Traffic That Is Not Specifically Accepted on page 21 Multiple Firewall Filters Attached to a Single Interface on page 21 Single Firewall Filter Attached to Multiple Interfaces on page 21 Firewall Filter Packet Evaluation Overview The following sequence describes how the device evaluates a packet entering or exiting an interface if the input or output traffic at a device interface is associated with a firewall filter. Packet evaluation proceeds as follows: 1. The device evaluates the packet against the terms in the firewall filter sequentially, beginning with the first term in the filter. If the packet matches all the conditions specified in a term, the device performs all the actions specified in that term. If the packet does not match all the conditions specified in a term, the device proceeds to the next term in the filter (if a subsequent term exists) and evaluates the packet against that term. 18

39 Chapter 1: Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network If the packet does not match any term in the firewall filter, the device implicitly discards the packet. 2. Unlike service filters and simple filters, firewall filters support the next term action, which is neither a terminating action nor a nonterminating action but a flow control action. If the matched term includes the next term action, the device continues evaluation of the packet at the next term within the firewall filter. If the matched term does not include the next term action, evaluation of the packet against the given firewall filter ends at this term. The device does not evaluate the packet against any subsequent terms in this filter. A maximum of 1024 next term actions are supported per firewall filter configuration. If you configure a firewall filter that exceeds this limit, your candidate configuration results in a commit error. 3. The device stops evaluating a packet against a given firewall filter when either the packet matches a term without the next term action or the packet fails to match the last term in the firewall filter. 4. If a local packet arrives at a router interface that is associated with an ingress firewall filter, the filter evaluates the packet twice. The first evaluation occurs in the Packet Forwarding Engine, which is the central processing element of the router's forwarding plane, and the second evaluation occurs in the Routing Engine, which runs the router's control plane software. NOTE: Local packets--chunks of data that are destined for or sent by the router itself--usually contain routing protocol data, data for IP services such as Telnet or SSH, and data for administrative protocols such as the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). If the first evaluation of the firewall filter modifies the incoming local packet or packet context values, the second evaluation of the firewall filter is based on the updated packet or packet context values. For example, suppose that the filter includes a match condition based on the forwarding class or loss priority value associated with the packet and that the filter includes an action that modifies the forwarding class or loss priority value associated with the packet. If an ingress local packet arrives at an associated interface and the filter evaluation in the Packet Forwarding Engine modifies (rather than drops) the packet, then the filter evaluation in the Routing Engine is based on the modified packet context (rather than the original packet context). Packet Evaluation at a Single Firewall Filter Table 6 on page 20 describes packet-filtering behaviors at a device interface associated with a single firewall filter. 19

40 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 6: Packet Evaluation at a Single Firewall Filter Firewall Filter Event Action Subsequent Action The firewall filter term does not specify any match conditions. The term matches all packets by default, and so the device performs the actions specified by that term. If the term actions include the next term action, the device continues evaluation of the packet against the next term within the firewall filter (if a subsequent term exists). The packet matches all conditions specified by the firewall filter term. The device performs the actions specified by that term. If the term actions include the next term action, the device continues evaluation of the packet against the next term within the firewall filter (if a subsequent term exists). The packet matches all conditions specified by the firewall filter term, but the term does not specify any actions. The device implicitly accepts the packet. If the term actions include the next term action, the device continues evaluation of the packet against the next term within the firewall filter (if a subsequent term exists). The packet does not match all conditions specified by the firewall filter term. The device does not perform the actions specified by that term. The device continues evaluation of the packet against the next term within the filter (if a subsequent term exists). The packet does not match any term in the filter The device implicitly discards the packet Every firewall filter configuration includes an implicit discard action at the end of the filter. This implicit terminating action is equivalent to including the following example term t_explicit_discard as the final term in the firewall filter: term t_explicit_discard { then discard; Best Practice: Explicitly Accept Any Traffic That Is Not Specifically Discarded You might want a firewall filter to accept any traffic that the filter does not specifically discard. In this case, we recommend that you configure the firewall filter with a final term that specifies the accept terminating action. In the following example snippet, configuring the t_allow_all_else term as the final term in the firewall filter explicitly configures the firewall filter to accept any traffic that the filter did not specifically discard : term t_allow_all_else { then accept; Following this best practice can simplify troubleshooting of the firewall filter. 20

41 Chapter 1: Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network Best Practice: Explicitly Reject Any Traffic That Is Not Specifically Accepted On the other hand, you might want a firewall filter to reject any traffic that the firewall filter does not specifically accept. In this case, we recommend that you configure the firewall filter with a final term that specifies the reject terminating action. In the following example snippet, configuring the t_deny_all_else term as the final term in the firewall filter explicitly configures the firewall filter to reject any traffic that the filter did not specifically accept: term t_deny_all_else { then reject; Following this best practice can simplify troubleshooting of the firewall filter. Multiple Firewall Filters Attached to a Single Interface On supported device interfaces, you can attach multiple firewall filters to a single interface. For more information, see Understanding Multiple Firewall Filters Applied as a List on page 245. NOTE: On supported interfaces, you can attach a protocol-independent (family any) firewall filter and a protocol-specific (family inet or family inet6) firewall filter to the same interface. The protocol-independent firewall filter executes first. For more information, see Guidelines for Applying Firewall Filters on page 27. Single Firewall Filter Attached to Multiple Interfaces On supported interfaces, you can associate a single firewall filter with multiple interfaces, and Junos OS creates an interface-specific instance of that firewall filter for each associated interface. Junos OS associates each interface-specific instantiation of a firewall filter with a system-generated, interface-specific name. For any count actions in the filter terms, the Packet Forwarding Engine maintains separate, interface-specific counters, and Junos OS associates each counter with a system-generated, interface-specific name. For any policer actions in the filter terms, Junos OS creates separate, interface-specific instances of the policer actions. For more information, see Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Instances Overview. Related Documentation Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Protocol-Independent Traffic on page 48 Firewall Filter Terminating Actions on page 98 Firewall Filters Overview on page 3 Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 21

42 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Guidelines for Applying Firewall Filters on page 27 Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters This topic covers the following information: Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Protocol Families on page 23 Firewall Filter Names and Options on page 23 Firewall Filter Terms on page 24 Firewall Filter Match Conditions on page 24 Firewall Filter Actions on page 26 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Firewall Filters To configure a firewall filter, you can include the following statements. For an IPv4 firewall filter, the family inet statement is optional. firewall { family family-name { filter filter-name { accounting-profile name; instance-shared; interface-specific; physical-interface-filter; term term-name { filter filter-name; term term-name { from { match-conditions; ip-version ip-version { match-conditions; protocol (tcp udp) { match conditions; then { actions; You can include the firewall configuration at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] 22

43 Chapter 1: Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network NOTE: For stateless firewall filtering, you must allow the output tunnel traffic through the firewall filter applied to input traffic on the interface that is the next-hop interface toward the tunnel destination. The firewall filter affects only the packets exiting the router (or switch) by way of the tunnel. Firewall Filter Protocol Families A firewall filter configuration is specific to a particular protocol family. Under the firewall statement, include one of the following statements to specify the protocol family for which you want to filter traffic: family any To filter protocol-independent traffic. family inet To filter Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) traffic. family inet6 To filter Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) traffic. family mpls To filter MPLS traffic. family vpls To filter virtual private LAN service (VPLS) traffic. family ccc To filter Layer 2 circuit cross-connection (CCC) traffic. family bridge To filter Layer 2 bridging traffic for MX Series 3D Universal Edge Routers only. family ethernet-switching To filter Layer 2 (Ethernet) traffic. The family family-name statement is required only to specify a protocol family other than IPv4. To configure an IPv4 firewall filter, you can configure the filter at the [edit firewall] hierarchy level without including the family inet statement, because the [edit firewall] and [edit firewall family inet] hierarchy levels are equivalent. NOTE: For bridge family filter, the ip-protocol match criteria is supported only for IPv4 and not for IPv6. This is applicable for line cards that support the Junos Trio chipset such as the MX 3D MPC line cards. Firewall Filter Names and Options Under the family family-name statement, you can include filter filter-name statements to create and name firewall filters. The filter name can contain letters, numbers, and hyphens (-) and be up to 64 characters long. To include spaces in the name, enclose the entire name in quotation marks ( ). At the [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name] hierarchy level, the following statements are optional: accounting-profile instance-shared (MX Series routers with Modular Port Concentrators (MPCS) only) 23

44 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches interface-specific physical-interface-filter Firewall Filter Terms Under the filter filter-name statement, you can include term term-name statements to create and name filter terms. You must configure at least one term in a firewall filter. You must specify a unique name for each term within a firewall filter. The term name can contain letters, numbers, and hyphens (-) and can be up to 64 characters long. To include spaces in the name, enclose the entire name in quotation marks ( ). The order in which you specify terms within a firewall filter configuration is important. Firewall filter terms are evaluated in the order in which they are configured. By default, new terms are always added to the end of the existing filter. You can use the insert configuration mode command to reorder the terms of a firewall filter. At the [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name term term-name] hierarchy level, the filter filter-name statement is not valid in the same term as from or then statements. When included at this hierarchy level, the filter filter-name statement is used to nest firewall filters. Firewall Filter Match Conditions Firewall filter match conditions are specific to the type of traffic being filtered. With the exception of MPLS-tagged IPv4 or IPv6 traffic, you specify the term s match conditions under the from statement. For MPLS-tagged IPv4 traffic, you specify the term s IPv4 address-specific match conditions under the ip-version ipv4 statement and the term s IPv4 port-specific match conditions under the protocol (tcp udp) statement. For MPLS-tagged IPv6 traffic, you specify the term s IPv6 address-specific match conditions under the ip-version ipv6 statement and the term s IPv6 port-specific match conditions under the protocol (tcp udp) statement. Table 7 on page 24 describes the types of traffic for which you can configure firewall filters. Table 7: Firewall Filter Match Conditions by Protocol Family Traffic Type Hierarchy Level at Which Match Conditions Are Specified Protocol-independent [edit firewall family any filter filter-name term term-name] For the complete list of match conditions, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Protocol-Independent Traffic on page 48. IPv4 [edit firewall family inet filter filter-name term term-name] For the complete list of match conditions, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic on page

45 Chapter 1: Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network Table 7: Firewall Filter Match Conditions by Protocol Family (continued) Traffic Type Hierarchy Level at Which Match Conditions Are Specified IPv6 [edit firewall family inet6 filter filter-name term term-name] For the complete list of match conditions, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic on page 60. MPLS [edit firewall family mpls filter filter-name term term-name] For the complete list of match conditions, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic on page 70. IPv4 addresses in MPLS flows [edit firewall family mpls filter filter-name term term-name ip-version ipv4 ] For the complete list of match conditions, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 72. IPv4 ports in MPLS flows [edit firewall family mpls filter filter-name term term-name ip-version ipv4 protocol (tcp udp)] For the complete list of match conditions, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 72. IPv6 addresses in MPLS flows [edit firewall family mpls filter filter-name term term-name ip-version ipv6 ] For the complete list of match conditions, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 72. IPv6 ports in MPLS flows [edit firewall family mpls filter filter-name term term-name ip-version ipv6 protocol (tcp udp)] For the complete list of match conditions, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 72. VPLS [edit firewall family vpls filter filter-name term term-name] For the complete list of match conditions, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic on page 74. Layer 2 CCC [edit firewall family ccc filter filter-name term term-name] For the complete list of match conditions, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 CCC Traffic on page 85. Layer 2 Bridging (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) [edit firewall family bridge filter filter-name term term-name] [edit firewall family ethernet-switching filter filter-name term term-name] (for EX Series switches only) For the complete list of match conditions, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 Bridging Traffic on page 89. If you specify an IPv6 address in a match condition (the address, destination-address, or source-address match conditions), use the syntax for text representations described in RFC 4291, IP Version 6 Addressing Architecture. For more information about IPv6 addresses, see IPv6 Overview and Supported IPv6 Standards. 25

46 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Firewall Filter Actions Under the then statement for a firewall filter term, you can specify the actions to be taken on a packet that matches the term. Table 8 on page 26 summarizes the types of actions you can specify in a firewall filter term. Table 8: Firewall Filter Action Categories Type of Action Description Comment Terminating Halts all evaluation of a firewall filter for a specific packet. The router (or switch) performs the specified action, and no additional terms are used to examine the packet. See Firewall Filter Terminating Actions on page 98. You can specify only one terminating action in a firewall filter. You can, however, specify one terminating action with one or more nonterminating actions in a single term. For example, within a term, you can specify accept with count and syslog. Nonterminating Performs other functions on a packet (such as incrementing a counter, logging information about the packet header, sampling the packet data, or sending information to a remote host using the system log functionality), but any additional terms are used to examine the packet. All nonterminating actions include an implicit accept action. This accept action is carried out if no other terminating action is configured in the same term. See Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 103. Flow control For standard firewall filters only, the next term action directs the router (or switch) to perform configured actions on the packet and then, rather than terminate the filter, use the next term in the filter to evaluate the packet. If the next term action is included, the matching packet is evaluated against the next term in the firewall filter. Otherwise, the matching packet is not evaluated against subsequent terms in the firewall filter. For example, when you configure a term with the nonterminating action count, the term s action changes from an implicit discard to an implicit accept. The next term action forces the continued evaluation of the firewall filter. You cannot configure the next term action with a terminating action in the same filter term. However, you can configure the next term action with another nonterminating action in the same filter term. A maximum of 1024 next term actions are supported per standard firewall filter configuration. If you configure a standard firewall filter that exceeds this limit, your candidate configuration results in a commit error. Related Documentation Guidelines for Applying Firewall Filters on page 27 Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 26

47 Chapter 1: Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network Guidelines for Applying Firewall Filters This topic covers the following information: Applying Firewall Filters Overview on page 27 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Firewall Filters on page 28 Restrictions on Applying Firewall Filters on page 29 Applying Firewall Filters Overview You can apply a standard firewall filter to a loopback interface on the router or to a physical or logical interface on the router. Table 9 on page 27 summarizes the behavior of firewall filters based on the point to which you attach the filter. Table 9: Firewall Filter Behavior by Filter Attachment Point Filter Attachment Point Filter Behavior Loopback interface The router s loopback interface, lo0, is the interface to the Routing Engine and carries no data packets. When you apply a firewall filter to the loopback interface, the filter evaluates the local packets received or transmitted by the Routing Engine. Physical interface or logical interface When you apply a filter to a physical interface on the router or to a logical interface (or member of an aggregated Ethernet bundle defined on the interface), the filter evaluates all data packet that pass through that interface. Multiple interfaces You can use the same firewall filter one or more times. On M Series routers, except the M120 and M320 routers, if you apply a firewall filter to multiple interfaces, the filter acts on the sum of traffic entering or exiting those interfaces. On T Series, M120, M320, and MX Series routers, interfaces are distributed among multiple packet-forwarding components. On these routers, you can configure firewall filters and service filters that, when applied to multiple interfaces, act on the individual traffic streams entering or exiting each interface, regardless of the sum of traffic on the multiple interfaces. For more information, see Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Instances Overview. 27

48 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 9: Firewall Filter Behavior by Filter Attachment Point (continued) Filter Attachment Point Filter Behavior Single interface with protocol-independent and protocol-specific firewall filters attached For interfaces hosted on the following hardware only, you can attach a protocol-independent (family any) firewall filter and a protocol-specific (family inet or family inet6) firewall filter simultaneously. The protocol-independent firewall filter executes first. ACX Series Universal Access Routers Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) in M7i and M10i Multiservice Edge Routers Modular Interface Cards (MICs) and Modular Port Concentrators (MPCs) in MX Series 3D Universal Edge Routers T Series Core Routers For more information, see Understanding Multiple Firewall Filters Applied as a List on page 245. NOTE: Interfaces hosted on the following hardware do not support protocol-independent firewall filters: Forwarding Engine Boards (FEBs) in M120 routers Enhanced III FPCs in M320 routers FPC2 and FPC3 modules in MX Series routers Dense Port Concentrators (DPCs) in MX Series routers PTX Series Packet Transport Routers For more information, see Understanding Multiple Firewall Filters Applied as a List on page 245. Statement Hierarchy for Applying Firewall Filters To apply a firewall filter to a logical interface, configure the filter statement for the logical interface defined under either the [edit] or [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] hierarchy level. Under the filter statement, you can include one or more of the following statements: group group-number, input filter-name, input-list filter-name, output filter-name, or output-list filter-name. The hierarchy level at which you attach the filter statement depends on the filter type and device type you are configuring. Protocol-Independent Firewall Filters on MX Series Routers To apply a protocol-independent firewall filter to a logical interface on an MX Series router, configure the filter statement directly under the logical unit: interfaces { interface-name { unit logical-unit-number { filter { group group-number; input filter-name; input-list [ filter-names ]; output filter-name; output-list [ filter-names ]; 28

49 Chapter 1: Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network All Other Firewall Filters on Logical Interfaces To apply a firewall filter to a logical interface for all cases other than a protocol-independent filter on an MX Series router, configure the filter statement under the protocol family: interfaces { interface-name { unit logical-unit-number { family family-name {... filter { group group-number; input filter-name; input-list [ filter-names ]; output filter-name; output-list [ filter-names ]; Restrictions on Applying Firewall Filters Filters or Filter Actions Applied to Incompatible FPC on page 29 Filters Applied to Multiple Interfaces on MPCs on page 30 Number of Input and Output Filters Per Logical Interface on page 30 MPLS and Layer 2 CCC Firewall Filters in Lists on page 30 Layer 2 CCC Firewall Filters on MX Series Routers on page 30 Filters or Filter Actions Applied to Incompatible FPC Some filters and filter actions work only on specific MPC/MIC combinations. If an incompatible filter or filter action is configured and applied to an inappropriate interface combination, a warning message is displayed. If the interface is a regular fe-, ge-, or xeinterface the warning message is displayed on the terminal at commit. If the interface is a pseudo logical interface, such as an ae-, lo-, or irb- interface, or the filter is applied to a bridge domain or routing instance, then the warning message is sent via system log. For example, if you configure a filter action to encapsulate gre packets and apply that filter to an irb interface in an FPC, a warning message similar to the following is sent via the system log: Warning: Filter 'jnpr' will not be applied on interface irb as 'action encapsulate or decapsulate' not supported on this FPC. The same filter applied to a MIC interface within an MPC is committed without warning and works as expected. 29

50 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Filters Applied to Multiple Interfaces on MPCs By default, firewall filters applied to multiple interfaces under different routing instances are not shared. This means that multiple instances of the firewall filter are created as the filter is applied to the multiple interfaces. However, when a chassis that includes MPC interfaces is running in enhanced-ip mode, firewall filters applied to multiple MPC interfaces under different routing instances are shared if the instance-shared configuration statement is enabled at the [edit firewall family protocol-family-name filter filter-name] hierarchy level. Number of Input and Output Filters Per Logical Interface Input filters Although you can use the same filter multiple times, you can apply only one input filter or one input filter list to an interface. To specify a single firewall filter to be used to evaluate packets received on the interface, include the input filter-name statement in the filter stanza. To specify an ordered list of firewall filters to be used to evaluate packets received on the interface, include the input-list [ filter-names ] statement in the filter stanza. You can specify up to 16 firewall filters for the filter input list. Output filters Although you can use the same filter multiple times, you can apply only one output filter or one output filter list to an interface. To specify a single firewall filter to be used to evaluate packets transmitted on the interface, include the output filter-name statement in the filter stanza. To specify an ordered list of firewall filters to be used to evaluate packets transmitted on the interface, include the output-list [ filter-names ] statement in the filter stanza. You can specify up to 16 firewall filters in a filter output list. MPLS and Layer 2 CCC Firewall Filters in Lists The input-list filter-names and output-list filter-names statements for firewall filters for the ccc and mpls protocol families are supported on all interfaces with the exception of the following: Management interfaces and internal Ethernet interfaces (fxp or em0) Loopback interfaces (lo0) USB modem interfaces (umd) Layer 2 CCC Firewall Filters on MX Series Routers On MX Series routers only, you cannot apply a Layer 2 CCC firewall filter (a firewall filter configured at the [edit firewall filter family ccc] hierarchy level) as an output filter. On MX Series routers, firewall filters configured for the family ccc statement can be applied only as input filters. 30

51 Chapter 1: Understanding How Firewall Filters Protect Your Network Related Documentation family (Firewall) on page 372 family (Interfaces) filter (Applying to a Logical Interface) on page 374 filter (Configuring) on page 375 Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Supported Standards for Filtering The Junos OS supports the following RFCs related to filtering: RFC 792, Internet Control Message Protocol RFC 2460, Internet Protocol, Version 6 (IPv6) RFC 2474, Definition of the Differentiated Services (DS) Field RFC 2475, An Architecture for Differentiated Services RFC 2597, Assured Forwarding PHB Group RFC 3246, An Expedited Forwarding PHB (Per-Hop Behavior) RFC 4291, IP Version 6 Addressing Architecture RFC 4443, Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification Related Documentation Firewall Filters Overview on page 3 Service Filter Overview on page 279 Simple Filter Overview on page 305 Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Overview on page

52 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches 32

53 CHAPTER 2 Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Numbers or Text Aliases on page 33 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Bit-Field Values on page 34 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Fields on page 39 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Classes on page 47 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Protocol-Independent Traffic on page 48 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic on page 50 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic on page 60 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic on page 70 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 72 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic on page 74 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 CCC Traffic on page 85 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 Bridging Traffic on page 89 Firewall Filter Terminating Actions on page 98 Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 103 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Numbers or Text Aliases Matching on a Single Numeric Value This topic covers the following information: Matching on a Single Numeric Value on page 33 Matching on a Range of Numeric Values on page 34 Matching on a Text Alias for a Numeric Value on page 34 Matching on a List of Numeric Values or Text Aliases on page 34 You can specify a firewall filter match condition based on whether a particular packet field value is a specified numeric value. In the following example, a match occurs if the packet source port number is 25: [edit firewall family inet filter filter1 term term1 from] 33

54 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches set source-port 25 Matching on a Range of Numeric Values You can specify a firewall filter match condition based on whether a particular packet field value falls within a specified range of numeric values. In the following example, a match occurs for source ports values from 1024 through 65,535, inclusive: [edit firewall family inet filter filter2 term term1 from] user@host# set source-port Matching on a Text Alias for a Numeric Value You can specify a firewall filter match condition based on whether a particular packet field value is a numeric value that you specify by using a text string as an alias for the numeric value. In the following example, a match occurs if the packet source port number is 25. For the source-port and destination-port match conditions, the text aliassmtp corresponds to the numeric value 25. [edit firewall family inet filter filter3 term term1 from] user@host# set source-port smtp Matching on a List of Numeric Values or Text Aliases You can specify a firewall filter match condition based on whether a particular packet field value matches any one of multiple numeric values or text aliases that you specify within square brackets and delimited by spaces. In the following example, a match occurs if the packet source port number is any of the following values: 20 (which corresponds to the text aliases ftp-data), 25, or any value from 1024 through [edit firewall family inet filter filter3 term term1 from] user@host# set source-port [ smtp ftp-data ] Related Documentation Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Bit-Field Values on page 34 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Fields on page 39 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Classes on page 47 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Bit-Field Values Match Conditions for Bit-Field Values on page 35 Match Conditions for Common Bit-Field Values or Combinations on page 35 Logical Operators for Bit-Field Values on page 36 Matching on a Single Bit-Field Value or Text Alias on page 36 Matching on Multiple Bit-Field Values or Text Aliases on page 37 Matching on a Negated Bit-Field Value on page 37 Matching on the Logical OR of Two Bit-Field Values on page 38 Matching on the Logical AND of Two Bit-Field Values on page 38 Grouping Bit-Field Match Conditions on page 38 34

55 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Match Conditions for Bit-Field Values Table 10 on page 35 lists the firewall filter match conditions that are based on whether certain bit fields in a packet are set or not set. The second and third columns list the types of traffic for which the match condition is supported. Table 10: Binary and Bit-Field Match Conditions for Firewall Filters Bit-Field Match Condition Match Values ProtocolFamilies for Standard Firewall Filters ProtocolFamilies for Service Filters fragment-flags flags Hexadecimal values or text aliases for the three-bit IP fragmentation flags field in the IP header. family inet family inet fragment-offset value Hexadecimal values or text aliases for the 13-bit fragment offset field in the IP header. family inet family inet tcp-flags value Hexadecimal values or text aliases for the low-order 6 bits of the 8-bit TCP flags field in the TCP header. Junos OS software does not automatically check the first fragment bit when matching TCP flags for IPv4 traffic. To check the first fragment bit for IPv4 traffic only, use the first-fragment match condition. family inet family inet6 family vpls family bridgefamily ethernet-switching (only for EX Series switches) family inet family inet6 Match Conditions for Common Bit-Field Values or Combinations Table 11 on page 36 describes firewall filter match conditions that are based on whether certain commonly used values or combinations of bit fields in a packet are set or not set. You can use text synonyms to specify some common bit-field matches. In the previous example, you can specify tcp-initial as the same match condition. NOTE: Some of the numeric range and bit-field match conditions allow you to specify a text synonym. For a complete list of synonyms: If you are using the J-Web interface, select the synonym from the appropriate list. If you are using the CLI, type a question mark (?) after the from statement. 35

56 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 11: Bit-Field Match Conditions for Common Combinations Match Condition Description ProtocolFamilies for Standard Firewall Filters ProtocolFamilies for Service Filters first-fragment Text alias for the bit-field match condition fragment-offset 0, which indicates the first fragment of a fragmented packet. family inet family inet is-fragment Text alias for the bit-field match condition fragment-offset 0 except, which indicates a trailing fragment of a fragmented packet. family inet family inet tcp-established Alias for the bit-field match condition tcp-flags "(ack rst)", which indicates an established TCP session, but not the first packet of a TCP connection. family inet family inet6 tcp-initial Alias for the bit-field match condition tcp-flags "(!ack & syn)", which indicates the first packet of a TCP connection, but not an established TCP session. family inet family inet6 Logical Operators for Bit-Field Values Table 12 on page 36 lists the logical operators you can apply to single bit-field values when specifying stateless firewall filter match conditions. The operators are listed in order, from highest precedence to lowest precedence. Operations are left-associative, meaning that the operations are processed from left to right. Table 12: Bit-Field Logical Operators Precedence Order Bit-Field Logical Operator Description 1 (complex-match-condition) Grouping The complex match condition is evaluated before any operators outside the parentheses are applied. 2! match-condition Negation A match occurs if the match condition is false. 3 match-condition-1, match-condition-2 Logical AND A match occurs if both match conditions are true. 4 match-condition-1 match-condition-2 or match-condition-1, match-condition-2 Logical OR A match occurs if either match condition is true. Matching on a Single Bit-Field Value or Text Alias For the fragment-flags and tcp-flags bit-match conditions, you can specify firewall filter match conditions based on whether a particular bit in the packet field is set or not set. Numeric value to specify a single bit You can specify a single bit-field match condition by using a numeric value that has one bit set. Depending on the match condition, you can specify a decimal value, a binary value, or a hexadecimal value. To specify a binary 36

57 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions value, specify the number with the prefix b. To specify a hexadecimal value, specify the number with the prefix 0x. In the following example, a match occurs if the RST bit in the TCP flags field is set: [edit firewall family inet filter filter_tcp_rst_number term term1 from] user@host# set tcp-flags 0x04 Text alias to specify a single bit You generally specify a single bit-field match condition by using a text alias enclosed in double-quotation marks ( ). In the following example, a match occurs if the RST bit in the TCP flags field is set: [edit firewall family inet filter filter_tcp_rst_alias term term1 from] user@host# set tcp-flags rst Matching on Multiple Bit-Field Values or Text Aliases You can specify a firewall filter match condition based on whether a particular set of bits in a packet field are set. Numeric values to specify multiple set bits When you specify a numeric value whose binary representation has more than one set bit, the value is treated as a logical AND of the set bits. In the following example, the two match conditions are the same. A match occurs if either bit 0x01 or 0x02 is not set: [edit firewall family inet filter reset_or_not_initial_packet term term5 from] user@host# set tcp-flags!0x3 user@host# set tcp-flags!(0x01 & 0x02) Text aliases that specify common bit-field matches You can use text aliases to specify some common bit-field matches. You specify these matches as a single keyword. In the following example, the tcp-established condition, which is an alias for (ack rst), specifies that a match occurs on TCP packets other than the first packet of a connection: [edit firewall family inet filter reset_or_not_initial_packet term term6 from] user@host# set tcp-established Matching on a Negated Bit-Field Value To negate a match, precede the value with an exclamation point. In the following example, a match occurs if the RST bit in the TCP flags field is not set: [edit firewall family inet filter filter_tcp_rst term term1 from] user@host# set tcp-flags!rst 37

58 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Matching on the Logical OR of Two Bit-Field Values You can use the logical OR operator ( or,) to specify that a match occurs if a bit field matches either of two bit-field values specified. In the following example, a match occurs if the packet is not the initial packet in a TCP session: [edit firewall family inet filter not_initial_packet term term3 from] user@host# set tcp-flags "!syn ack" In a TCP session, the SYN flag is set only in the initial packet sent, while the ACK flag is set in all packets sent after the initial packet. In a packet that is not the initial packet in a TCP session, either the SYN flag is not set or the ACK flag is set. Matching on the Logical AND of Two Bit-Field Values Grouping Bit-Field Match Conditions You can use the logical AND operator (& or +) to specify that a match occurs if a bit field matches both of two bit-field values specified. In the following example, a match occurs if the packet is the initial packet in a TCP session: [edit firewall family inet filter initial_packet term term2 from] user@host# set tcp-flags syn &!ack In a TCP session, the SYN flag is set only in the initial packet sent, while the ACK flag is set in all packets sent after the initial packet. In a packet that is an initial packet in a TCP session, the SYN flag is set and the ACK flag is not set. You can use the logical grouping notation to specify that the complex match condition inside the parentheses is evaluated before any operators outside the parentheses are applied. In the following example, a match occurs if the packet is a TCP reset or if the packet is not the initial packet in the TCP session: [edit firewall family inet filter reset_or_not_initial_packet term term4 from] user@host# set tcp-flags!(syn &!ack) rst In a TCP session, the SYN flag is set only in the initial packet sent, while the ACK flag is set in all packets sent after the initial packet. In a packet that is not the initial packet in a TCP session, the SYN flag is not set and the ACK field is set. Related Documentation Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Numbers or Text Aliases on page 33 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Fields on page 39 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Classes on page 47 38

59 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Fields You can configure firewall filter match conditions that evaluate packet address fields IPv4 source and destination addresses, IPv6 source and destination addresses, or media access control (MAC) source and destination addresses against specified addresses or prefix values. Implied Match on the 0/0 except Address for Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Fields on page 39 Matching an Address Field to a Noncontiguous Subnet Mask or Prefix on page 39 Matching an Address Field to an Excluded Value on page 40 Matching Either IP Address Field to a Single Value on page 44 Matching an Address Field to Noncontiguous Prefixes on page 44 Matching an Address Field to a Prefix List on page 46 Implied Match on the 0/0 except Address for Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Fields Every firewall filter match condition based on a set of addresses or address prefixes is associated with an implicit match on the address /0 except (for IPv4 or VPLS traffic) or 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0/0 except (for IPv6 traffic). As a result, any packet whose specified address field does not match any of the specified addresses or address prefixes fails to match the entire term. Matching an Address Field to a Noncontiguous Subnet Mask or Prefix You can specify a single match condition to match a source address or destination address that falls within a specified address prefix. IPv4 Noncontiguous Subnet Mask Notation For an IPv4 address, you can specify a noncontiguous subnet mask value rather than a prefix length. For example: [edit firewall family inet filter filter_on_dst_addr term term3 from] user@host# set address / Prefix Notation To specify the address prefix, use the notation prefix/prefix-length. In the following example, a match occurs if a destination address matches the prefix /8: [edit firewall family inet filter filter_on_dst_addr term term1 from] user@host# set destination-address /8 Default Prefix Length for IPv4 Addresses If you do not specify /prefix-length for an IPv4 address, the prefix length defaults to /32. The following example illustrates the default prefix value: [edit firewall family inet filter filter_on_dst_addr term term2 from] user@host# set destination-address 10 39

60 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches show destination-address { /32; Default Prefix Length for IPv6 Addresses If you do not specify /prefix-length for an IPv6 address, the prefix length defaults to /128. The following example illustrates the default prefix value: [edit firewall family inet6 filter filter_on_dst_addr term term1 from] user@host# set destination-address ::10 user@host# show destination-address { ::10/128; Default Prefix Length for MAC Addresses If you do not specify /prefix-length for a media access control (MAC) address of a VPLS, Layer 2 CCC, or Layer 2 bridging packet, the prefix length defaults to /48. The following example illustrates the default prefix value: [edit firewall family vpls filter filter_on_dst_mac_addr term term1 from] user@host# set destination-mac-address 01:00:0c:cc:cc:cd user@host# show destination-address { 01:00:0c:cc:cc:cd/48; Matching an Address Field to an Excluded Value For the address-field match conditions, you can include the except keyword to specify that a match occurs for an address field that does not match the specified address or prefix. Excluding IP Addresses in IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic For the following IPv4 and IPv6 match conditions, you can include the except keyword to specify that a match occurs for an IP address field that does not match the specified IP address or prefix: address address except A match occurs if either the source IP address or the destination IP address does not match the specified address or prefix. source-address address except A match occurs if the source IP address does not match the specified address or prefix. destination-address address except A match occurs if the destination IP address does not match the specified address or prefix. In the following example, a match occurs for any IPv4 destination addresses that fall under the /8 prefix, except for addresses that fall under /16. All other addresses implicitly do not match this condition. [edit firewall family inet filter filter_on_dst_addr term term1 from] user@host# set /16 except 40

61 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions set /8 show destination-address { /16 except; /8; In the following example, a match occurs for any IPv4 destination address that does not fall within the prefix /24: [edit firewall family inet filter filter_on_dst_addr term term24 from] user@host# set destination-address /0 user@host# set destination-address /24 except user@host# show destination-address { /0; /24 except; Excluding IP Addresses in VPLS or Layer 2 Bridging Traffic For the following VPLS and Layer 2 bridging match conditions on MX Series routers and EX Series switches only, you can include the except keyword to specify that a match occurs for an IP address field that does not match the specified IP address or prefix: ip-address address except A match occurs if either the source IP address or the destination IP address does not match the specified address or prefix. source-ip-address address except A match occurs if the source IP address does not match the specified address or prefix. destination-ip-address address except A match occurs if the destination IP address does not match the specified address or prefix. 41

62 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches In the following example for filtering VPLS traffic on an MX Series router and on an EX Series switch, a match occurs if the source IP address falls within the exception range of / and the destination IP address matches /8: [edit] firewall { family vpls { filter fvpls { term 1 { from { ip-address { /8; / except; then { count from-55/8; discard; Excluding MAC Addresses in VPLS or Layer 2 Bridging Traffic For the following VPLS or Layer 2 bridging traffic match conditions, you can include the except keyword to specify that a match occurs for a MAC address field that does not match the specified MAC address or prefix: source-mac-address address except A match occurs if the source MAC address does not match the specified address or prefix. destination-mac-address address except A match occurs if either the destination MAC address does not match the specified address or prefix. Excluding All Addresses Requires an Explicit Match on the 0/0 Address If you specify a firewall filter match condition that consists of one or more address-exception match conditions (address match conditions that use the except keyword) but no matchable address match conditions, packets that do not match any of the configured prefixes fails the overall match operation. To configure a firewall filter term of address-exception match conditions to match any address that is not in the prefix list, include an explicit match of 0/0 so that the term contain a matchable address. For the following example firewall filter for IPv4 traffic, the from-trusted-addresses term fails to discard matching traffic, and the INTRUDERS-COUNT counter is missing from the output of the show firewall operational mode command: [edit] user@host# show policy-options prefix-list TRUSTED-ADDRESSES { /24; /24; 42

63 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re] show term from-trusted-addresses { from { source-prefix-list { TRUSTED-ADDRESSES except; protocol icmp; then { count INTRUDERS-COUNT; discard; term other-icmp { from { protocol icmp; then { count VALID-COUNT; accept; term all { then accept; [edit] user@host# run show firewall Filter: protect-re Counters: Name Bytes Packets VALID-COUNT Filter: default_bpdu_filter To cause a filter term of address-exception match conditions to match any address that is not in the prefix list, include an explicit match of 0/0 in the set of match conditions: [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re] user@host# show term from-trusted-addresses from { source-address { /0; source-prefix-list { TRUSTED-ADDRESSES except; protocol icmp; With the addition of the /0 source prefix address to the match condition, the from-trusted-addresses term discards matching traffic, and the INTRUDERS-COUNT counter displays in the output of the show firewall operational mode command: [edit] user@host# run show firewall 43

64 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Filter: protect-re Counters: Name Bytes Packets VALID-COUNT INTRUDERS-COUNT Filter: default_bpdu_filter Matching Either IP Address Field to a Single Value For IPv4 and IPv6 traffic and for VPLS and Layer 2 bridging traffic only on MX Series routers and on EX Series switches, you can use a single match condition to match a single address or prefix value to either the source or destination IP address field. Matching Either IP Address Field in IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic For IPv4 or IPv6 traffic, you can use a single match condition to specify the same address or prefix value as the match for either the source or destination IP address field. Instead of creating separate filter terms that specify the same address for the source-address and destination-address match conditions, you use only the address match condition. A match occurs if either the source IP address or the destination IP address matches the specified address or prefix. If you use the except keyword with the address match condition, a match occurs if both the source IP address and the destination IP address match the specified value before the exception applies. In a firewall filter term that specifies either the source-address or the destination-address match condition, you cannot also specify the address match condition. Matching Either IP Address Field in VPLS or Layer 2 Bridging Traffic For VPLS or Layer 2 bridging traffic on MX Series routers and EX Series switches only, you can use a single match condition to specify the same address or prefix value as the match for either the source or destination IP address field. Instead of creating separate filter terms that specify the same address for the source-ip-address and destination-ip-address match conditions, you use only the ip-address match condition. A match occurs if either the source IP address or the destination IP address matches the specified address or prefix. If you use the except keyword with the ip-address match condition, a match occurs if both the source IP address and the destination IP address match the specified value before the exception applies. In a firewall filter term that specifies either the source-ip-address or the destination-ip-address match condition, you cannot also specify the ip-address match condition. Matching an Address Field to Noncontiguous Prefixes For IPv4 traffic only, specify a single match condition to match the IP source or destination address field to any prefix specified. The prefixes do not need to be contiguous. That is, the prefixes under the source-address or destination-address match condition do not need to be adjacent or neighboring to one another. 44

65 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions In the following example, a match occurs if a destination address matches either the /8 prefix or the /32 prefix: [edit firewall family inet filter filter_on_dst_addr term term5 from] user@host# set destination-address /8 user@host# set destination-address /32 user@host# show destination-address { destination-address /8; destination-address /32; The order in which you specify the prefixes within the match condition is not significant. Packets are evaluated against all the prefixes in the match condition to determine whether a match occurs. If prefixes overlap, longest-match rules are used to determine whether a match occurs. A match condition of noncontiguous prefixes includes an implicit 0/0 except statement, which means that any prefix that does not match any prefix included in the match condition is explicitly considered not to match. Because the prefixes are order-independent and use longest-match rules, longer prefixes subsume shorter ones as long as they are the same type (whether you specify except or not). This is because anything that would match the longer prefix would also match the shorter one. Consider the following example: [edit firewall family inet filter filter_on_src_addr term term1 from] source-address { /10; /24 except; ; /26 except; ; /24; # ignored except; # ignored Within the source-address match condition, two addresses are ignored. The /16 value is ignored because it falls under the address /10, which is the same type. The except value is ignored because it is subsumed by the implicit /0 except match value. Suppose the following source IP address are evaluated by this firewall filter: Source IP address This address matches the /10 prefix, and thus the action in the then statement is taken. Source IP address This address matches the /24 prefix. Because this prefix is negated (that is, includes the except keyword), an explicit mismatch occurs. The next term in the filter is evaluated, if there is one. If there are no more terms, the packet is discarded. Source IP address This address does not match any of the prefixes included in the source-address condition. Instead, it matches the implicit /0 except at 45

66 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches the end of the list of prefixes configured under the source-address match condition, and is considered to be a mismatch. The /24 statement is ignored because it falls under the address /10 both are the same type. The except statement is ignored because it is subsumed by the implicit /0 except statement at the end of the list of prefixes configured under the source-address match condition. BEST PRACTICE: When a firewall filter term includes the from address address match condition and a subsequent term includes the from source-address address match condition for the same address, packets might be processed by the latter term before they are evaluated by any intervening terms. As a result, packets that should be rejected by the intervening terms might be accepted instead, or packets that should be accepted might be rejected instead. To prevent this from occurring, we recommend that you do the following. For every firewall filter term that contains the from address address match condition, replace that term with two separate terms: one that contains the from source-address address match condition, and another that contains the from destination-address address match condition. Matching an Address Field to a Prefix List You can define a list of IPv4 or IPv6 address prefixes for use in a routing policy statement or in a stateless firewall filter match condition that evaluates packet address fields. To define a list of IPv4 or IPv6 address prefixes, include the prefix-list prefix-list statement. prefix-list name { ip-addresses; apply-path path; You can include the statement at the following hierarchy levels: [edit policy-options] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name policy-options] After you have defined a prefix list, you can use it when specifying a firewall filter match condition based on an IPv4 or IPv6 address prefix. [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name term term-name] from { source-prefix-list { prefix-lists; destination-prefix-list { prefix-lists; 46

67 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Related Documentation Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Numbers or Text Aliases on page 33 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Bit-Field Values on page 34 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Classes on page 47 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Classes For IPv4 and IPv6 traffic only, you can use class-based firewall filter conditions to match packet fields based on source class or destination class. Source-Class Usage on page 47 Destination-Class Usage on page 47 Guidelines for Applying SCU or DCU Firewall Filters to Output Interfaces on page 48 Source-Class Usage A source class is a set of source prefixes grouped together and given a class name. To configure a firewall filter term that matches an IP source address field to one or more source classes, use the source-class class-name match condition under the [edit firewall family (inet inet6) filter filter-name term term-name from] hierarchy level. Source-class usage (SCU) enables you to monitor the amount of traffic originating from a specific prefix. With this feature, usage can be tracked and customers can be billed for the traffic they receive. Destination-Class Usage A destination class is a set of destination prefixes grouped together and given a class name. To configure a firewall filter term that matches an IP destination address field to one or more destination classes, use the destination-class class-name match condition at the [edit firewall family (inet inet6) filter filter-name term term-name from] hierarchy level. Destination-class usage (DCU) enables you can track how much traffic is sent to a specific prefix in the core of the network originating from one of the specified interfaces. Note, however, that DCU limits your ability to keep track of traffic moving in the reverse direction. It can account for all traffic that arrives on a core interface and heads toward a specific customer, but it cannot count traffic that arrives on a core interface from a specific prefix. 47

68 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Guidelines for Applying SCU or DCU Firewall Filters to Output Interfaces When applying a SCU or DCU firewall filter to an interface, keep the following guidelines in mind: Output interfaces Class-based firewall filter match conditions work only for firewall filters that you apply to output interfaces. This is because the SCU and DCU are determined after route lookup occurs. Input interfaces Although you can specify a source class and destination class for an input firewall filter, the counters are incremented only if the firewall filter is applied on the output interface. Output interfaces for tunnel traffic SCU and DCU are not supported on the interfaces you configure as the output interface for tunnel traffic for transit packets exiting the router (or switch) through the tunnel. Related Documentation Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic on page 50 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic on page 60 Routing Policies, Firewall Filters, and Traffic Policers Feature Guide for Routing Devices Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Numbers or Text Aliases on page 33 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Bit-Field Values on page 34 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Fields on page 39 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Protocol-Independent Traffic You can configure a firewall filter with match conditions for protocol-independent traffic (family any). To apply a protocol-independent firewall filter to a logical interface, configure the filter statement under the logical unit. 48

69 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions NOTE: On MX Series routers, attach a protocol-independent firewall filter to a logical interface by configuring the filter statement directly under the logical unit: [edit interfaces name unit number filter] [edit logical-systems name interfaces name unit number filter] On all other supported devices, attach a protocol-independent firewall filter to a logical interface by configuring the filter statement under the protocol family (family any): [edit interfaces name unit number family any filter] [edit logical-systems name interfaces name unit number family any filter] Table 13 on page 49 describes the match-conditions you can configure at the [edit firewall family any filter filter-name term term-name from] hierarchy level. Table 13: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Protocol-Independent Traffic Match Condition Description forwarding-class class Match the forwarding class of the packet. Specify assured-forwarding, best-effort, expedited-forwarding, or network-control. For information about forwarding classes and router-internal output queues, see Forwarding Classes Overview. NOTE: On T4000 Type 5 FPCs, a filter attached at the Layer 2 application point (that is, at the logical interface level) is unable to match with the forwarding class of a packet that is set by a Layer 3 classifier such as DSCP, DSCP V6, inet-precedence, and mpls-exp. forwarding-class-except class Do not match on the forwarding class. For details, see the forwarding-class match condition. interface interface-name Match the interface on which the packet was received. NOTE: If you configure this match condition with an interface that does not exist, the term does not match any packet. interface-set interface-set-name Match the interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface set. To define an interface set, include the interface-set statement at the [edit firewall] hierarchy level. For more information, see Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview on page

70 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 13: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Protocol-Independent Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description loss-priority level Match the packet loss priority (PLP) level. Specify a single level or multiple levels: low, medium-low, medium-high, or high. Supported on M120 and M320 routers; M7i and M10i routers with the Enhanced CFEB (CFEB-E); and MX Series routers. For IP traffic on M320, MX Series, and T Series routers with Enhanced II Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs), you must include the tri-color statement at the [edit class-of-service] hierarchy level to commit a PLP configuration with any of the four levels specified. If the tri-color statement is not enabled, you can only configure the high and low levels. This applies to all protocol families. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. For information about the tri-color statement, see Configuring Tricolor Marking. For information about using behavior aggregate (BA) classifiers to set the PLP level of incoming packets, see Forwarding Classes Overview. loss-priority-except level Do not match the PLP level. For details, see the loss-priority match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. packet-length bytes Match the length of the received packet, in bytes. The length refers only to the IP packet, including the packet header, and does not include any Layer 2 encapsulation overhead. packet-length-except bytes Do not match on the received packet length, in bytes. For details, see the packet-length match type. Related Documentation Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Terminating Actions on page 98 Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 103 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic You can configure a firewall filter with match conditions for Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) traffic (family inet). Table 14 on page 50 describes the match-conditions you can configure at the [edit firewall family inet filter filter-name term term-name from] hierarchy level. Table 14: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic Match Condition Description address address [ except ] Match the IPv4 source or destination address field unless the except option is included. If the option is included, do not match the IPv4 source or destination address field. 50

71 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 14: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description ah-spi spi-value (M Series routers, except M120 and M320) Match the IPsec authentication header (AH) security parameter index (SPI) value. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. ah-spi-except spi-value (M Series routers, except M120 and M320) Do not match the IPsec AH SPI value. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. apply-groups Specify which groups to inherit configuration data from. You can specify more than one group name. You must list them in order of inheritance priority. The configuration data in the first group takes priority over the data in subsequent groups. apply-groups-except Specify which groups not to inherit configuration data from. You can specify more than one group name. destination-address address [ except ] Match the IPv4 destination address field unless the except option is included. If the option is included, do not match the IPv4 destination address field.. You cannot specify both the address and destination-address match conditions in the same term. destination-class class-names Match one or more specified destination class names (sets of destination prefixes grouped together and given a class name). For more information, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Classes on page 47. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. destination-class-except class-names Do not match one or more specified destination class names. For details, see the destination-class match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. destination-port number Match the UDP or TCP destination port field. You cannot specify both the port and destination-port match conditions in the same term. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the protocol udp or protocol tcp match statement in the same term to specify which protocol is being used on the port. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the port numbers are also listed): afs (1483), bgp (179), biff (512), bootpc (68), bootps (67), cmd (514), cvspserver (2401), dhcp (67), domain (53), eklogin (2105), ekshell (2106), exec (512), finger (79), ftp (21), ftp-data (20), http (80), https (443), ident (113), imap (143), kerberos-sec (88), klogin (543), kpasswd (761), krb-prop (754), krbupdate (760), kshell (544), ldap (389), ldp (646), login (513), mobileip-agent (434), mobilip-mn (435), msdp (639), netbios-dgm (138), netbios-ns (137), netbios-ssn (139), nfsd (2049), nntp (119), ntalk (518), ntp (123), pop3 (110), pptp (1723), printer (515), radacct (1813), radius (1812), rip (520), rkinit (2108), smtp (25), snmp (161), snmptrap (162), snpp (444), socks (1080), ssh (22), sunrpc (111), syslog (514), tacacs (49), tacacs-ds (65), talk (517), telnet (23), tftp (69), timed (525), who (513), or xdmcp (177). destination-port-except number Do not match the UDP or TCP destination port field. For details, see the destination-port match condition. 51

72 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 14: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description destination-prefix-list name [ except ] Match destination prefixes in the specified list unless the except option is included. If the option is included, do not match the destination prefixes in the specified list. Specify the name of a prefix list defined at the [edit policy-options prefix-list prefix-list-name] hierarchy level. dscp number Match the Differentiated Services code point (DSCP). The DiffServ protocol uses the type-of-service (ToS) byte in the IP header. The most significant 6 bits of this byte form the DSCP. For more information, see Understanding How Behavior Aggregate Classifiers Prioritize Trusted Traffic. You can specify a numeric value from 0 through 63. To specify the value in hexadecimal form, include 0x as a prefix. To specify the value in binary form, include b as a prefix. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): RFC 3246, An Expedited Forwarding PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), defines one code point: ef (46). RFC 2597, Assured Forwarding PHB Group, defines 4 classes, with 3 drop precedences in each class, for a total of 12 code points: af11 (10), af12 (12), af13 (14) af21 (18), af22 (20), af23 (22) af31 (26), af32 (28), af33 (30) af41 (34), af42 (36), af43 (38) dscp-except number Do not match on the DSCP number. For more information, see the dscp match condition. esp-spi spi-value Match the IPsec encapsulating security payload (ESP) SPI value. Match on this specific SPI value. You can specify the ESP SPI value in hexadecimal, binary, or decimal form. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. esp-spi-except spi-value Match the IPsec ESP SPI value. Do not match on this specific SPI value. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. first-fragment Match if the packet is the first fragment of a fragmented packet. Do not match if the packet is a trailing fragment of a fragmented packet. The first fragment of a fragmented packet has a fragment offset value of 0. This match condition is an alias for the bit-field match condition fragment-offset0 match condition. To match both first and trailing fragments, you can use two terms that specify different match conditions: first-fragment and is-fragment. 52

73 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 14: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description flexible-match-mask value bit-length Length of the data to be matched in bits, not needed for string input (0..128) bit-offset Bit offset after the (match-start + byte) offset (0..7) byte-offset Byte offset after the match start point flexible-mask-name Select a flexible match from predefined template field mask-in-hex Mask out bits in the packet data to be matched match-start Start point to match in packet prefix Value data/string to be matched See <concept topic> for details flexible-match-range value bit-length Length of the data to be matched in bits (0..32) bit-offset Bit offset after the (match-start + byte) offset (0..7) byte-offset Byte offset after the match start point flexible-range-name Select a flexible match from predefined template field match-start Start point to match in packet range Range of values to be matched range-except Do not match this range of values See <concept topic> for details forwarding-class class Match the forwarding class of the packet. Specify assured-forwarding, best-effort, expedited-forwarding, or network-control. For information about forwarding classes and router-internal output queues, see Forwarding Classes Overview. forwarding-class-except class Do not match the forwarding class of the packet. For details, see the forwarding-class match condition. 53

74 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 14: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description fragment-flags number (Ingress only) Match the three-bit IP fragmentation flags field in the IP header. In place of the numeric field value, you can specify one of the following keywords (the field values are also listed): dont-fragment (0x4), more-fragments (0x2), or reserved (0x8). fragment-offset value Match the 13-bit fragment offset field in the IP header. The value is the offset, in 8-byte units, in the overall datagram message to the data fragment. Specify a numeric value, a range of values, or a set of values. An offset value of 0 indicates the first fragment of a fragmented packet. The first-fragment match condition is an alias for the fragment-offset 0 match condition. To match both first and trailing fragments, you can use two terms that specify different match conditions (first-fragment and is-fragment). fragment-offset-except number Do not match the 13-bit fragment offset field. icmp-code number Match the ICMP message code field. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the protocol icmp match condition in the same term. If you configure this match condition, you must also configure the icmp-type message-type match condition in the same term. An ICMP message code provides more specific information than an ICMP message type, but the meaning of an ICMP message code is dependent on the associated ICMP message type. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed). The keywords are grouped by the ICMP type with which they are associated: parameter-problem: ip-header-bad (0), required-option-missing (1) redirect: redirect-for-host (1), redirect-for-network (0), redirect-for-tos-and-host (3), redirect-for-tos-and-net (2) time-exceeded: ttl-eq-zero-during-reassembly (1), ttl-eq-zero-during-transit (0) unreachable: communication-prohibited-by-filtering (13), destination-host-prohibited (10), destination-host-unknown (7), destination-network-prohibited (9), destination-network-unknown (6), fragmentation-needed (4), host-precedence-violation (14), host-unreachable (1), host-unreachable-for-tos (12), network-unreachable (0), network-unreachable-for-tos (11), port-unreachable (3), precedence-cutoff-in-effect (15), protocol-unreachable (2), source-host-isolated (8), source-route-failed (5) icmp-code-except message-code Do not match the ICMP message code field. For details, see the icmp-code match condition. icmp-type number Match the ICMP message type field. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the protocol icmp match condition in the same term. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): echo-reply (0), echo-request (8), info-reply (16), info-request (15), mask-request (17), mask-reply (18), parameter-problem (12), redirect (5), router-advertisement (9), router-solicit (10), source-quench (4), time-exceeded (11), timestamp (13), timestamp-reply (14), or unreachable (3). 54

75 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 14: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description icmp-type-except message-type Do not match the ICMP message type field. For details, see the icmp-type match condition. interface interface-name Match the interface on which the packet was received. NOTE: If you configure this match condition with an interface that does not exist, the term does not match any packet. interface-group group-number Match the logical interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface group or set of interface groups. For group-number, specify a single value or a range of values from 0 through 255. To assign a logical interface to an interface group group-number, specify the group-number at the [interfaces interface-name unit number family family filter group] hierarchy level. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. For more information, see Filtering Packets Received on a Set of Interface Groups Overview on page 262. interface-group-except group-number Do not match the logical interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface group or set of interface groups. For details, see the interface-group match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. interface-set interface-set-name Match the interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface set. To define an interface set, include the interface-set statement at the [edit firewall] hierarchy level. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. For more information, see Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview on page

76 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 14: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description ip-options values Match the 8-bit IP option field, if present, to the specified value or list of values. In place of a numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the option values are also listed): loose-source-route (131), record-route (7), router-alert (148), security (130), stream-id (136),strict-source-route (137), or timestamp (68). To match any value for the IP option, use the text synonym any. To match on multiple values, specify the list of values within square brackets ('[ and '] ). To match a range of values, use the value specification [ value1-value2 ]. For example, the match condition ip-options [ ] matches on an IP options field that contains the loose-source-route, record-route, or security values, or any other value from 0 through 147. However, this match condition does not match on an IP options field that contains only the router-alert value (148). For most interfaces, a filter term that specifies an ip-option match on one or more specific IP option values (a value other than any) causes packets to be sent to the Routing Engine so that the kernel can parse the IP option field in the packet header. For a firewall filter term that specifies an ip-option match on one or more specific IP option values, you cannot specify the count, log, or syslog nonterminating actions unless you also specify the discard terminating action in the same term. This behavior prevents double-counting of packets for a filter applied to a transit interface on the router. Packets processed on the kernel might be dropped in case of a system bottleneck. To ensure that matched packets are instead sent to the Packet Forwarding Engine (where packet processing is implemented in hardware), use the ip-options any match condition. The 10-Gigabit Ethernet Modular Port Concentrator (MPC), 100-Gigabit Ethernet MPC, 60-Gigabit Ethernet MPC, 60-Gigabit Queuing Ethernet MPC, and 60-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing MPC on MX Series routers are capable of parsing the IP option field of the IPv4 packet header. For interfaces configured on those MPCs, all packets that are matched using the ip-options match condition are sent to the Packet Forwarding Engine for processing. NOTE: On M and T series routers, firewall filters cannot count ip-options packets on a per option type and per interface basis. A limited work around is to use the show pfe statistics ip options command to see ip-options statistics on a per PFE basis. See show pfe statistics ip for sample output. ip-options-except values Do not match the IP option field to the specified value or list of values. For details about specifying the values, see the ip-options match condition. is-fragment Match if the packet is a trailing fragment of a fragmented packet. Do not match the first fragment of a fragmented packet. NOTE: To match both first and trailing fragments, you can use two terms that specify different match conditions (first-fragment and is-fragment). 56

77 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 14: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description loss-priority level Match the packet loss priority (PLP) level. Specify a single level or multiple levels: low, medium-low, medium-high, or high. Supported on M120 and M320 routers; M7i and M10i routers with the Enhanced CFEB (CFEB-E); and MX Series routers. For IP traffic on M320, MX Series, and T Series routers with Enhanced II Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs), you must include the tri-color statement at the [edit class-of-service] hierarchy level to commit a PLP configuration with any of the four levels specified. If the tri-color statement is not enabled, you can only configure the high and low levels. This applies to all protocol families. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. For information about the tri-color statement, see Configuring Tricolor Marking. For information about using behavior aggregate (BA) classifiers to set the PLP level of incoming packets, see Understanding How Behavior Aggregate Classifiers Prioritize Trusted Traffic. loss-priority-except level Do not match the PLP level. For details, see the loss-priority match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. packet-length bytes Match the length of the received packet, in bytes. The length refers only to the IP packet, including the packet header, and does not include any Layer 2 encapsulation overhead. packet-length-except bytes Do not match the length of the received packet, in bytes. For details, see the packet-length match type. port number Match the UDP or TCP source or destination port field. If you configure this match condition, you cannot configure the destination-port match condition or the source-port match condition in the same term. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the protocol udp or protocol tcp match statement in the same term to specify which protocol is being used on the port. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the text synonyms listed under destination-port. port-except number Do not match the UDP or TCP source AND destination port field. For details, see the port match condition. precedence ip-precedence-value Match the IP precedence field. In place of the numeric field value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): critical-ecp (0xa0), flash (0x60), flash-override (0x80), immediate (0x40), internet-control (0xc0), net-control (0xe0), priority (0x20), or routine (0x00). You can specify precedence in hexadecimal, binary, or decimal form. 57

78 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 14: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description precedence-except ip-precedence-value Do not match the IP precedence field. In place of the numeric field value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): critical-ecp (0xa0), flash (0x60), flash-override (0x80), immediate (0x40), internet-control (0xc0), net-control (0xe0), priority (0x20), or routine (0x00). You can specify precedence in hexadecimal, binary, or decimal form. prefix-list name [ except ] Match the prefixes of the source or destination address fields to the prefixes in the specified list unless the except option is included. If the option is included, do not match the prefixes of the source or destination address fields to the prefixes in the specified list. The prefix list is defined at the [edit policy-options prefix-list prefix-list-name] hierarchy level. protocol number Match the IP protocol type field. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): ah (51), dstopts (60), egp (8), esp (50), fragment (44), gre (47), hop-by-hop (0), icmp (1), icmp6 (58), icmpv6 (58), igmp (2), ipip (4), ipv6 (41), ospf (89), pim (103), rsvp (46), sctp (132), tcp (6), udp (17), or vrrp (112). protocol-except number Do not match the IP protocol type field. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): ah (51), dstopts (60), egp (8), esp (50), fragment (44), gre (47), hop-by-hop (0), icmp (1), icmp6 (58), icmpv6 (58), igmp (2), ipip (4), ipv6 (41), ospf (89), pim (103), rsvp (46), sctp (132), tcp (6), udp (17), or vrrp (112). rat-type tech-type-value Match the radio-access technology (RAT) type specified in the 8-bit Tech-Type field of Proxy Mobile IPv4 (PMIPv4) access technology type extension. The technology type specifies the access technology through which the mobile device is connected to the access network. Specify a single value, a range of values, or a set of values. You can specify a technology type as a numeric value from 0 through 255 or as a system keyword. The following numeric values are examples of well-known technology types: Numeric value 1 matches IEEE Numeric value 2 matches IEEE a/b/g. Numeric value 3 matches IEEE e Numeric value 4 matches IEEE m. Text string eutran matches 4G. Text string geran matches 2G. Text string utran matches 3G. rat-type-except tech-type-value Do not match the RAT Type. service-filter-hit Match a packet received from a filter where a service-filter-hit action was applied. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. source-address address [ except ] Match the IPv4 address of the source node sending the packet unless the except option is included. If the option is included, do not match the IPv4 address of the source node sending the packet. You cannot specify both the address and source-address match conditions in the same term. 58

79 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 14: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description source-class class-names Match one or more specified source class names (sets of source prefixes grouped together and given a class name). For more information, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Classes on page 47. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. source-class-except class-names Do not match one or more specified source class names. For details, see the source-class match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. source-port number Match the UDP or TCP source port field. You cannot specify the port and source-port match conditions in the same term. If you configure this match condition for IPv4 traffic, we recommend that you also configure the protocol udp or protocol tcp match statement in the same term to specify which protocol is being used on the port. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the text synonyms listed with the destination-port number match condition. source-port-except number Do not match the UDP or TCP source port field. For details, see the source-port match condition. source-prefix-list name [ except ] Match source prefixes in the specified list unless the except option is included. If the option is included, do not match the source prefixes in the specified list. Specify the name of a prefix list defined at the [edit policy-options prefix-list prefix-list-name] hierarchy level. tcp-established Match TCP packets of an established TCP session (packets other than the first packet of a connection). This is an alias for tcp-flags "(ack rst)". This match condition does not implicitly check that the protocol is TCP. To check this, specify the protocol tcp match condition. 59

80 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 14: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description tcp-flags value Match one or more of the low-order 6 bits in the 8-bit TCP flags field in the TCP header. To specify individual bit fields, you can specify the following text synonyms or hexadecimal values: fin (0x01) syn (0x02) rst (0x04) push (0x08) ack (0x10) urgent (0x20) In a TCP session, the SYN flag is set only in the initial packet sent, while the ACK flag is set in all packets sent after the initial packet. You can string together multiple flags using the bit-field logical operators. For combined bit-field match conditions, see the tcp-established and tcp-initial match conditions. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the protocol tcp match statement in the same term to specify that the TCP protocol is being used on the port. For IPv4 traffic only, this match condition does not implicitly check whether the datagram contains the first fragment of a fragmented packet. To check for this condition for IPv4 traffic only, use the first-fragment match condition. tcp-initial Match the initial packet of a TCP connection. This is an alias for tcp-flags "(!ack & syn)". This condition does not implicitly check that the protocol is TCP. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the protocol tcp match condition in the same term. ttl number Match the IPv4 time-to-live number. Specify a TTL value or a range of TTL values. For number, you can specify one or more values from 0 through 255. This match condition is supported only on M120, M320, MX Series, and T Series routers. ttl-except number Do not match on the IPv4 TTL number. For details, see the ttl match condition. Related Documentation Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Terminating Actions on page 98 Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 103 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic You can configure a firewall filter with match conditions for Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) traffic (family inet6). Table 15 on page 61 describes the match conditions you can configure at the [edit firewall family inet6 filter filter-name term term-name from] hierarchy level. 60

81 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 15: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic Match Condition Description address address [ except ] Match the IPv6 source or destination address field unless the except option is included. If the option is included, do not match the IPv6 source or destination address field. apply-groups Specify which groups to inherit configuration data from. You can specify more than one group name. You must list them in order of inheritance priority. The configuration data in the first group takes priority over the data in subsequent groups. apply-groups-except Specify which groups not to inherit configuration data from. You can specify more than one group name. destination-address address [ except ] Match the IPv6 destination address field unless the except option is included. If the option is included, do not match the IPv6 destination address field. You cannot specify both the address and destination-address match conditions in the same term. destination-class class-names Match one or more specified destination class names (sets of destination prefixes grouped together and given a class name). NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. For more information, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Classes on page 47. destination-class-except class-names Do not match one or more specified destination class names. For details, see the destination-class match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. destination-port number Match the UDP or TCP destination port field. You cannot specify both the port and destination-port match conditions in the same term. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the next-header udp or next-header tcp match condition in the same term to specify which protocol is being used on the port. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the port numbers are also listed): afs (1483), bgp (179), biff (512), bootpc (68), bootps (67), cmd (514), cvspserver (2401), dhcp (67), domain (53), eklogin (2105), ekshell (2106), exec (512), finger (79), ftp (21), ftp-data (20), http (80), https (443), ident (113), imap (143), kerberos-sec (88), klogin (543), kpasswd (761), krb-prop (754), krbupdate (760), kshell (544), ldap (389), ldp (646), login (513), mobileip-agent (434), mobilip-mn (435), msdp (639), netbios-dgm (138), netbios-ns (137), netbios-ssn (139), nfsd (2049), nntp (119), ntalk (518), ntp (123), pop3 (110), pptp (1723), printer (515), radacct (1813), radius (1812), rip (520), rkinit (2108), smtp (25), snmp (161), snmptrap (162), snpp (444), socks (1080), ssh (22), sunrpc (111), syslog (514), tacacs (49), tacacs-ds (65), talk (517), telnet (23), tftp (69), timed (525), who (513), or xdmcp (177). destination-port-except number Do not match the UDP or TCP destination port field. For details, see the destination-port match condition. destination-prefix-list prefix-list-name [ except ] Match the IPv6 destination prefix to the specified list unless the except option is included. If the option is included, do not match the IPv6 destination prefix to the specified list. The prefix list is defined at the [edit policy-options prefix-list prefix-list-name] hierarchy level. 61

82 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 15: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description extension-headers header-type Match an extension header type that is contained in the packet by identifying a Next Header value. NOTE: This match condition is only supported on MPCs in MX Series routers. In the first fragment of a packet, the filter searches for a match in any of the extension header types. When a packet with a fragment header is found (a subsequent fragment), the filter only searches for a match of the next extension header type because the location of other extension headers is unpredictable. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): ah (51), destination (60), esp (50), fragment (44), hop-by-hop (0), mobility (135), or routing (43). To match any value for the extension header option, use the text synonym any. extension-headers-except header-type Do not match an extension header type that is contained in the packet. For details, see the extension-headers match condition. NOTE: This match condition is only supported on MPCs in MX Series routers. flexible-match-mask value bit-length Length of the data to be matched in bits, not needed for string input (0..128) bit-offset Bit offset after the (match-start + byte) offset (0..7) byte-offset Byte offset after the match start point flexible-mask-name Select a flexible match from predefined template field mask-in-hex Mask out bits in the packet data to be matched match-start Start point to match in packet prefix Value data/string to be matched See Firewall Filter Flexible Match Conditions for details 62

83 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 15: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description flexible-match-range value bit-length Length of the data to be matched in bits (0..32) bit-offset Bit offset after the (match-start + byte) offset (0..7) byte-offset Byte offset after the match start point flexible-range-name Select a flexible match from predefined template field match-start Start point to match in packet range Range of values to be matched range-except Do not match this range of values See Firewall Filter Flexible Match Conditions for details forwarding-class class Match the forwarding class of the packet. Specify assured-forwarding, best-effort, expedited-forwarding, or network-control. For information about forwarding classes and router-internal output queues, see Forwarding Classes Overview. forwarding-class-except class Do not match the forwarding class of the packet. For details, see the forwarding-class match condition. hop-limit hop-limit Match the hop limit to the specified hop limit or set of hop limits. For hop-limit, specify a single value or a range of values from 0 through 255. Supported on interfaces hosted on MICs or MPCs in MX Series routers only. hop-limit-except hop-limit Do not match the hop limit to the specified hop limit or set of hop limits. For details, see the hop-limit match condition. Supported on interfaces hosted on MICs or MPCs in MX Series routers only. 63

84 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 15: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description icmp-code message-code Match the ICMP message code field. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the next-header icmp or next-header icmp6 match condition in the same term. If you configure this match condition, you must also configure the icmp-type message-type match condition in the same term. An ICMP message code provides more specific information than an ICMP message type, but the meaning of an ICMP message code is dependent on the associated ICMP message type. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed). The keywords are grouped by the ICMP type with which they are associated: parameter-problem: ip6-header-bad (0), unrecognized-next-header (1), unrecognized-option (2) time-exceeded: ttl-eq-zero-during-reassembly (1), ttl-eq-zero-during-transit (0) destination-unreachable: administratively-prohibited (1), address-unreachable (3), no-route-to-destination (0), port-unreachable (4) icmp-code-except message-code Do not match the ICMP message code field. For details, see the icmp-code match condition. icmp-type message-type Match the ICMP message type field. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the next-header icmp or next-header icmp6 match condition in the same term. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): certificate-path-advertisement (149), certificate-path-solicitation (148), destination-unreachable (1), echo-reply (129), echo-request (128), home-agent-address-discovery-reply (145), home-agent-address-discovery-request (144), inverse-neighbor-discovery-advertisement (142), inverse-neighbor-discovery-solicitation (141), membership-query (130), membership-report (131), membership-termination (132), mobile-prefix-advertisement-reply (147), mobile-prefix-solicitation (146), neighbor-advertisement (136), neighbor-solicit (135), node-information-reply (140), node-information-request (139), packet-too-big (2), parameter-problem (4), private-experimentation-100 (100), private-experimentation-101 (101), private-experimentation-200 (200), private-experimentation-201 (201), redirect (137), router-advertisement (134), router-renumbering (138), router-solicit (133), or time-exceeded (3). For private-experimentation-201 (201), you can also specify a range of values within square brackets. icmp-type-except message-type Do not match the ICMP message type field. For details, see the icmp-type match condition. interface interface-name Match the interface on which the packet was received. NOTE: If you configure this match condition with an interface that does not exist, the term does not match any packet. 64

85 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 15: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description interface-group group-number Match the logical interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface group or set of interface groups. For group-number, specify a single value or a range of values from 0 through 255. To assign a logical interface to an interface group group-number, specify the group-number at the [interfaces interface-name unit number family family filter group] hierarchy level. For more information, see Filtering Packets Received on a Set of Interface Groups Overview on page 262. interface-group-except group-number Do not match the logical interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface group or set of interface groups. For details, see the interface-group match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. interface-set interface-set-name Match the interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface set. To define an interface set, include the interface-set statement at the [edit firewall] hierarchy level. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. For more information, see Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview on page 262. ip-options values Match the 8-bit IP option field, if present, to the specified value or list of values. In place of a numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the option values are also listed): loose-source-route (131), record-route (7), router-alert (148), security (130), stream-id (136),strict-source-route (137), or timestamp (68). To match any value for the IP option, use the text synonym any. To match on multiple values, specify the list of values within square brackets ('[ and '] ). To match a range of values, use the value specification [ value1-value2 ]. For example, the match condition ip-options [ ] matches on an IP options field that contains the loose-source-route, record-route, or security values, or any other value from 0 through 147. However, this match condition does not match on an IP options field that contains only the router-alert value (148). For most interfaces, a filter term that specifies an ip-option match on one or more specific IP option values (a value other than any) causes packets to be sent to the Routing Engine so that the kernel can parse the IP option field in the packet header. For a firewall filter term that specifies an ip-option match on one or more specific IP option values, you cannot specify the count, log, or syslog nonterminating actions unless you also specify the discard terminating action in the same term. This behavior prevents double-counting of packets for a filter applied to a transit interface on the router. Packets processed on the kernel might be dropped in case of a system bottleneck. To ensure that matched packets are instead sent to the Packet Forwarding Engine (where packet processing is implemented in hardware), use the ip-options any match condition. The 10-Gigabit Ethernet Modular Port Concentrator (MPC), 100-Gigabit Ethernet MPC, 60-Gigabit Ethernet MPC, 60-Gigabit Queuing Ethernet MPC, and 60-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing MPC on MX Series routers are capable of parsing the IP option field of the IPv4 packet header. For interfaces configured on those MPCs, all packets that are matched using the ip-options match condition are sent to the Packet Forwarding Engine for processing. 65

86 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 15: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description ip-options-except values Do not match the IP option field to the specified value or list of values. For details about specifying the values, see the ip-options match condition. loss-priority level Match the packet loss priority (PLP) level. Specify a single level or multiple levels: low, medium-low, medium-high, or high. Supported on M120 and M320 routers; M7i and M10i routers with the Enhanced CFEB (CFEB-E); and MX Series routers and EX Series switches. For IP traffic on M320, MX Series, T Series routers and EX Series switches with Enhanced II Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs), you must include the tri-color statement at the [edit class-of-service] hierarchy level to commit a PLP configuration with any of the four levels specified. If the tri-color statement is not enabled, you can only configure the high and low levels. This applies to all protocol families. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. For information about the tri-color statement, see Configuring Tricolor Marking. For information about using behavior aggregate (BA) classifiers to set the PLP level of incoming packets, see Forwarding Classes Overview. loss-priority-except level Do not match the PLP level. For details, see the loss-priority match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. next-header header-type Match the first 8-bit Next Header field in the packet. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): ah (51), dstops (60), egp (8), esp (50), fragment (44), gre (47), hop-by-hop (0), icmp (1), icmp6 (58), icmpv6 (58), igmp (2), ipip (4), ipv6 (41), mobility (135), no-next-header (59), ospf (89), pim (103), routing (43), rsvp (46), sctp (132), tcp (6), udp (17), or vrrp (112). NOTE: next-header icmp6 and next-header icmpv6 match conditions perform the same function. next-header icmp6 is the preferred option. next-header icmpv6 is hidden in the Junos OS CLI. next-header-except header-type Do not match the 8-bit Next Header field that identifies the type of header between the IPv6 header and payload. For details, see the next-header match type. packet-length bytes Match the length of the received packet, in bytes. The length refers only to the IP packet, including the packet header, and does not include any Layer 2 encapsulation overhead. packet-length-except bytes Do not match the length of the received packet, in bytes. For details, see the packet-length match type. 66

87 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 15: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description payload-protocol protocol-type Match the payload protocol type. In place of the protocol-type numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): specify one or a set of of the following: ah (51), dstopts (60), egp (8), esp (50), fragment (44), gre (47), hop-by-hop (0), icmp (1), icmp6 (58, igmp (2), ipip (4), ipv6 (41), no-next-header, ospf (89), pim (103), routing, rsvp (46), sctp (132), tcp (6), udp (17), or vrrp (112). You can also use the payload-protocol condition to match an extension header type that the Juniper Networks firmware cannot interpret. You can specify a range of extension header values within square brackets. When the firmware finds the first extension header type that it cannot interpret in a packet, the payload-protocol value is set to that extension header type. The firewall filter only examines the first extension header type that the firmware cannot interpret in the packet. NOTE: This match condition is only supported on MPCs on MX Series Routers payload-protocol-except protocol-type Do not match the payload protocol type. For details, see the payload-protocol match type. NOTE: This match condition is only supported on MPCs on MX Series Routers port number Match the UDP or TCP source or destination port field. If you configure this match condition, you cannot configure the destination-port match condition or the source-port match condition in the same term. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the next-header udp or next-header tcp match condition in the same term to specify which protocol is being used on the port. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the text synonyms listed under destination-port. port-except number Do not match the UDP or TCP source or destination port field. For details, see the port match condition. prefix-list prefix-list-name [ except ] Match the prefixes of the source or destination address fields to the prefixes in the specified list unless the except option is included. If the option is included, do not match the prefixes of the source or destination address fields to the prefixes in the specified list. The prefix list is defined at the [edit policy-options prefix-list prefix-list-name] hierarchy level. service-filter-hit Match a packet received from a filter where a service-filter-hit action was applied. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. source-address address [ except ] Match the IPv6 address of the source node sending the packet unless the except option is included. If the option is included, do not match the IPv6 address of the source node sending the packet. You cannot specify both the address and source-address match conditions in the same term. 67

88 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 15: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description source-class class-names Match one or more specified source class names (sets of source prefixes grouped together and given a class name). NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. For more information, see Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Classes on page 47. source-class-except class-names Do not match one or more specified source class names. For details, see the source-class match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. source-port number Match the UDP or TCP source port field. You cannot specify the port and source-port match conditions in the same term. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the next-header udp or next-header tcp match condition in the same term to specify which protocol is being used on the port. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the text synonyms listed with the destination-port number match condition. source-port-except number Do not match the UDP or TCP source port field. For details, see the source-port match condition. source-prefix-list name [ except ] Match the IPv6 address prefix of the packet source field unless the except option is included. If the option is included, do not match the IPv6 address prefix of the packet source field. Specify a prefix list name defined at the [edit policy-options prefix-list prefix-list-name] hierarchy level. tcp-established Match TCP packets other than the first packet of a connection. This is a text synonym for tcp-flags "(ack rst)" (0x14). NOTE: This condition does not implicitly check that the protocol is TCP. To check this, specify the protocol tcp match condition. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the next-header tcp match condition in the same term. 68

89 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 15: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description tcp-flags flags Match one or more of the low-order 6 bits in the 8-bit TCP flags field in the TCP header. To specify individual bit fields, you can specify the following text synonyms or hexadecimal values: fin (0x01) syn (0x02) rst (0x04) push (0x08) ack (0x10) urgent (0x20) In a TCP session, the SYN flag is set only in the initial packet sent, while the ACK flag is set in all packets sent after the initial packet. You can string together multiple flags using the bit-field logical operators. For combined bit-field match conditions, see the tcp-established and tcp-initial match conditions. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the next-header tcp match condition in the same term to specify that the TCP protocol is being used on the port. tcp-initial Match the initial packet of a TCP connection. This is a text synonym for tcp-flags "(!ack & syn)". This condition does not implicitly check that the protocol is TCP. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the next-header tcp match condition in the same term. traffic-class number Match the 8-bit field that specifies the class-of-service (CoS) priority of the packet. This field was previously used as the type-of-service (ToS) field in IPv4. You can specify a numeric value from 0 through 63. To specify the value in hexadecimal form, include 0x as a prefix. To specify the value in binary form, include b as a prefix. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): RFC 3246, An Expedited Forwarding PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), defines one code point: ef (46). RFC 2597, Assured Forwarding PHB Group, defines 4 classes, with 3 drop precedences in each class, for a total of 12 code points: af11 (10), af12 (12), af13 (14) af21 (18), af22 (20), af23 (22) af31 (26), af32 (28), af33 (30) af41 (34), af42 (36), af43 (38) traffic-class-except number Do not match the 8-bit field that specifies the CoS priority of the packet. For details, see the traffic-class match description. 69

90 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches NOTE: If you specify an IPv6 address in a match condition (the address, destination-address, or source-address match conditions), use the syntax for text representations described in RFC 4291, IP Version 6 Addressing Architecture. For more information about IPv6 addresses, see IPv6 Overview and Supported IPv6 Standards. Related Documentation Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Terminating Actions on page 98 Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 103 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic You can configure a firewall filter with match conditions for MPLS traffic (family mpls). NOTE: The input-list filter-names and output-list filter-names statements for firewall filters for the mpls protocol family are supported on all interfaces with the exception of management interfaces and internal Ethernet interfaces (fxp or em0), loopback interfaces (lo0), and USB modem interfaces (umd). Table 16 on page 70 describes the match-conditions you can configure at the [edit firewall family mpls filter filter-name term term-name from] hierarchy level. Table 16: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic Match Condition apply-groups Description Specify which groups to inherit configuration data from. You can specify more than one group name. You must list them in order of inheritance priority. The configuration data in the first group takes priority over the data in subsequent groups. apply-groups-except Specify which groups not to inherit configuration data from. You can specify more than one group name. exp number Experimental (EXP) bit number or range of bit numbers in the MPLS header. For number, you can specify one or more values from 0 through 7 in decimal, binary, or hexadecimal format. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. exp-except number Do not match on the EXP bit number or range of bit numbers in the MPLS header. For number, you can specify one or more values from 0 through 7. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. forwarding-class class Forwarding class. Specify assured-forwarding, best-effort, expedited-forwarding, or network-control. forwarding-class-except class Do not match on the forwarding class. Specify assured-forwarding, best-effort, expedited-forwarding, or network-control. 70

91 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 16: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic (continued) Match Condition interface interface-name Description Interface on which the packet was received. You can configure a match condition that matches packets based on the interface on which they were received. NOTE: If you configure this match condition with an interface that does not exist, the term does not match any packet. interface-set interface-set-name Match the interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface set. To define an interface set, include the interface-set statement at the [edit firewall] hierarchy level. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. For more information, see Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview on page 262. ip-version number (Interfaces on Enhanced Scaling flexible PIC concentrators [FPCs] on supported T Series routers only) Inner IP version. To match MPLS-tagged IPv4 packets, match on the text synonym ipv4. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. loss-priority level Match the packet loss priority (PLP) level. Specify a single level or multiple levels: low, medium-low, medium-high, or high. Supported on M120 and M320 routers; M7i and M10i routers with the Enhanced CFEB (CFEB-E); and MX Series routers and EX Series switches. For IP traffic on M320, MX Series, and T Series routers with Enhanced II Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs), and EX Series switches, you must include the tri-color statement at the [edit class-of-service] hierarchy level to commit a PLP configuration with any of the four levels specified. If the tri-color statement is not enabled, you can only configure the high and low levels. This applies to all protocol families. For information about the tri-color statement, see Configuring Tricolor Marking. For information about using behavior aggregate (BA) classifiers to set the PLP level of incoming packets, see Forwarding Classes Overview. loss-priority-except level Do not match the PLP level. For details, see the loss-priority match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. Related Documentation Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Terminating Actions on page 98 Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page

92 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic This topic covers the following information: Matching on IPv4 or IPv6 Packet Header Address or Port Fields in MPLS Flows on page 72 IP Address Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic on page 73 IP Port Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic on page 73 Matching on IPv4 or IPv6 Packet Header Address or Port Fields in MPLS Flows To support network-based service in a core network, you can configure a firewall filter that matches Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) or version 6 (IPv6) packet header fields in MPLS traffic (family mpls). The firewall filter can match IPv4 or IPv6 packets as an inner payload of an MPLS packet that has a single MPLS label or up to five MPLS labels stacked together. You can configure match conditions based on IPv4 addresses and IPv4 port numbers or IPv6 addresses and IPv6 port numbers in the header. Firewall filters based on MPLS-tagged IPv4 headers are supported for interfaces on Enhanced Scaling flexible PIC concentrators (FPCs) on T320, T640, T1600, TX Matrix, and TX Matrix Plus routers only. However, the firewall filters based on MPLS-tagged IPv6 headers are supported for interfaces on the Type 5 FPC on T4000 Core Routers only. The feature is not supported for the router loopback interface (lo0), the router management interface (fxp0 or em0), or USB modem interfaces (umd). To configure a firewall filter term that matches an address or port fields in the Layer 4 header of packets in an MPLS flow, you use the ip-version ipv4 match condition to specify that the term is to match packets based on inner IP fields: To match an MPLS-tagged IPv4 packet on the source or destination address field in the IPv4 header, specify the match condition at the [edit firewall family mpls filter filter-name term term-name from ip-version ipv4] hierarchy level. To match an MPLS-tagged IPv4 packet on the source or destination port field in the Layer 4 header, specify the match condition at the [edit firewall family mpls filter filter-name term term-name from ip-version ipv4 protocol (udp tcp)] hierarchy level. To configure a firewall filter term that matches an address or port fields in the IPv6 header of packets in an MPLS flow, you use the ip-version ipv6 match condition to specify that the term is to match packets based on inner IP fields: To match an MPLS-tagged IPv6 packet on the source or destination address field in the IPv6 header, specify the match condition at the [edit firewall family mpls filter filter-name term term-name from ip-version ipv6] hierarchy level. To match an MPLS-tagged IPv6 packet on the source or destination port field in the Layer 4 header, specify the match condition at the [edit firewall family mpls filter filter-name term term-name from ip-version ipv6 protocol (udp tcp)] hierarchy level. 72

93 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions IP Address Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic Table 17 on page 73 describes the IP address-specific match conditions you can configure at the [edit firewall family mpls filter filter-name term term-name from ip-version ip-version] hierarchy level. Table 17: IP Address-Specific Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic Match Condition Description destination-address address Match the address of the destination node to receive the packet. destination-address address except Do not match the address of the destination node to receive the packet. protocol number Match the IP protocol type field. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): ah (51), dstopts (60), egp (8), esp (50), fragment (44), gre (47), hop-by-hop (0), icmp (1), icmp6 (58), icmpv6 (58), igmp (2), ipip (4), ipv6 (41), ospf (89), pim (103), rsvp (46), sctp (132), tcp (6), udp (17), or vrrp (112). source-address address Match the address of the source node sending the packet. source-address address except Do not match the address of the source node sending the packet. IP Port Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic Table 18 on page 74 describes the IP port-specific match-conditions you can configure at the [edit firewall family mpls filter filter-name term term-name from ip-version ip-version protocol (udp tcp )] hierarchy level. 73

94 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 18: IP Port-Specific Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS Traffic Match Condition Description destination-port number Match on the UDP or TCP destination port field. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the port numbers are also listed): afs (1483), bgp (179), biff (512), bootpc (68), bootps (67), cmd (514), cvspserver (2401), dhcp (67), domain (53), eklogin (2105), ekshell (2106), exec (512), finger (79), ftp (21), ftp-data (20), http (80), https (443), ident (113), imap (143), kerberos-sec (88), klogin (543), kpasswd (761), krb-prop (754), krbupdate (760), kshell (544), ldap (389), ldp (646), login (513), mobileip-agent (434), mobilip-mn (435), msdp (639), netbios-dgm (138), netbios-ns (137), netbios-ssn (139), nfsd (2049), nntp (119), ntalk (518), ntp (123), pop3 (110), pptp (1723), printer (515), radacct (1813), radius (1812), rip (520), rkinit (2108), smtp (25), snmp (161), snmptrap (162), snpp (444), socks (1080), ssh (22), sunrpc (111), syslog (514), tacacs (49), tacacs-ds (65), talk (517), telnet (23), tftp (69), timed (525), who (513), or xdmcp (177). destination-port-except number Do not match on the UDP or TCP destination port field. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the text synonyms listed with the destination-port match condition. source-port number Match on the TCP or UDP source port field. In place of the numeric field, you can specify one of the text synonyms listed under destination-port. source-port-except number Do not match on the TCP or UDP source port field. Related Documentation Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Terminating Actions on page 98 Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 103 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic In the from statement in the VPLS filter term, you specify conditions that the packet must match for the action in the then statement to be taken. All conditions in the from statement must match for the action to be taken. The order in which you specify match conditions is not important, because a packet must match all the conditions in a term for a match to occur. If you specify no match conditions in a term, that term matches all packets. An individual condition in a from statement can contain a list of values. For example, you can specify numeric ranges. You can also specify multiple source addresses or destination addresses. When a condition defines a list of values, a match occurs if one of the values in the list matches the packet. 74

95 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Individual conditions in a from statement can be negated. When you negate a condition, you are defining an explicit mismatch. For example, the negated match condition for forwarding-class is forwarding-class-except. If a packet matches a negated condition, it is immediately considered not to match the from statement, and the next term in the filter is evaluated, if there is one. If there are no more terms, the packet is discarded. You can configure a firewall filter with match conditions for Virtual Private LAN Service (VPLS) traffic (family vpls). Table 19 on page 75 describes the match-conditions you can configure at the [edit firewall family vpls filter filter-name term term-name from] hierarchy level. NOTE: Not all match conditions for VPLS traffic are supported on all routing platforms or switching platforms. A number of match conditions for VPLS traffic are supported only on MX Series 3D Universal Edge Routers. In the VPLS documentation, the word router in terms such as PE router is used to refer to any device that provides routing functions. Table 19: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic Match Condition Description destination-mac-address address Match the destination media access control (MAC) address of a VPLS packet. destination-port number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Match the UDP or TCP destination port field. You cannot specify both the port and destination-port match conditions in the same term. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the port numbers are also listed): afs (1483), bgp (179), biff (512), bootpc (68), bootps (67), cmd (514), cvspserver (2401), dhcp (67), domain (53), eklogin (2105), ekshell (2106), exec (512), finger (79), ftp (21), ftp-data (20), http (80), https (443), ident (113), imap (143), kerberos-sec (88), klogin (543), kpasswd (761), krb-prop (754), krbupdate (760), kshell (544), ldap (389), ldp (646), login (513), mobileip-agent (434), mobilip-mn (435), msdp (639), netbios-dgm (138), netbios-ns (137), netbios-ssn (139), nfsd (2049), nntp (119), ntalk (518), ntp (123), pop3 (110), pptp (1723), printer (515), radacct (1813), radius (1812), rip (520), rkinit (2108), smtp (25), snmp (161), snmptrap (162), snpp (444), socks (1080), ssh (22), sunrpc (111), syslog (514), tacacs (49), tacacs-ds (65), talk (517), telnet (23), tftp (69), timed (525), who (513), or xdmcp (177). destination-port-except number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the TCP or UDP destination port field. You cannot specify both the port and destination-port match conditions in the same term. destination-prefix-list name (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Match destination prefixes in the specified list. Specify the name of a prefix list defined at the [edit policy-options prefix-list prefix-list-name] hierarchy level. NOTE: VPLS prefix lists support only IPv4 addresses. IPv6 addresses included in a VPLS prefix list will be discarded. destination-prefix-list name except (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match destination prefixes in the specified list. For more information, see the destination-prefix-list match condition. 75

96 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 19: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description dscp number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Match the Differentiated Services code point (DSCP). The DiffServ protocol uses the type-of-service (ToS) byte in the IP header. The most significant 6 bits of this byte form the DSCP. For more information, see the Understanding How Behavior Aggregate Classifiers Prioritize Trusted Traffic. You can specify a numeric value from 0 through 63. To specify the value in hexadecimal form, include 0x as a prefix. To specify the value in binary form, include b as a prefix. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): RFC 3246, An Expedited Forwarding PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), defines one code point: ef (46). RFC 2597, Assured Forwarding PHB Group, defines 4 classes, with 3 drop precedences in each class, for a total of 12 code points: af11 (10), af12 (12), af13 (14), af21 (18), af22 (20), af23 (22), af31 (26), af32 (28), af33 (30), af41 (34), af42 (36), af43 (38) dscp-except number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the DSCP. For details, see the dscp match condition. ether-type values Match the 2-octet IEEE Length/EtherType field to the specified value or list of values. You can specify decimal or hexadecimal values from 0 through (0xFFFF). A value from 0 through 1500 (0x05DC) specifies the length of an Ethernet Version 1 frame. A value from 1536 (0x0600) through specifies the EtherType (nature of the MAC client protocol) of an Ethernet Version 2 frame. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the hexadecimal values are also listed): aarp (0x80F3), appletalk (0x809B), arp (0x0806), ipv4 (0x0800), ipv6 (0x86DD), mpls-multicast (0x8848), mpls-unicast (0x8847), oam (0x8902), ppp (0x880B), pppoe-discovery (0x8863), pppoe-session (0x8864), or sna (0x80D5). ether-type-except values Do not match the 2-octet Length/EtherType field to the specified value or list of values. For details about specifying the values, see the ether-type match condition. 76

97 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 19: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description flexible-match-mask value bit-length Length of the data to be matched in bits, not needed for string input (0..128) bit-offset Bit offset after the (match-start + byte) offset (0..7) byte-offset Byte offset after the match start point flexible-mask-name Select a flexible match from predefined template field mask-in-hex Mask out bits in the packet data to be matched match-start Start point to match in packet prefix Value data/string to be matched See <concept topic> for details flexible-match-range value bit-length Length of the data to be matched in bits (0..32) bit-offset Bit offset after the (match-start + byte) offset (0..7) byte-offset Byte offset after the match start point flexible-range-name Select a flexible match from predefined template field match-start Start point to match in packet range Range of values to be matched range-except Do not match this range of values See <concept topic> for details forwarding-class class Match the forwarding class. Specify assured-forwarding, best-effort, expedited-forwarding, or network-control. forwarding-class-except class Do not match the forwarding class. For details, see the forwarding-class match condition. 77

98 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 19: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description icmp-code message-code Match the ICMP message code field. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the next-header icmp or next-header icmp6 match condition in the same term. If you configure this match condition, you must also configure the icmp-type message-type match condition in the same term. An ICMP message code provides more specific information than an ICMP message type, but the meaning of an ICMP message code is dependent on the associated ICMP message type. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed). The keywords are grouped by the ICMP type with which they are associated: parameter-problem: ip6-header-bad (0), unrecognized-next-header (1), unrecognized-option (2) time-exceeded: ttl-eq-zero-during-reassembly (1), ttl-eq-zero-during-transit (0) destination-unreachable: address-unreachable (3), administratively-prohibited (1), no-route-to-destination (0), port-unreachable (4) icmp-code-except message-code Do not match the ICMP message code field. For details, see the icmp-code match condition. icmp-code number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Match the ICMP message code field. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the ip-protocol icmp or ip-protocol icmp6 match condition in the same term. If you configure this match condition, you must also configure the icmp-type message-type match condition in the same term. An ICMP message code provides more specific information than an ICMP message type, but the meaning of an ICMP message code is dependent on the associated ICMP message type. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed). The keywords are grouped by the ICMP type with which they are associated: parameter-problem: ip6-header-bad (0), unrecognized-next-header (1), unrecognized-option (2) time-exceeded: ttl-eq-zero-during-reassembly (1), ttl-eq-zero-during-transit (0) destination-unreachable: address-unreachable (3), administratively-prohibited (1), no-route-to-destination (0), port-unreachable (4) icmp-code-except number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the ICMP code field. For details, see the icmp-code match condition. icmp-type number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Match the ICMP message type field. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the ip-protocol icmp, ip-protocol icmp6, or ip-protocol icmpv6 match condition in the same term. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): destination-unreachable (1), echo-reply (129), echo-request (128), membership-query (130), membership-report (131), membership-termination (132), neighbor-advertisement (136), neighbor-solicit (135), node-information-reply (140), node-information-request (139), packet-too-big (2), parameter-problem (4), redirect (137), router-advertisement (134), router-renumbering (138), router-solicit (133), or time-exceeded (3). 78

99 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 19: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description icmp-type-except number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match the ICMP message type field. For details, see the icmp-type match condition. interface interface-name Interface on which the packet was received. You can configure a match condition that matches packets based on the interface on which they were received. NOTE: If you configure this match condition with an interface that does not exist, the term does not match any packet. interface-group group-number Match the logical interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface group or set of interface groups. For group-number, specify a single value or a range of values from 0 through 255. To assign a logical interface to an interface group group-number, specify the group-number at the [interfaces interface-name unit number family family filter group] hierarchy level. For more information, see Filtering Packets Received on a Set of Interface Groups Overview on page 262. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on T4000 Type 5 FPCs. interface-group-except group-name Do not match the logical interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface group or set of interface groups. For details, see the interface-group match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on T4000 Type 5 FPCs. interface-set interface-set-name Match the interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface set. To define an interface set, include the interface-set statement at the [edit firewall] hierarchy level. For more information, see Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview on page 262. ip-address address (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) 32-bit address that supports the standard syntax for IPv4 addresses. ip-destination-address address (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) 32-bit address that is the final destination node address for the packet. ip-precedence ip-precedence-field (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) IP precedence field. In place of the numeric field value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): critical-ecp (0xa0), flash (0x60), flash-override (0x80), immediate (0x40), internet-control (0xc0), net-control (0xe0), priority (0x20), or routine (0x00). ip-precedence-except ip-precedence-field (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the IP precedence field. ip-protocol number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) IP protocol field. ipv6-address address (MX Series only) 128-bit address that supports the standard syntax for IPv6 addresses. ip-protocol-except number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the IP protocol field. 79

100 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 19: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description ipv6-destination-address address (MX Series only) 128-bit address that is the final destination node address for this packet. ipv6-destination-prefix-list named-list (MX Series only) Match the IPv6 destination addresses in a named-list. ipv6-next-header protocol (MX Series only) Match IPv6 next header protocol type. The following list shows the supported values for protocol: ah IP Security authentication header dstopts IPv6 destination options egp Exterior gateway protocol esp IPSec Encapsulating Security Payload fragment IPv6 fragment header gre Generic routing encapsulation hop-by-hop IPv6 hop by hop options icmp Internet Control Message Protocol icmp6 Internet Control Message Protocol Version 6 igmp Internet Group Management Protocol ipip IP in IP ipv6 IPv6 in IP no-next-header IPv6 no next header ospf Open Shortest Path First pim Protocol Independent Multicast routing IPv6 routing header rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol sctp Stream Control Transmission Protocol tcp Transmission Control Protocol udp User Datagram Protocol vrrp Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol ipv6-next-header-except protocol (MX Series only) Do not match the IPv6 next header protocol type. 80

101 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 19: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description ipv6-payload-protocol protocol (MX Series only) Match IPv6 payload protocol type. The following list shows the supported values for protocol: ah IP Security authentication header dstopts IPv6 destination options egp Exterior gateway protocol esp IPSec Encapsulating Security Payload fragment IPv6 fragment header gre Generic routing encapsulation hop-by-hop IPv6 hop by hop options icmp Internet Control Message Protocol icmp6 Internet Control Message Protocol Version 6 igmp Internet Group Management Protocol ipip IP in IP ipv6 IPv6 in IP no-next-header IPv6 no next header ospf Open Shortest Path First pim Protocol Independent Multicast routing IPv6 routing header rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol sctp Stream Control Transmission Protocol tcp Transmission Control Protocol udp User Datagram Protocol vrrp Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol ipv6-payload-protocol-except protocol (MX Series only) Do not match the IPv6 payload protocol. ipv6-prefix-list named-list (MX Series only) Match the IPv6 address in a named-list. ipv6-source-address address (MX Series only) 128-bit address that is the originating source node address for this packet. ipv6-source-prefix-list named-list (MX Series only) Match the IPv6 source address in a named-list. 81

102 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 19: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description ipv6-traffic-class number (MX Series only) Differentiated Services code point (DSCP). The DiffServ protocol uses the type-of-service (ToS) byte in the IP header. The most significant 6 bits of this byte form the DSCP. For more information, see Understanding How Behavior Aggregate Classifiers Prioritize Trusted Traffic. You can specify a numeric value from 0 through 63. To specify the value in hexadecimal form, include 0x as a prefix. To specify the value in binary form, include b as a prefix. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): RFC 3246, An Expedited Forwarding PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), defines one code point: ef (46). RFC 2597, Assured Forwarding PHB Group, defines 4 classes, with 3 drop precedences in each class, for a total of 12 code points: af11 (10), af12 (12), af13 (14), af21 (18), af22 (20), af23 (22), af31 (26), af32 (28), af33 (30), af41 (34), af42 (36), af43 (38) ipv6-traffic-class-except number Do not match the DSCP number. ip-source-address address (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) IP address of the source node sending the packet. learn-vlan-1p-priority number (MX Series routers, M320 router, and EX Series switches only) Match on the IEEE 802.1p learned VLAN priority bits in the provider VLAN tag (the only tag in a single-tag frame with 802.1Q VLAN tags or the outer tag in a dual-tag frame with 802.1Q VLAN tags). Specify a single value or multiple values from 0 through 7. Compare with the user-vlan-1p-priority match condition. NOTE: This match condition supports the presence of a control word for MX Series routers and the M320 router. learn-vlan-1p-priority-except number (MX Series routers, M320 router, and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the IEEE 802.1p learned VLAN priority bits. For details, see the learn-vlan-1p-priority match condition. NOTE: This match condition supports the presence of a control word for MX Series routers and the M320 router. learn-vlan-dei (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Match the user VLAN ID drop eligability indicator (DEI) bit. learn-vlan-dei-except (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match the user VLAN ID DEI bit. learn-vlan-id number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) VLAN identifier used for MAC learning. learn-vlan-id-except number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the VLAN identifier used for MAC learning. 82

103 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 19: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description loss-priority level Packet loss priority (PLP) level. Specify a single level or multiple levels: low, medium-low, medium-high, or high. Supported on M120 and M320 routers; M7i and M10i routers with the Enhanced CFEB (CFEB-E); and MX Series routers. For IP traffic on M320, MX Series, and T Series routers with Enhanced II Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) and EX Series switches, you must include the tri-color statement at the [edit class-of-service] hierarchy level to commit a PLP configuration with any of the four levels specified. If the tri-color statement is not enabled, you can only configure the high and low levels. This applies to all protocol families. For information about the tri-color statement and about using behavior aggregate (BA) classifiers to set the PLP level of incoming packets, see Forwarding Classes Overview. loss-priority-except level Do not match on the packet loss priority level. Specify a single level or multiple levels: low, medium-low, medium-high, or high. For information about using behavior aggregate (BA) classifiers to set the PLP level of incoming packets, see Understanding How Behavior Aggregate Classifiers Prioritize Trusted Traffic. port number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) TCP or UDP source or destination port. You cannot specify both the port match condition and either the destination-port or source-port match condition in the same term. port-except number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the TCP or UDP source or destination port. You cannot specify both the port match condition and either the destination-port or source-port match condition in the same term. prefix-list name (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Match the destination or source prefixes in the specified list. Specify the name of a prefix list defined at the [edit policy-options prefix-list prefix-list-name] hierarchy level. NOTE: VPLS prefix lists support only IPV4 addresses. IPV6 addresses included in a VPLS prefix list will be discarded. prefix-list name except (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match the destination or source prefixes in the specified list. For more information, see the destination-prefix-list match condition. source-mac-address address Source MAC address of a VPLS packet. source-port number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) TCP or UDP source port field. You cannot specify the port and source-port match conditions in the same term. source-port-except number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the TCP or UDP source port field. You cannot specify the port and source-port match conditions in the same term. source-prefix-list name (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Match the source prefixes in the specified prefix list. Specify a prefix list name defined at the [edit policy-options prefix-list prefix-list-name] hierarchy level. NOTE: VPLS prefix lists support only IPV4 addresses. IPV6 addresses included in a VPLS prefix list will be discarded. 83

104 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 19: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description source-prefix-list name except (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match the source prefixes in the specified prefix list. For more information, see the source-prefix-list match condition. tcp-flags flags Match one or more of the low-order 6 bits in the 8-bit TCP flags field in the TCP header. To specify individual bit fields, you can specify the following text synonyms or hexadecimal values: fin (0x01) syn (0x02) rst (0x04) push (0x08) ack (0x10) urgent (0x20) In a TCP session, the SYN flag is set only in the initial packet sent, while the ACK flag is set in all packets sent after the initial packet. You can string together multiple flags using the bit-field logical operators. If you configure this match condition for IPv6 traffic, we recommend that you also configure the next-header tcp match condition in the same term to specify that the TCP protocol is being used on the port. traffic-type type-name (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Traffic type. Specify broadcast, multicast, unknown-unicast, or known-unicast. traffic-type-except type-name (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the traffic type. Specify broadcast, multicast, unknown-unicast, or known-unicast. user-vlan-1p-priority number (MX Series routers, M320 router, and EX Series switches only) Match on the IEEE 802.1p user priority bits in the customer VLAN tag (the inner tag in a dual-tag frame with 802.1Q VLAN tags). Specify a single value or multiple values from 0 through 7. Compare with the learn-vlan-1p-priority match condition. NOTE: This match condition supports the presence of a control word for MX Series routers and the M320 router. user-vlan-1p-priority-except number (MX Series routers, M320 rouer, and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the IEEE 802.1p user priority bits. For details, see the user-vlan-1p-priority match condition. NOTE: This match condition supports the presence of a control word for MX Series routers and the M320 router. user-vlan-id number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Match the first VLAN identifier that is part of the payload. user-vlan-id-except number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the first VLAN identifier that is part of the payload. vlan-ether-type value VLAN Ethernet type field of a VPLS packet. 84

105 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 19: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for VPLS Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description vlan-ether-type-except value Do not match on the VLAN Ethernet type field of a VPLS packet. Related Documentation Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Terminating Actions on page 98 Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 103 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 CCC Traffic You can configure a firewall filter with match conditions for Layer 2 circuit cross-connect (CCC) traffic (family ccc). The following restrictions apply to firewall filters for Layer 2 CCC traffic: The input-list filter-names and output-list filter-names statements for firewall filters for the ccc protocol family are supported on all interfaces with the exception of management interfaces and internal Ethernet interfaces (fxp or em0), loopback interfaces (lo0), and USB modem interfaces (umd). Only on MX Series routers and EX Series switches, you cannot apply a Layer 2 CCC stateless firewall filter (a firewall filter configured at the [edit firewall filter family ccc] hierarchy level) as an output filter. On MX Series routers and EX Series switches, firewall filters configured for the family ccc statement can be applied only as input filters. Table 20 on page 85 describes the match-conditions you can configure at the [edit firewall family ccc filter filter-name term term-name from] hierarchy level. Table 20: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 CCC Traffic Match Condition Description apply-groups Specify which groups to inherit configuration data from. You can specify more than one group name. You must list them in order of inheritance priority. The configuration data in the first group takes priority over the data in subsequent groups. apply-groups-except Specify which groups not to inherit configuration data from. You can specify more than one group name. 85

106 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 20: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 CCC Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description destination-mac-address address (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Match the destination media access control (MAC) address of a virtual private LAN service (VPLS) packet. To have packets correctly evaluated by this match condition when applied to egress traffic flowing over a CCC circuit from a logical interface on an I-chip DPC in a Layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) routing instance, you must make a configuration change to the Layer 2 VPN routing instance. You must explicitly disable the use of a control word for traffic flowing out over a Layer 2 circuit. The use of a control word is enabled by default for Layer 2 VPN routing instances to support the emulated virtual circuit (VC) encapsulation for Layer 2 circuits. To explicitly disable the use of a control word for Layer 2 VPNs, include the no-control-word statement at either of the following hierarchy levels: [edit routing-instances routing-instance-name protocols l2vpn] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name routing-instances routing-instance-name protocols l2vpn] NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. For more information, see Disabling the Control Word for Layer 2 VPNs. flexible-match-mask value bit-length Length of the data to be matched in bits, not needed for string input (0..128) bit-offset Bit offset after the (match-start + byte) offset (0..7) byte-offset Byte offset after the match start point flexible-mask-name Select a flexible match from predefined template field mask-in-hex Mask out bits in the packet data to be matched match-start Start point to match in packet prefix Value data/string to be matched See <concept topic> for details 86

107 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 20: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 CCC Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description flexible-match-range value bit-length Length of the data to be matched in bits (0..32) bit-offset Bit offset after the (match-start + byte) offset (0..7) byte-offset Byte offset after the match start point flexible-range-name Select a flexible match from predefined template field match-start Start point to match in packet range Range of values to be matched range-except Do not match this range of values See <concept topic> for details forwarding-class class Forwarding class. Specify assured-forwarding, best-effort, expedited-forwarding, or network-control. forwarding-class-except class Do not match on the forwarding class. Specify assured-forwarding, best-effort, expedited-forwarding, or network-control. interface-group group-number Match the logical interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface group or set of interface groups. For group-number, specify a single value or a range of values from 0 through 255. To assign a logical interface to an interface group group-number, specify the group-number at the [interfaces interface-name unit number family family filter group] hierarchy level. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. For more information, see Filtering Packets Received on a Set of Interface Groups Overview on page 262. interface-group-except number Do not match the logical interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface group or set of interface groups. For details, see the interface-group match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. learn-vlan-1p-priority number (MX Series routers, M320 router, and EX Series switches only) Match on the IEEE 802.1p learned VLAN priority bits in the provider VLAN tag (the only tag in a single-tag frame with 802.1Q VLAN tags or the outer tag in a dual-tag frame with 802.1Q VLAN tags). Specify a single value or multiple values from 0 through 7. Compare with the user-vlan-1p-priority match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. NOTE: This match condition supports the presence of a control word for MX Series and M320 routers. 87

108 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 20: Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 CCC Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description learn-vlan-1p-priority-except number (MX Series routers, M320 router, and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the IEEE 802.1p learned VLAN priority bits. For details, see the learn-vlan-1p-priority match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. NOTE: This match condition supports the presence of a control word for MX Series and M320 routers. loss-priority level Packet loss priority (PLP) level. Specify a single level or multiple levels: low, medium-low, medium-high, or high. Supported on M120 and M320 routers; M7i and M10i routers with the Enhanced CFEB (CFEB-E); and MX Series routers and EX Series switches. For IP traffic on M320, MX Series, and T Series routers with Enhanced II Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs), and EX Series switches, you must include the tri-color statement at the [edit class-of-service] hierarchy level to commit a PLP configuration with any of the four levels specified. If the tri-color statement is not enabled, you can only configure the high and low levels. This applies to all protocol families. For information about the tri-color statement, see Configuring Tricolor Marking. For information about using behavior aggregate (BA) classifiers to set the PLP level of incoming packets, see Forwarding Classes Overview. loss-priority-except level Do not match on the packet loss priority level. Specify a single level or multiple levels: low, medium-low, medium-high, or high. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. For information about using behavior aggregate (BA) classifiers to set the PLP level of incoming packets, see Understanding How Behavior Aggregate Classifiers Prioritize Trusted Traffic. user-vlan-1p-priority number (MX Series routers, M320 router, and EX Series switches only) Match on the IEEE 802.1p user priority bits in the customer VLAN tag (the inner tag in a dual-tag frame with 802.1Q VLAN tags). Specify a single value or multiple values from 0 through 7. Compare with the learn-vlan-1p-priority match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. NOTE: This match condition supports the presence of a control word for MX Series and M320 routers. user-vlan-1p-priority-except number (MX Series routers, M320 router, and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the IEEE 802.1p user priority bits. For details, see the user-vlan-1p-priority match condition. NOTE: This match condition is not supported on PTX series packet transport routers. NOTE: This match condition supports the presence of a control word for MX Series and M320 routers. Related Documentation Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Terminating Actions on page 98 88

109 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 103 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 Bridging Traffic Only on MX Series routers and EX Series switches, you can configure a standard stateless firewall filter with match conditions for Layer 2 bridging traffic (family bridge). Table 21 on page 89 describes the match-conditions you can configure at the [edit firewall family bridge filter filter-name term term-name from] hierarchy level. Table 21: Standard Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 Bridging (MX Series Routers and EX Series Switches Only) Match Condition Description destination-mac-address address Destination media access control (MAC) address of a Layer 2 packet in a bridging environment. destination-port number TCP or UDP destination port field. You cannot specify both the port and destination-port match conditions in the same term. destination-port-except Do not match the TCP/UDP destination port. destination-prefix-list named-list Match the IP destination prefixes in a named-list. dscp number Differentiated Services code point (DSCP). The DiffServ protocol uses the type-of-service (ToS) byte in the IP header. The most significant 6 bits of this byte form the DSCP. For more information, see Understanding How Behavior Aggregate Classifiers Prioritize Trusted Traffic. You can specify a numeric value from 0 through 63. To specify the value in hexadecimal form, include 0x as a prefix. To specify the value in binary form, include b as a prefix. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): RFC 3246, An Expedited Forwarding PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), defines one code point: ef (46). RFC 2597, Assured Forwarding PHB Group, defines 4 classes, with 3 drop precedences in each class, for a total of 12 code points: af11 (10), af12 (12), af13 (14), af21 (18), af22 (20), af23 (22), af31 (26), af32 (28), af33 (30), af41 (34), af42 (36), af43 (38) dscp-except number Do not match on the DSCP number. For more information, see the dscp-except match condition. 89

110 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 21: Standard Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 Bridging (MX Series Routers and EX Series Switches Only) (continued) Match Condition Description ether-type value Match the 2-octet IEEE Length/EtherType field to the specified value or list of values. You can specify decimal or hexadecimal values from 0 through (0xFFFF). A value from 0 through 1500 (0x05DC) specifies the length of an Ethernet Version 1 frame. A value from 1536 (0x0600) through specifies the EtherType (nature of the MAC client protocol) of an Ethernet Version 2 frame. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the hexadecimal values are also listed): aarp (0x80F3), appletalk (0x809B), arp (0x0806), ipv4 (0x0800), ipv6 (0x86DD), mpls-multicast (0x8848), mpls-unicast (0x8847), oam (0x8902), ppp (0x880B), pppoe-discovery (0x8863), pppoe-session (0x8864), sna (0x80D5). ether-type-except value Do not match the 2-octet IEEE Length/EtherType field to the specified value or list of values. For details about specifying the values, see the ether-type match condition. flexible-match-mask value bit-length Length of the data to be matched in bits, not needed for string input (0..128) bit-offset Bit offset after the (match-start + byte) offset (0..7) byte-offset Byte offset after the match start point flexible-mask-name Select a flexible match from predefined template field mask-in-hex Mask out bits in the packet data to be matched match-start Start point to match in packet prefix Value data/string to be matched See <concept topic> for details 90

111 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 21: Standard Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 Bridging (MX Series Routers and EX Series Switches Only) (continued) Match Condition Description flexible-match-range value bit-length Length of the data to be matched in bits (0..32) bit-offset Bit offset after the (match-start + byte) offset (0..7) byte-offset Byte offset after the match start point flexible-range-name Select a flexible match from predefined template field match-start Start point to match in packet range Range of values to be matched range-except Do not match this range of values See <concept topic> for details forwarding class class Forwarding class. Specify assured-forwarding, best-effort, expedited-forwarding, or network-control. forwarding-class-except class Ethernet type field of a Layer 2 packet environment. Specify assured-forwarding, best-effort, expedited-forwarding, or network-control. icmp-code message-code Match the ICMP message code field. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the ip-protocol icmp, ip-protocol icmp6, or ip-protocol icmpv6 match condition in the same term. If you configure this match condition, you must also configure the icmp-type message-type match condition in the same term. An ICMP message code provides more specific information than an ICMP message type, but the meaning of an ICMP message code is dependent on the associated ICMP message type. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed). The keywords are grouped by the ICMP type with which they are associated: parameter-problem: ip6-header-bad (0), unrecognized-next-header (1), unrecognized-option (2) time-exceeded: ttl-eq-zero-during-reassembly (1), ttl-eq-zero-during-transit (0) destination-unreachable: address-unreachable (3), administratively-prohibited (1), no-route-to-destination (0), port-unreachable (4) icmp-code-except message-code Do not match the ICMP message code field. For details, see the icmp-code match condition. 91

112 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 21: Standard Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 Bridging (MX Series Routers and EX Series Switches Only) (continued) Match Condition Description icmp-type message-type Match the ICMP message type field. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the ip-protocol icmp, ip-protocol icmp6, or ip-protocol icmpv6 match condition in the same term. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): destination-unreachable (1), echo-reply (129), echo-request (128), membership-query (130), membership-report (131), membership-termination (132), neighbor-advertisement (136), neighbor-solicit (135), node-information-reply (140), node-information-request (139), packet-too-big (2), parameter-problem (4), redirect (137), router-advertisement (134), router-renumbering (138), router-solicit (133), or time-exceeded (3). icmp-type-except message-type Do not match the ICMP message type field. For details, see the icmp-type match condition. interface interface-name Interface on which the packet was received. You can configure a match condition that matches packets based on the interface on which they were received. NOTE: If you configure this match condition with an interface that does not exist, the term does not match any packet. interface-group group-number Match the logical interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface group or set of interface groups. For group-number, specify a single value or a range of values from 0 through 255. To assign a logical interface to an interface group group-number, specify the group-number at the [interfaces interface-name unit number family family filter group] hierarchy level. For more information, see Filtering Packets Received on a Set of Interface Groups Overview on page 262. interface-group-except number Do not match the logical interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface group or set of interface groups. For details, see the interface-group match condition. interface-set interface-set-name Match the interface on which the packet was received to the specified interface set. To define an interface set, include the interface-set statement at the [edit firewall] hierarchy level. For more information, see Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview on page 262. ip-address address 32-bit address that supports the standard syntax for IPv4 addresses. ip-destination-address address 32-bit address that is the final destination node address for the packet. ip-precedence ip-precedence-field IP precedence field. In place of the numeric field value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): critical-ecp (0xa0), flash (0x60), flash-override (0x80), immediate (0x40), internet-control (0xc0), net-control (0xe0), priority (0x20), or routine (0x00). ip-precedence-except ip-precedence-field Do not match on the IP precedence field. 92

113 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 21: Standard Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 Bridging (MX Series Routers and EX Series Switches Only) (continued) Match Condition Description ip-protocol number IP protocol field. ip-protocol-except Do not match the IP protocol type. ip-source-address address IP address of the source node sending the packet. ipv6-address address (MX Series only) 128-bit address that supports the standard syntax for IPv6 addresses. ipv6-destination-address address (MX Series only) 128-bit address that is the final destination node address for this packet. ipv6-destination-prefix-list named-list (MX Series only) Match the IPv6 destination addresses in a named-list. ipv6-next-header protocol (MX Series only) Match IPv6 next header protocol type. The following list shows the supported values for protocol: ah IP Security authentication header dstopts IPv6 destination options egp Exterior gateway protocol esp IPSec Encapsulating Security Payload fragment IPv6 fragment header gre Generic routing encapsulation hop-by-hop IPv6 hop by hop options icmp Internet Control Message Protocol icmp6 Internet Control Message Protocol Version 6 igmp Internet Group Management Protocol ipip IP in IP ipv6 IPv6 in IP no-next-header IPv6 no next header ospf Open Shortest Path First pim Protocol Independent Multicast routing IPv6 routing header rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol sctp Stream Control Transmission Protocol tcp Transmission Control Protocol udp User Datagram Protocol vrrp Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol ipv6-next-header-except protocol (MX Series only) Do not match the IPv6 next header protocol type. 93

114 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 21: Standard Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 Bridging (MX Series Routers and EX Series Switches Only) (continued) Match Condition Description ipv6-payload-protocol protocol (MX Series only) Match IPv6 payload protocol type. The following list shows the supported values for protocol: ah IP Security authentication header dstopts IPv6 destination options egp Exterior gateway protocol esp IPSec Encapsulating Security Payload fragment IPv6 fragment header gre Generic routing encapsulation hop-by-hop IPv6 hop by hop options icmp Internet Control Message Protocol icmp6 Internet Control Message Protocol Version 6 igmp Internet Group Management Protocol ipip IP in IP ipv6 IPv6 in IP no-next-header IPv6 no next header ospf Open Shortest Path First pim Protocol Independent Multicast routing IPv6 routing header rsvp Resource Reservation Protocol sctp Stream Control Transmission Protocol tcp Transmission Control Protocol udp User Datagram Protocol vrrp Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol ipv6-payload-protocol-except protocol (MX Series only) Do not match the IPv6 payload protocol. ipv6-prefix-list named-list (MX Series only) Match the IPv6 address in a named-list. ipv6-source-address address (MX Series only) 128-bit address that is the originating source node address for this packet. ipv6-source-prefix-list named-list (MX Series only) Match the IPv6 source address in a named-list. 94

115 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 21: Standard Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 Bridging (MX Series Routers and EX Series Switches Only) (continued) Match Condition Description ipv6-traffic-class number (MX Series only) Differentiated Services code point (DSCP). The DiffServ protocol uses the type-of-service (ToS) byte in the IP header. The most significant 6 bits of this byte form the DSCP. For more information, see Understanding How Behavior Aggregate Classifiers Prioritize Trusted Traffic. You can specify a numeric value from 0 through 63. To specify the value in hexadecimal form, include 0x as a prefix. To specify the value in binary form, include b as a prefix. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): RFC 3246, An Expedited Forwarding PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), defines one code point: ef (46). RFC 2597, Assured Forwarding PHB Group, defines 4 classes, with 3 drop precedences in each class, for a total of 12 code points: af11 (10), af12 (12), af13 (14), af21 (18), af22 (20), af23 (22), af31 (26), af32 (28), af33 (30), af41 (34), af42 (36), af43 (38) ipv6-traffic-class-except number Do not match the DSCP number. isid number (Supported with Provider Backbone Bridging [PBB]) Match internet service identifier. isid-dei number (Supported with PBB) Match the Internet service identifier drop eligibility indicator (DEI) bit. isid-dei-except number (Supported with PBB) Do not match the Internet service identifier DEI bit. isid-priority-code-point number (Supported with PBB) Match the Internet service identifier priority code point. isid-priority-code-point-except number (Supported with PBB) Do not match the Internet service identifier priority code point. learn-vlan-1p-priority value (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Match on the IEEE 802.1p learned VLAN priority bits in the provider VLAN tag (the only tag in a single-tag frame with 802.1Q VLAN tags or the outer tag in a dual-tag frame with 802.1Q VLAN tags). Specify a single value or multiple values from 0 through 7. Compare with the user-vlan-1p-priority match condition. learn-vlan-1p-priority-except value (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the IEEE 802.1p learned VLAN priority bits. For details, see the learn-vlan-1p-priority match condition. learn-vlan-dei number (Supported with bridging) Match user virtual LAN (VLAN) identifier DEI bit. learn-vlan-dei-except number (Supported with bridging) Do not match user VLAN identifier DEI bit. 95

116 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 21: Standard Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 Bridging (MX Series Routers and EX Series Switches Only) (continued) Match Condition Description learn-vlan-id number VLAN identifier used for MAC learning. learn-vlan-id-except number Do not match on the VLAN identifier used for MAC learning. loss-priority level Packet loss priority (PLP) level. Specify a single level or multiple levels: low, medium-low, medium-high, or high. Supported on M120 and M320 routers; M7i and M10i routers with the Enhanced CFEB (CFEB-E); and MX Series routers and EX Series switches. For IP traffic on M320, MX Series, and T Series routers with Enhanced II Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs), and EX Series switches, you must include the tri-color statement at the [edit class-of-service] hierarchy level to commit a PLP configuration with any of the four levels specified. If the tri-color statement is not enabled, you can only configure the high and low levels. This applies to all protocol families. For information about the tri-color statement, see Configuring Tricolor Marking. For information about using behavior aggregate (BA) classifiers to set the PLP level of incoming packets, see Forwarding Classes Overview. loss-priority-except level Do not match on the packet loss priority level. Specify a single level or multiple levels: low, medium-low, medium-high, or high. For information about using behavior aggregate (BA) classifiers to set the PLP level of incoming packets, see the Understanding How Behavior Aggregate Classifiers Prioritize Trusted Traffic. port number TCP or UDP source or destination port. You cannot specify both the port match condition and either the destination-port or source-port match conditions in the same term. source-mac-address address Source MAC address of a Layer 2 packet. source-port number TCP or UDP source port field. You cannot specify the port and source-port match conditions in the same term. source-port-except Do not match the TCP/UDP source port. 96

117 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 21: Standard Firewall Filter Match Conditions for Layer 2 Bridging (MX Series Routers and EX Series Switches Only) (continued) Match Condition Description tcp-flags flags Match one or more of the low-order 6 bits in the 8-bit TCP flags field in the TCP header. To specify individual bit fields, you can specify the following text synonyms or hexadecimal values: fin (0x01) syn (0x02) rst (0x04) push (0x08) ack (0x10) urgent (0x20) In a TCP session, the SYN flag is set only in the initial packet sent, while the ACK flag is set in all packets sent after the initial packet. You can string together multiple flags using the bit-field logical operators. Configuring the tcp-flags match condition requires that you configure the next-header-tcp match condition. traffic-type type Traffic type. Specify broadcast, multicast, unknown-unicast, or known-unicast. traffic-type-except type Do not match on the traffic type. user-vlan-1p-priority value (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Match on the IEEE 802.1p user priority bits in the customer VLAN tag (the inner tag in a dual-tag frame with 802.1Q VLAN tags). Specify a single value or multiple values from 0 through 7. Compare with the learn-vlan-1p-priority match condition. user-vlan-1p-priority-except value (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the IEEE 802.1p user priority bits. For details, see the user-vlan-1p-priority match condition. user-vlan-id number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Match the first VLAN identifier that is part of the payload. user-vlan-id-except number (MX Series routers and EX Series switches only) Do not match on the first VLAN identifier that is part of the payload. vlan-ether-type value VLAN Ethernet type field of a Layer 2 bridging packet. vlan-ether-type-except value Do not match on the VLAN Ethernet type field of a Layer 2 bridging packet. Related Documentation Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Terminating Actions on page 98 Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page

118 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Firewall Filter Terminating Actions Firewall filters support a set of terminating actions for each protocol family. A filter-terminating action halts all evaluation of a firewall filter for a specific packet. The router performs the specified action, and no additional terms are examined. NOTE: You cannot configure the next term action with a terminating action in the same filter term. However, you can configure the next term action with another nonterminating action in the same filter term. Table 22 on page 98 describes the terminating actions you can specify in a firewall filter term. Table 22: Terminating Actions for Firewall Filters Terminating Action Description Protocols accept Accept the packet. family any family inet family inet6 family mpls family vpls family ccc family bridge family ethernet-switching (for EX Series switches only) 98

119 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 22: Terminating Actions for Firewall Filters (continued) Terminating Action Description Protocols decapsulate gre [ routing-instance instance-name ] At a customer-facing interface on an MX Series router installed at the provider edge (PE) of an IPv4 transport network, enable de-encapsulation of generic routing encapsulation (GRE) packets transported through a filter-based GRE tunnel. You can configure a filter term that pairs this action with a match condition that includes a packet header match for the GRE protocol. For an IPv4 filter, include the protocol gre (or protocol 47) match condition. Attach the filter to the input of an Ethernet logical interface or aggregated Ethernet interface on a Modular Interface Card (MIC) or Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) in the router. If you commit a configuration that attaches a de-encapsulating filter to an interface that does not support filter-based GRE tunneling, the system writes a syslog warning message that the interface does not support the filter. family inet When the interface receives a matched packet, processes that run on the Packet Forwarding Engine perform the following operations: Remove the outer GRE header. Forward the inner payload packet to its original destination by performing destination lookup. By default, the Packet Forwarding Engine uses the default routing instance to forward payload packets to the destination network. If the payload is MPLS, the Packet Forwarding Engine performs route lookup on the MPLS path routing table using the route label in the MPLS header. If you specify the decapsulate action with an optional routing instance name, the Packet Forwarding Engine performs route lookup on the routing instance, and the instance must be configured. NOTE: The decapsulate action that you configure at the [edit firewall family inet filter filter-name term term-name] hierarchy level does not process traffic with IPv4 and IPv6 options. As a result, traffic with such options is discarded by the de-encapsulation of GRE packets functionality. For more information, see Understanding Filter-Based Tunneling Across IPv4 Networks and Components of Filter-Based Tunneling Across IPv4 Networks. 99

120 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 22: Terminating Actions for Firewall Filters (continued) Terminating Action Description Protocols decapsulate l2tp [ routing-instance instance-name ] [ forwarding-class class-name ] [ output-interface interface-name ] [ cookie l2tpv3-cookie ] [ sample ] At a customer-facing interface on an MX Series router installed at the provider edge (PE) of an IPv4 transport network, enable de-encapsulation of Layer 2 tunneling protocol (L2TP) packets transported through a filter-based L2TP tunnel. You can configure a filter term that pairs this action with a match condition that includes a packet header match for the L2TP protocol. For IPv4 traffic, an input firewall filter $junos-input-filter and an output firewall filter $junos-output-filter are attached to the interface. Attach the filter to the input of an Ethernet logical interface or aggregated Ethernet interface on a Modular Interface Card (MIC) or Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) in the router. If you commit a configuration that attaches a de-encapsulating filter to an interface that does not support filter-based L2TP tunneling, the system writes a syslog warning message that the interface does not support the filter. The remote tunnel endpoint sends an IP tunnel packet that contains an Ethernet MAC address in the payload. If the destination MAC address of the payload packet contains the MAC address of the router, the Ethernet packet is sent in the outgoing direction towards the network, and it is processed and forwarded as though it is received on the customer port. If the source MAC address of the payload packet contains the MAC address of the router, the Ethernet packet is transmitted in the outgoing direction towards the customer port. If the tunnel does not contain the receive-cookie configured, packet injection does not happen. In such a case, any received tunnel packet is counted and dropped in the same manner in which packets that arrive with a wrong cookie are counted and dropped. family inet The following parameters can be specified with the decapsulate l2tp action: routing-instance instance-name By default, the Packet Forwarding Engine uses the default routing instance to forward payload packets to the destination network. If the payload is MPLS, the Packet Forwarding Engine performs route lookup on the MPLS path routing table using the route label in the MPLS header. If you specify the decapsulate action with an optional routing instance name, the Packet Forwarding Engine performs route lookup on the routing instance, and the instance must be configured. forwarding-class class-name (Optional) Classify l2tp packets to the specified forwarding class. output-interface interface-name (Optional) For L2TP tunnels, enable the packet to be duplicated and sent towards the customer or the network (based on the MAC address in the Ethernet payload). cookie l2tpv3-cookie (Optional) For L2TP tunnels, specify the L2TP cookie for the duplicated packets. If the tunnel does not contain the receive-cookie configured, packet injection does not happen. In such a case, any received tunnel packet is counted and dropped in the same manner in which packets that arrive with a wrong cookie are counted and dropped. sample (Optional) Sample the packet. Junos OS does not sample packets originating from the router. If you configure a filter and apply it to the output side of an interface, then only the transit packets going through that interface are sampled. Packets that are sent from the Routing Engine to the Packet Forwarding Engine are not sampled. NOTE: The decapsulate l2tp action that you configure at the [edit firewall family inet filter filter-name term term-name] hierarchy level does not process traffic with IPv4 and IPv6 options. As a result, traffic with such options is discarded by the de-encapsulation of L2TP packets functionality. 100

121 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 22: Terminating Actions for Firewall Filters (continued) Terminating Action Description Protocols discard Discard a packet silently, without sending an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) message. Discarded packets are available for logging and sampling. family any family inet family inet6 family mpls family vpls family ccc family bridge family ethernet-switching (for EX Series switches only) encapsulate template-name At a customer-facing interface on an MX Series router installed at the provider edge (PE) of an IPv4 transport network, enable filter-based generic routing encapsulation (GRE) tunneling using the specified tunnel template. You can configure a filter term that pairs this action with the appropriate match conditions, and then attach the filter to the input of an Ethernet logical interface or aggregated Ethernet interface on a Modular Interface Card (MIC) or Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) in the router. If you commit a configuration that attaches an encapsulating filter to an interface that does not support filter-based GRE tunneling, the system writes a syslog warning message that the interface does not support the filter. When the interface receives a matched packet, processes that run on the Packet Forwarding Engine use information in the specified tunnel template to perform the following operations: 1. Attach a GRE header (with or without a tunnel key value, as specified in the tunnel template. 2. Attach a header for the IPv4 transport protocol. 3. Forward the resulting GRE packet from the tunnel source interface to the tunnel destination (the remote PE router). The specified tunnel template must be configured using the tunnel-end-point statement under the [edit firewall] or [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall] hierarchy level. For more information, see Understanding Filter-Based Tunneling Across IPv4 Networks. family inet family inet6 family any family mpls 101

122 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 22: Terminating Actions for Firewall Filters (continued) Terminating Action Description Protocols encapsulate template-name (for L2TP tunnels) At a customer-facing interface on an MX Series router installed at the provider edge (PE) of an IPv4 transport network, enable filter-based L2TP tunneling using the specified tunnel template. You can configure a filter term that pairs this action with the appropriate match conditions, and then attach the filter to the input of an Ethernet logical interface or aggregated Ethernet interface on a Modular Interface Card (MIC) or Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) in the router. If you commit a configuration that attaches an encapsulating filter to an interface that does not support filter-based GRE tunneling, the system writes a syslog warning message that the interface does not support the filter. When the interface receives a matched packet, processes that run on the Packet Forwarding Engine use information in the specified tunnel template to perform the following operations: 1. Attach an L2TP header (with or without a tunnel key value, as specified in the tunnel template). 2. Attach a header for the IPv4 transport protocol. 3. Forward the resulting L2TP packet from the tunnel source interface to the tunnel destination (the remote PE router). The specified tunnel template must be configured using the tunnel-end-point statement under the [edit firewall] or [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall] statement hierarchy. family inet logical-system logical-system-name Direct the packet to the specified logical system. NOTE: This action is not supported on PTX Series Packet Transport Routers. family inet family inet6 reject message-type Reject the packet and return an ICMPv4 or ICMPv6 message: If no message-type is specified, a destination unreachable message is returned by default. If tcp-reset is specified as the message-type, tcp-reset is returned only if the packet is a TCP packet. Otherwise, the administratively-prohibited message, which has a value of 13, is returned. If any other message-type is specified, that message is returned. family inet family inet6 NOTE: Rejected packets can be sampled or logged if you configure the sample or syslog action. The message-type can be one of the following values: address-unreachable, administratively-prohibited, bad-host-tos, bad-network-tos, beyond-scope, fragmentation-needed, host-prohibited, host-unknown, host-unreachable, network-prohibited, network-unknown, network-unreachable, no-route, port-unreachable, precedence-cutoff, precedence-violation, protocol-unreachable, source-host-isolated, source-route-failed, or tcp-reset. routing-instance instance-name Direct the packet to the specified routing instance. family inet family inet6 102

123 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 22: Terminating Actions for Firewall Filters (continued) Terminating Action Description Protocols topology topology-name Direct the packet to the specified topology. NOTE: This action is not supported on PTX Series Packet Transport Routers. family inet family inet6 Each routing instance (master or virtual-router) supports one default topology to which all forwarding classes are forwarded. For multitopology routing, you can configure a firewall filter on the ingress interface to match a specific forwarding class, such as expedited forwarding, with a specific topology. The traffic that matches the specified forwarding class is then added to the routing table for that topology. Related Documentation Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 103 Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions Firewall filters support different sets of nonterminating actions for each protocol family. NOTE: You cannot configure the next term action with a terminating action in the same filter term. However, you can configure the next term action with another nonterminating action in the same filter term. Nonterminating actions carry with them an implicit accept action. In this context, nonterminating means that other actions can follow these actions whereas no other actions can follow a terminating action. Table 23 on page 103 describes the nonterminating actions you can configure for a firewall filter term. Table 23: Nonterminating Actions for Firewall Filters Nonterminating Action Description Protocol Families count counter-name Count the packet in the named counter. family any family bridge family ccc family inet family inet6 family mpls family vpls 103

124 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 23: Nonterminating Actions for Firewall Filters (continued) Nonterminating Action Description Protocol Families dont-fragment (set clear) Configure the value of the Don t Fragment bit (flag) in the IPv4 header to specify whether the datagram can be fragmented: set Change the flag value to one, preventing fragmentation. clear Change the flag value to zero, allowing fragmentation. NOTE: The dont-fragment (set clear) actions are supported only on MPCs. family inet 104

125 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 23: Nonterminating Actions for Firewall Filters (continued) Nonterminating Action Description Protocol Families dscp value Set the IPv4 Differentiated Services code point (DSCP) bit. You can specify a numerical value from 0 through 63. To specify the value in hexadecimal form, include 0x as a prefix. To specify the value in binary form, include b as a prefix. The default DSCP value is best effort, that is, be or 0. You can also specify one of the following text synonyms: af11 Assured forwarding class 1, low drop precedence af12 Assured forwarding class 1, medium drop precedence af13 Assured forwarding class 1, high drop precedence af21 Assured forwarding class 2, low drop precedence af22 Assured forwarding class 2, medium drop precedence af23 Assured forwarding class 2, high drop precedence af31 Assured forwarding class 3, low drop precedence af32 Assured forwarding class 3, medium drop precedence af33 Assured forwarding class 3, high drop precedence af41 Assured forwarding class 4, low drop precedence af42 Assured forwarding class 4, medium drop precedence af43 Assured forwarding class 4, high drop precedence be Best effort cs0 Class selector 0 cs1 Class selector 1 cs2 Class selector 2 cs3 Class selector 3 cs4 Class selector 4 cs5 Class selector 5 cs6 Class selector 6 cs7 Class selector 7 ef Expedited forwarding NOTE: This action is not supported on PTX Series Packet Transport Routers. family inet NOTE: The actions dscp 0 and dscp be are supported only on T320, T640, T1600, TX Matrix, TX Matrix Plus. and M320 routers and on the 10-Gigabit Ethernet Modular Port Concentrators (MPC), 60-Gigabit Ethernet MPC, 60-Gigabit Ethernet Queuing MPC, and 60-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing MPC on MX Series routers. However, these actions are not supported on Enhanced III Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) on M320 routers. NOTE: On T4000 routers, the dscp 0 action is not supported during the interoperation between a T1600 Enhanced Scaling Type 4 FPC and a T4000 Type 5 FPC. 105

126 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 23: Nonterminating Actions for Firewall Filters (continued) Nonterminating Action Description Protocol Families force-premium By default, a hierarchical policer processes the traffic it receives according to the traffic s forwarding class. Premium, expedited-forwarding traffic has priority for bandwidth over aggregate, best-effort traffic. force-premium ensures that traffic matching the term is treated as premium traffic by a subsequent hierarchical policer, regardless of its forwarding class. This traffic is given preference over any aggregate traffic received by that policer. NOTE: The force-premium filter option is supported only on MPCs. family inet family inet6 forwarding-class class-name Classify the packet to the named forwarding class: forwarding-class-name assured-forwarding best-effort expedited-forwarding network-control family any family bridge family ccc family inet family inet6 family mpls family vpls hierarchical-policer Police the packet using the specified hierarchical policer family any family bridge family ccc family inet family inet6 family mpls family vpls ipsec-sa ipsec-sa Use the specified IPsec security association. NOTE: This action is not supported on MX Series routers, Type 5 FPCs on T4000 routers, and PTX Series Packet Transport Routers. family inet load-balance group-name Use the specified load-balancing group. NOTE: This action is not supported on MX Series routers or PTX Series Packet Transport Routers. family inet log Log the packet header information in a buffer within the Packet Forwarding Engine. You can access this information by issuing the show firewall log command at the command-line interface (CLI). family inet family inet6 logical-system logical-system-name Direct packets to a specific logical system. family inet family inet6 106

127 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 23: Nonterminating Actions for Firewall Filters (continued) Nonterminating Action Description Protocol Families loss-priority (high medium-high medium-low low) Set the packet loss priority (PLP) level. You cannot also configure the three-color-policer nonterminating action for the same firewall filter term. These two nonterminating actions are mutually exclusive. Supported on M120 and M320 routers; M7i and M10i routers with the Enhanced CFEB (CFEB-E); and MX Series routers. For IP traffic on M320, MX Series, and T Series routers with Enhanced II Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs), you must include the tri-color statement at the [edit class-of-service] hierarchy level to commit a PLP configuration with any of the four levels specified. If the tri-color statement is not enabled, you can only configure the high and low levels. This applies to all protocol families. For information about the tri-color statement and using behavior aggregate (BA) classifiers to set the PLP level of incoming packets, see Understanding How Behavior Aggregate Classifiers Prioritize Trusted Traffic. family any family bridge family ccc family inet family inet6 family mpls family vpls next-hop-group group-name Use the specified next-hop group. family any family inet next-interface interface-name (MX Series) Direct packets to the specified outgoing interface. family inet family inet6 next-ip ip-address (MX Series) Direct packets to the specified destination IPv4 address. family inet next-ip6 ipv6-address (MX Series) Direct packets to the specified destination IPv6 address. family inet6 packet-mode Updates a bit field in the packet key buffer, which specifies traffic that will bypass flow-based forwarding. Packets with the packet-mode action modifier follow the packet-based forwarding path and bypass flow-based forwarding completely. For more information about selective stateless packet-based services, see the Junos OS Security Configuration Guide. family any policer policer-name Name of policer to use to rate-limit traffic. family any family bridge family ccc family inet family inet6 family mpls family vpls 107

128 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 23: Nonterminating Actions for Firewall Filters (continued) Nonterminating Action Description Protocol Families port-mirror instance-name Port-mirror the packet based on the specified family. Supported on M120 routers, M320 routers configured with Enhanced III FPCs, MX Series routers, and PTX Series Packet Transport Routers only. family any family bridge family ccc family inet family inet6 family vpls family mpls port-mirror-instance instance-name Port mirror a packet for an instance. This action is only supported on the MX series routers. family any family bridge family ccc family inet family inet6 family vpls family mpls prefix-action action-name Count or police packets based on the specified action name. NOTE: This action is not supported on PTX Series Packet Transport Routers. family inet routing-instance routing-instance-name Direct packets to the specified routing instance. family inet family inet6 sample Sample the packet. NOTE: Junos OS does not sample packets originating from the router. If you configure a filter and apply it to the output side of an interface, then only the transit packets going through that interface are sampled. Packets that are sent from the Routing Engine to the Packet Forwarding Engine are not sampled. family inet family inet6 family mpls service-accounting Use the inline counting mechanism when capturing subscriber per-service statistics. Count the packet for service accounting. The count is applied to a specific named counter ( junos-dyn-service-counter) that RADIUS can obtain. family inet family inet6 The service-accounting and service-accounting-deferred keywords are mutually exclusive, both per-term and per-filter. NOTE: This action is not supported on T4000 Type 5 FPCs and PTX Series Packet Transport Routers. 108

129 Chapter 2: Firewall Filter Match Conditions and Actions Table 23: Nonterminating Actions for Firewall Filters (continued) Nonterminating Action Description Protocol Families service-accountingdeferred Use the deferred counting mechanism when capturing subscriber per-service statistics. The count is applied to a specific named counter ( junos-dyn-service-counter) that RADIUS can obtain. The service-accounting and service-accounting-deferred keywords are mutually exclusive, both per-term and per-filter. NOTE: This action is not supported on T4000 Type 5 FPCs and PTX Series Packet Transport Routers. service-filter-hit (Only if the service-filter-hit flag is marked by a previous filter in the current type of chained filters) Direct the packet to the next type of filters. Indicate to subsequent filters in the chain that the packet was already processed. This action, coupled with the service-filter-hit match condition in receiving filters, helps to streamline filter processing. NOTE: This action is not supported on T4000 Type 5 FPCs and PTX Series Packet Transport Routers. family inet family inet6 syslog Log the packet to the system log file. family inet family inet6 three-color-policer (single-rate two-rate) policer-name Police the packet using the specified single-rate or two-rate three-color-policer. NOTE: You cannot also configure the loss-priority action for the same firewall filter term. These two actions are mutually exclusive. family bridge family ccc family inet family inet6 family mpls family vpls 109

130 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 23: Nonterminating Actions for Firewall Filters (continued) Nonterminating Action Description Protocol Families traffic-class value Specify the traffic-class code point. You can specify a numerical value from 0 through 63. To specify the value in hexadecimal form, include 0x as a prefix. To specify the value in binary form, include b as a prefix. family inet6 The default traffic-class value is best effort, that is, be or 0. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms: af11 Assured forwarding class 1, low drop precedence af12 Assured forwarding class 1, medium drop precedence af13 Assured forwarding class 1, high drop precedence af21 Assured forwarding class 2, low drop precedence af22 Assured forwarding class 2, medium drop precedence af23 Assured forwarding class 2, high drop precedence af31 Assured forwarding class 3, low drop precedence af32 Assured forwarding class 3, medium drop precedence af33 Assured forwarding class 3, high drop precedence af41 Assured forwarding class 4, low drop precedence af42 Assured forwarding class 4, medium drop precedence af43 Assured forwarding class 4, high drop precedence be Best effort cs0 Class selector 0 cs1 Class selector 1 cs2 Class selector 2 cs3 Class selector 3 cs4 Class selector 4 cs5 Class selector 5 cs6 Class selector 6 cs7 Class selector 7 ef Expedited forwarding NOTE: The actions traffic-class 0and traffic-class be are supported only on T Series and M320 routers and on the 10-Gigabit Ethernet Modular Port Concentrator (MPC), 60-Gigabit Ethernet MPC, 60-Gigabit Ethernet Queuing MPC, and 60-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing MPC on MX Series routers. However, these actions are not supported on Enhanced III Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) on M320 routers. Related Documentation Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Firewall Filter Terminating Actions on page

131 CHAPTER 3 Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic Example: Configuring a Filter to Limit TCP Access to a Port Based On a Prefix List Specifying BGP Peers on page 111 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Accept Traffic from Trusted Sources on page 115 Example: Configuring a Filter to Block Telnet and SSH Access on page 120 Example: Configuring a Filter to Block TFTP Access on page 124 Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept Packets Based on IPv6 TCP Flags on page 127 Example: Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set on page 130 Example: Configuring a Filter to Block TCP Access to a Port Except from Specified BGP Peers on page 136 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Protect Against TCP and ICMP Floods on page 142 Example: Configuring a Filter to Limit TCP Access to a Port Based On a Prefix List Specifying BGP Peers This example shows how to configure a standard stateless firewall filter that limits certain TCP and Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) traffic destined for the Routing Engine by specifying a list of prefix sources that contain allowed BGP peers. Requirements on page 111 Overview on page 112 Configuration on page 112 Verification on page 114 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. 111

132 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Overview In this example, you create a stateless firewall filter that blocks all TCP connection attempts to port 179 from all requesters except BGP peers that have a specified prefix. A source prefix list, plist_bgp179, is created that specifies the list of source prefixes that contain allowed BGP peers. The stateless firewall filter filter_bgp179 matches all packets from the source prefix list plist_bgp179 to the destination port number 179. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. Configure the Filter on page 112 Results on page 113 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands, paste them into a text file, remove any line breaks, change any details necessary to match your network configuration, and then copy and paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set policy-options prefix-list plist_bgp179 apply-path "protocols bgp group <*> neighbor <*>" set firewall family inet filter filter_bgp179 term 1 from source-address /0 set firewall family inet filter filter_bgp179 term 1 from source-prefix-list plist_bgp179 except set firewall family inet filter filter_bgp179 term 1 from destination-port bgp set firewall family inet filter filter_bgp179 term 1 then reject set firewall family inet filter filter_bgp179 term 2 then accept set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet filter input filter_bgp179 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 Configure the Filter Step-by-Step Procedure The following example requires that you navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5 in the CLI User Guide. To configure the filter: 1. Expand the prefix list bgp179 to include all prefixes pointed to by the BGP peer group defined by protocols bgp group <*> neighbor <*>. [edit policy-options prefix-list plist_bgp179] user@host# set apply-path "protocols bgp group <*> neighbor <*>" 2. Define the filter term that rejects TCP connection attempts to port 179 from all requesters except the specified BGP peers. [edit firewall family inet filter filter_bgp179] user@host# set term term1 from source-address /0 user@host# set term term1 from source-prefix-list bgp179 except 112

133 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic set term term1 from destination-port bgp set term term1 then reject 3. Define the other filter term to accept all packets. [edit firewall family inet filter filter_bgp179] set term term2 then accept 4. Apply the firewall filter to the loopback interface. [edit interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set filter input filter_bgp179 user@host# set address /32 Results From configuration mode, confirm your configuration by entering the show firewall, show interfaces, and show policy-options commands. If the output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. user@host# show firewall family inet { filter filter_bgp179 { term 1 { from { source-address { /0; source-prefix-list { plist_bgp179 except; destination-port bgp; then { reject; term 2 { then { accept; user@host# show interfaces lo0 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input filter_bgp179; address /32; 113

134 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches show policy-options prefix-list plist_bgp179 { apply-path "protocols bgp group <*> neighbor <*>"; If you are done configuring the device, enter commit from configuration mode. Repeat the procedure, where appropriate, for every BGP-enabled device in the network, using the appropriate interface names and addresses for each BGP-enabled device. Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. Displaying the Firewall Filter Applied to the Loopback Interface Purpose Verify that the firewall filter filter_bgp179 is applied to the IPv4 input traffic at logical interface lo0.0. Action Use the show interfaces statistics operational mode command for logical interface lo0.0, and include the detail option. Under the Protocol inet section of the command output section, the Input Filters field displays the name of the stateless firewall filter applied to the logical interface in the input direction: [edit] user@host> show interfaces statistics lo0.0 detail Logical interface lo0.0 (Index 321) (SNMP ifindex 16) (Generation 130) Flags: SNMP-Traps Encapsulation: Unspecified Traffic statistics: Input bytes : 0 Output bytes : 0 Input packets: 0 Output packets: 0 Local statistics: Input bytes : 0 Output bytes : 0 Input packets: 0 Output packets: 0 Transit statistics: Input bytes : 0 0 bps Output bytes : 0 0 bps Input packets: 0 0 pps Output packets: 0 0 pps Protocol inet, MTU: Unlimited, Generation: 145, Route table: 0 Flags: Sendbcast-pkt-to-re Input Filters: filter_bgp179 Addresses, Flags: Primary Destination: Unspecified, Local: , Broadcast: Unspecified, Generation: 138 Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Fields on page 39 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Protect Against TCP and ICMP Floods on page

135 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept Packets Based on IPv6 TCP Flags on page 127 prefix-list on page 379 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Accept Traffic from Trusted Sources This example shows how to create a stateless firewall filter that protects the Routing Engine from traffic originating from untrusted sources. Requirements on page 115 Overview on page 115 Configuration on page 115 Verification on page 118 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring stateless firewall filters. Overview In this example, you create a stateless firewall filter called protect-re that discards all traffic destined for the Routing Engine except SSH and BGP protocol packets from specified trusted sources. This example includes the following firewall filter terms: ssh-term Accepts TCP packets with a source address of /24 and a destination port that specifies SSH. bgp-term Accepts TCP packets with a source address of /24 and a destination port that specifies BGP. discard-rest-term For all packets that are not accepted by ssh-term or bgp-term, creates a firewall filter log and system logging records, then discards all packets. NOTE: You can move terms within the firewall filter using the insert command. See insert in the CLI User Guide. Configuration CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands, paste them into a text file, remove any line breaks, change any details necessary to match your network configuration, and then copy and paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet filter protect-re term ssh-term from source-address /24 set firewall family inet filter protect-re term ssh-term from protocol tcp set firewall family inet filter protect-re term ssh-term from destination-port ssh set firewall family inet filter protect-re term ssh-term then accept set firewall family inet filter protect-re term bgp-term from source-address /24 115

136 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches set firewall family inet filter protect-re term bgp-term from protocol tcp set firewall family inet filter protect-re term bgp-term from destination-port bgp set firewall family inet filter protect-re term bgp-term then accept set firewall family inet filter protect-re term discard-rest-term then log set firewall family inet filter protect-re term discard-rest-term then syslog set firewall family inet filter protect-re term discard-rest-term then discard set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet filter input protect-re Step-by-Step Procedure The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For instructions on how to do that, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5 in the CLI User Guide. To configure the stateless firewall filter: 1. Create the stateless firewall filter. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet filter protect-re 2. Create the first filter term. [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re] user@host# edit term ssh-term 3. Define the protocol, destination port, and source address match conditions for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re term ssh-term] user@host# set from protocol tcp destination-port ssh source-address /24 4. Define the actions for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re term ssh-term] user@host# set then accept 5. Create the second filter term. [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re] user@host# edit term bgp-term 6. Define the protocol, destination port, and source address match conditions for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re term bgp-term] user@host# set from protocol tcp destination-port bgp source-address /24 7. Define the action for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re term bgp-term] user@host# set then accept 8. Create the third filter term. [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re] user@host# edit term discard-rest-term 9. Define the action for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re term discard-rest] 116

137 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic set then log syslog discard 10. Apply the filter to the input side of the Routing Engine interface. [edit] set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet filter input protect-re Results Confirm your configuration by entering the show firewall command and the show interfaces lo0 command from configuration mode. If the output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. user@host# show firewall family inet { filter protect-re { term ssh-term { from { source-address { /24; protocol tcp; destination-port ssh; then accept; term bgp-term { from { source-address { /24; protocol tcp; destination-port bgp; then accept; term discard-rest-term { then { log; syslog; discard; user@host# show interfaces lo0 unit 0 { family inet { filter { input protect-re; address /32; If you are done configuring the device, enter commit from configuration mode. [edit] 117

138 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches commit Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, perform these tasks: Displaying Stateless Firewall Filter Configurations on page 118 Verifying a Services, Protocols, and Trusted Sources Firewall Filter on page 118 Displaying Stateless Firewall Filter Logs on page 119 Displaying Stateless Firewall Filter Configurations Purpose Verify the configuration of the firewall filter. Action From configuration mode, enter the show firewall command and the show interfaces lo0 command. Meaning Verify that the output shows the intended configuration of the firewall filter. In addition, verify that the terms are listed in the order in which you want the packets to be tested. You can move terms within a firewall filter by using the insert CLI command. Verifying a Services, Protocols, and Trusted Sources Firewall Filter Purpose Verify that the actions of the firewall filter terms are taken. Action Send packets to the device that match the terms. In addition, verify that the filter actions are not taken for packets that do not match. Use the ssh host-name command from a host at an IP address that matches /24 to verify that you can log in to the device using only SSH from a host with this address prefix. Use the show route summary command to verify that the routing table on the device does not contain any entries with a protocol other than Direct, Local, BGP, or Static. Sample Output % ssh %ssh host user@host's password: --- JUNOS (JSERIES) #0: :27:50 UTC user@host> user@host> show route summary Router ID: inet.0: 34 destinations, 34 routes (33 active, 0 holddown, 1 hidden) Direct: 10 routes, 9 active Local: 9 routes, 9 active BGP: 10 routes, 10 active Static: 5 routes, 5 active

139 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic Meaning Verify the following information: You can successfully log in to the device using SSH. The show route summary command does not display a protocol other than Direct, Local, BGP, or Static. Displaying Stateless Firewall Filter Logs Purpose Verify that packets are being logged. If you included the log or syslog action in a term, verify that packets matching the term are recorded in the firewall log or your system logging facility. Action From operational mode, enter the show firewall log command. Sample Output user@host> show firewall log Log : Time Filter Action Interface Protocol Src Addr Dest Addr 15:11:02 pfe D ge-0/0/0.0 TCP :11:01 pfe D ge-0/0/0.0 TCP :11:01 pfe D ge-0/0/0.0 TCP :11:01 pfe D ge-0/0/0.0 TCP Meaning Each record of the output contains information about the logged packet. Verify the following information: Under Time, the time of day the packet was filtered is shown. The Filter output is always pfe. Under Action, the configured action of the term matches the action taken on the packet A (accept), D (discard), R (reject). Under Interface, the inbound (ingress) interface on which the packet arrived is appropriate for the filter. Under Protocol, the protocol in the IP header of the packet is appropriate for the filter. Under Src Addr, the source address in the IP header of the packet is appropriate for the filter. Under Dest Addr, the destination address in the IP header of the packet is appropriate for the filter. Related Documentation show route summary show firewall show firewall log show interfaces (Loopback) 119

140 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Example: Configuring a Filter to Block Telnet and SSH Access Requirements on page 120 Overview on page 120 Configuration on page 120 Verification on page 122 Requirements You must have access to a remote host that has network connectivity with this router or switch. Overview In this example, you create an IPv4 stateless firewall filter that logs and rejects Telnet or SSH access packets unless the packet is destined for or originates from the /24 subnet. To match packets destined for or originating from the address /24 subnet, you use the address /24 IPv4 match condition. To match packets destined for or originating from a TCP port, Telnet port, or SSH port, you use the protocol tcp, port telnet, and telnet ssh IPv4 match conditions. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter on page 121 Apply the Firewall Filter to the Loopback Interface on page 121 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 121 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following configuration commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet filter local_acl term terminal_access from address /24 set firewall family inet filter local_acl term terminal_access from protocol tcp set firewall family inet filter local_acl term terminal_access from port ssh set firewall family inet filter local_acl term terminal_access from port telnet set firewall family inet filter local_acl term terminal_access then accept set firewall family inet filter local_acl term terminal_access_denied from protocol tcp set firewall family inet filter local_acl term terminal_access_denied from port ssh set firewall family inet filter local_acl term terminal_access_denied from port telnet set firewall family inet filter local_acl term terminal_access_denied then log set firewall family inet filter local_acl term terminal_access_denied then reject set firewall family inet filter local_acl term default-term then accept set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet filter input local_acl 120

141 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the stateless firewall filter that selectively blocks Telnet and SSH access: 1. Create the stateless firewall filter local_acl. [edit] user@myhost# edit firewall family inet filter local_acl 2. Define the filter term terminal_access. [edit firewall family inet filter local_acl] user@myhost# set term terminal_access from address /24 user@myhost# set term terminal_access from protocol tcp user@myhost# set term terminal_access from port ssh user@myhost# set term terminal_access from port telnet user@myhost# set term terminal_access then accept 3. Define the filter term terminal_access_denied. [edit firewall family inet filter local_acl] user@myhost# set term terminal_access_denied from protocol tcp user@myhost# set term terminal_access_denied from port ssh user@myhost# set term terminal_access_denied from port telnet user@myhost# set term terminal_access_denied then log user@myhost# set term terminal_access_denied then reject user@myhost# set term default-term then accept Apply the Firewall Filter to the Loopback Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the firewall filter to the loopback interface: [edit] user@myhost# set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet filter input local_acl user@myhost# set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@myhost# show firewall family inet { filter local_acl { term terminal_access { from { address { /24; protocol tcp; 121

142 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches port [ssh telnet]; then accept; term terminal_access_denied { from { protocol tcp; port [ssh telnet]; then { log; reject; term default-term { then accept; 2. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@myhost# show interfaces lo0 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input local_acl; address /32; 3. If you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@myhost# commit Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. Verifying Accepted Packets on page 122 Verifying Logged and Rejected Packets on page 123 Verifying Accepted Packets Purpose Verify that the actions of the firewall filter terms are taken. 122

143 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic Action 1. Clear the firewall log on your router or switch. clear firewall log 2. From a host at an IP address within the /24 subnet, use the ssh hostname command to verify that you can log in to the device using only SSH. This packet should be accepted, and the packet header information for this packet should not be logged in the firewall filter log buffer in the Packet Forwarding Engine. user@host-a> ssh myhost user@myhosts s password: --- JUNOS built :48:46 UTC % cli user@myhost> 3. From a host at an IP address within the /24 subnet, use the telnet hostname command to verify that you can log in to your router or switch using only Telnet. This packet should be accepted, and the packet header information for this packet should not be logged in the firewall filter log buffer in the Packet Forwarding Engine. user@host-a> telnet myhost Trying Connected to myhost-fxp0.acme.net. Escape character is '^]'. host (ttyp0) login: user Password: --- JUNOS built :48:46 UTC % cli user@myhost> 4. Use the show firewall log command to verify that the routing table on the device does not contain any entries with a source address in the /24 subnet. user@myhost> show firewall log Verifying Logged and Rejected Packets Purpose Verify that the actions of the firewall filter terms are taken. 123

144 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Action 1. Clear the firewall log on your router or switch. clear firewall log 2. From a host at an IP address outside of the /24 subnet, use the ssh hostname command to verify that you cannot log in to the device using only SSH. This packet should be rejected, and the packet header information for this packet should be logged in the firewall filter log buffer in the Packet Forwarding Engine. user@host-b ssh myhost ssh: connect to host sugar port 22: Connection refused --- JUNOS built :48:46 UTC % 3. From a host at an IP address outside of the /24 subnet, use the telnet hostname command to verify that you can log in to the device using only Telnet. This packet should be rejected, and the packet header information for this packet should be logged in the firewall filter log buffer in the PFE. user@host-b> telnet myhost Trying telnet: connect to address : Connection refused telnet: Unable to connect to remote host % 4. Use the show firewall log command to verify that the routing table on the device does not contain any entries with a source address in the /24 subnet. user@myhost> show firewall log Time Filter Action Interface Protocol Src Addr Dest Addr 18:41:25 local_acl R fxp0.0 TCP :41:25 local_acl R fxp0.0 TCP :41:25 local_acl R fxp0.0 TCP :43:06 local_acl R fxp0.0 TCP :43:06 local_acl R fxp0.0 TCP :43:06 local_acl R fxp0.0 TCP Related Documentation Logging of Packet Headers Evaluated by a Firewall Filter Term on page 230 Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Accept Traffic from Trusted Sources on page 115 Example: Configuring a Filter to Block TFTP Access on page 124 Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept OSPF Packets from a Prefix on page 182 Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept DHCP Packets Based on Address on page 180 Example: Configuring a Filter to Block TFTP Access Requirements on page 125 Overview on page

145 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic Configuration on page 125 Verification on page 127 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Overview By default, to decrease vulnerability to denial-of-service (DoS) attacks, the Junos OS filters and discards Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) or Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) packets that have a source address of and a destination address of This default filter is known as a unicast RPF check. However, some vendors equipment automatically accepts these packets. To interoperate with other vendors' equipment, you can configure a filter that checks for both of these addresses and overrides the default RPF-check filter by accepting these packets. In this example, you block Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) access, logging any attempts to establish TFTP connections. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter on page 125 Apply the Firewall Filter to the Loopback Interface on page 126 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 126 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following configuration commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet filter tftp_access_control term one from protocol udp set firewall family inet filter tftp_access_control term one from port tftp set firewall family inet filter tftp_access_control term one then log set firewall family inet filter tftp_access_control term one then discard set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet filter input tftp_access_control set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the stateless firewall filter that selectively blocks TFTP access: 1. Create the stateless firewall filter tftp_access_control. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet filter tftp_access_control 125

146 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches 2. Specify a match on packets received on UDP port 69. [edit firewall family inet filter tftp_access_control] user@host# set term one from protocol udp user@host# set term one from port tftp 3. Specify that matched packets be logged to the buffer on the Packet Forwarding Engine and then discarded. [edit firewall family inet filter tftp_access_control] user@host# set term one then log user@host# set term one then discard Apply the Firewall Filter to the Loopback Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the firewall filter to the loopback interface: [edit] user@host# set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet filter input tftp_access_control user@host# set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall family inet { filter tftp_access_control { term one { from { protocol udp; port tftp; then { log; discard; 2. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces lo0 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { 126

147 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic input tftp_access_control; address /32; 3. If you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] commit Verification Confirm that the configuration is operating properly: Verifying Logged and Discarded Packets on page 127 Verifying Logged and Discarded Packets Purpose Verify that the actions of the firewall filter terms are taken. Action To 1. Clear the firewall log on your router or switch. clear firewall log 2. From another host, send a packet to UDP port 69 on this router or switch. Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Accept Traffic from Trusted Sources on page 115 Example: Configuring a Filter to Block Telnet and SSH Access on page 120 Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept OSPF Packets from a Prefix on page 182 Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept DHCP Packets Based on Address on page 180 Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept Packets Based on IPv6 TCP Flags This example shows how to configure a standard stateless firewall filter to accept packets from a trusted source. Requirements on page 128 Overview on page 128 Configuration on page 128 Verification on page

148 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Overview In this example, you create a filter that accepts packets with specific IPv6 TCP flags. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter on page 128 Apply the Firewall Filter to the Loopback Interface on page 129 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 129 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet6 filter tcp_filter term 1 from next-header tcp set firewall family inet6 filter tcp_filter term 1 from tcp-flags syn set firewall family inet6 filter tcp_filter term 1 then count tcp_syn_pkt set firewall family inet6 filter tcp_filter term 1 then log set firewall family inet6 filter tcp_filter term 1 then accept set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet6 filter input tcp_filter set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet6 address :: /120 Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the firewall filter 1. Create the IPv6 stateless firewall filter tcp_filter. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet6 filter tcp_filter 2. Specify that a packet matches if it is the initial packet in a TCP session and the next header after the IPv6 header is type TCP. [edit firewall family inet6 filter tcp_filter] user@host# set term 1 from next-header tcp user@host# set term 1 from tcp-flags syn 3. Specify that matched packets are counted, logged to the buffer on the Packet Forwarding Engine, and accepted. [edit firewall family inet6 filter tcp_filter] user@host# set term 1 then count tcp_syn_pkt user@host# set term 1 then log user@host# set term 1 then accept 128

149 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic Apply the Firewall Filter to the Loopback Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the firewall filter to the loopback interface: [edit] set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet6 filter input tcp_filter user@host# set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet6 address :: /120 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall family inet6 { filter tcp_filter { term 1 { from { next-header tcp; tcp-flags syn; then { count tcp_syn_pkt; log; accept; 2. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces lo0 { unit 0 { family inet6 { filter { input tcp_filter; address :: /120; 3. When you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit 129

150 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, enter the show firewall operational mode command. Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Protect Against TCP and ICMP Floods on page 142 Example: Configuring a Filter to Block TCP Access to a Port Except from Specified BGP Peers on page 136 Example: Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set This example shows how to configure a standard stateless firewall filter to match packets tagged for a particular interface set. Requirements on page 130 Overview on page 130 Configuration on page 131 Verification on page 136 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Overview In this example, you apply a stateless firewall filter to the input of the router or switch loopback interface. The firewall filter includes a term that matches packets tagged for a particular interface set. Topology You create the firewall filter L2_filter to apply rate limits to the protocol-independent traffic received on the following interfaces: fe-0/0/0.0 fe-1/0/0.0 fe-1/1/0.0 NOTE: The interface type in this topic is just an example. The fe- interface type is not supported by EX Series switches. First, for protocol-independent traffic received on fe-0/0/0.0, the firewall filter term t1 applies policer p1. 130

151 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic For protocol-independent traffic received on any other Fast Ethernet interfaces, firewall filter term t2 applies policer p2. To define an interface set that consists of all Fast Ethernet interfaces, you include the interface-set interface-set-name interface-name statement at the [edit firewall] hierarchy level. To define a packet-matching criteria based on the interface on which a packet arrives to a specified interface set, you configure a term that uses the interface-set firewall filter match condition. Finally, for any other protocol-independent traffic, firewall filter term t3 applies policer p3. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configuring the Interfaces for Which the Stateless Firewall Filter Terms Take Rate-Limiting Actions on page 132 Configuring the Stateless Firewall Filter That Rate-Limits Protocol-Independent Traffic Based on the Interfaces on Which Packets Arrive on page 133 Applying the Stateless Firewall Filter to the Routing Engine Input Interface on page 135 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following configuration commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set interfaces fe-0/0/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces fe-1/0/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces fe-1/1/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set firewall policer p1 if-exceeding bandwidth-limit 5m set firewall policer p1 if-exceeding burst-size-limit 10m set firewall policer p1 then discard set firewall policer p2 if-exceeding bandwidth-limit 40m set firewall policer p2 if-exceeding burst-size-limit 100m set firewall policer p2 then discard set firewall policer p3 if-exceeding bandwidth-limit 600m set firewall policer p3 if-exceeding burst-size-limit 1g set firewall policer p3 then discard set firewall interface-set ifset fe-* set firewall family any filter L2_filter term t1 from interface fe-0/0/0.0 set firewall family any filter L2_filter term t1 then count c1 set firewall family any filter L2_filter term t1 then policer p1 set firewall family any filter L2_filter term t2 from interface-set ifset set firewall family any filter L2_filter term t2 then count c2 set firewall family any filter L2_filter term t2 then policer p2 set firewall family any filter L2_filter term t3 then count c3 set firewall family any filter L2_filter term t3 then policer p3 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 filter input L2_filter 131

152 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Configuring the Interfaces for Which the Stateless Firewall Filter Terms Take Rate-Limiting Actions Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the interfaces for which the stateless firewall filter terms take rate-limiting actions: 1. Configure the logical interface whose input traffic will be matched by the first term of the firewall filter. [edit] set interfaces fe-0/0/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 2. Configure the logical interfaces whose input traffic will be matched by the second term of the firewall filter. [edit ] user@host# set interfaces fe-1/0/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 user@host# set interfaces fe-1/1/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 3. If you are done configuring the device, commit the configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Results Confirm the configuration of the router (or switch) transit interfaces by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this procedure to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces fe-0/0/0 { unit 0 { family inet { address /30; fe-1/0/0 { unit 0 { family inet { address /30; fe-1/1/0 { unit 0 { family inet { address /30; 132

153 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic Configuring the Stateless Firewall Filter That Rate-Limits Protocol-Independent Traffic Based on the Interfaces on Which Packets Arrive Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the standard stateless firewall L2_filter that uses policers (p1, p2, and p3) to rate-limit protocol-independent traffic based on the interfaces on which the packets arrive: 1. Configure the firewall statements. [edit] edit firewall 2. Configure the policer p1 to discard traffic that exceeds a traffic rate of 5m bps or a burst size of 10m bytes. [edit firewall] user@host# set policer p1 if-exceeding bandwidth-limit 5m user@host# set policer p1 if-exceeding burst-size-limit 10m user@host# set policer p1 then discard 3. Configure the policer p2 to discard traffic that exceeds a traffic rate of 40m bps or a burst size of 100m bytes. [edit firewall] user@host# set policer p2 if-exceeding bandwidth-limit 40m user@host# set policer p2 if-exceeding burst-size-limit 100m user@host# set policer p2 then discard 4. Configure the policer p3 to discard traffic that exceeds a traffic rate of 600m bps or a burst size of 1g bytes. [edit firewall] user@host# set policer p3 if-exceeding bandwidth-limit 600m user@host# set policer p3 if-exceeding burst-size-limit 1g user@host# set policer p3 then discard 5. Define the interface set ifset to be the group of all Fast Ethernet interfaces on the router. [edit firewall] user@host# set interface-set ifset fe-* 6. Create the stateless firewall filter L2_filter. [edit firewall] user@host# edit family any filter L2_filter 7. Configure filter term t1 to match IPv4, IPv6, or MPLS packets received on interface fe-0/0/0.0 and use policer p1 to rate-limit that traffic. [edit firewall family any filter L2_filter] user@host# set term t1 from interface fe-0/0/0.0 user@host# set term t1 then count c1 user@host# set term t1 then policer p1 8. Configure filter term t2 to match packets received on interface-set ifset and use policer p2 to rate-limit that traffic. [edit firewall family any filter L2_filter] 133

154 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches set term t2 from interface-set ifset set term t2 then count c2 set term t2 then policer p2 9. Configure filter term t3 to use policer p3 to rate-limit all other traffic. [edit firewall family any filter L2_filter] set term t3 then count c3 set term t3 then policer p3 10. If you are done configuring the device, commit the configuration. [edit] commit Results Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter and the policers referenced as firewall filter actions by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this procedure to correct the configuration. [edit] show firewall family any { filter L2_filter { term t1 { from { interface fe-0/0/0.0; then { policer p1; count c1; term t2 { from { interface-set ifset; then { policer p2; count c2; term t3 { then { policer p3; count c3; policer p1 { if-exceeding { bandwidth-limit 5m; burst-size-limit 10m; then discard; 134

155 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic policer p2 { if-exceeding { bandwidth-limit 40m; burst-size-limit 100m; then discard; policer p3 { if-exceeding { bandwidth-limit 600m; burst-size-limit 1g; then discard; interface-set ifset { fe-*; Applying the Stateless Firewall Filter to the Routing Engine Input Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the stateless firewall filter to the Routing Engine input interface: 1. Apply the stateless firewall filter to the Routing Engine interface in the input direction. [edit] user@host# set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /30 user@host# set interfaces lo0 unit 0 filter input L2_filter 2. If you are done configuring the device, commit the configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Results Confirm the application of the firewall filter to the Routing Engine input interface by entering the show interfaces command again. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this procedure to correct the configuration. user@host# show interfaces fe-0/0/0 {... fe-1/0/0 {... fe-1/1/0 {... lo0 { unit 0 { filter { input L2_filter; family inet { address /30; 135

156 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, use the show firewall filter L2_filter operational mode command to monitor traffic statistics about the firewall filter and three counters. Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview on page 262 Statement Hierarchy for Defining an Interface Set on page 263 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring a Filter to Match on an Interface Set on page 263 Example: Configuring a Filter to Block TCP Access to a Port Except from Specified BGP Peers This example shows how to configure a standard stateless firewall filter that blocks all TCP connection attempts to port 179 from all requesters except from specified BGP peers. Requirements on page 136 Overview on page 136 Configuration on page 137 Verification on page 140 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before you configure this example. Overview In this example, you create a stateless firewall filter that blocks all TCP connection attempts to port 179 from all requesters except the specified BGP peers. The stateless firewall filter filter_bgp179 matches all packets from the directly connected interfaces on Device A and Device B to the destination port number 179. Figure 1 on page 137 shows the topology used in this example. Device C attempts to make a TCP connection to Device E. Device E blocks the connection attempt. This example shows the configuration on Device E. 136

157 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic Figure 1: Typical Network with BGP Peer Sessions 10.2 A AS 22 AS 17 E B C g Configuration CLI Quick Configuration Device C To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands, paste them into a text file, remove any line breaks, change any details necessary to match your network configuration, and then copy and paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set interfaces ge-1/2/0 unit 10 description to-e set interfaces ge-1/2/0 unit 10 family inet address /30 set protocols bgp group external-peers type external set protocols bgp group external-peers peer-as 17 set protocols bgp group external-peers neighbor set routing-options autonomous-system 22 Device E set interfaces ge-1/2/0 unit 0 description to-a set interfaces ge-1/2/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-1/2/1 unit 5 description to-b set interfaces ge-1/2/1 unit 5 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-1/0/0 unit 9 description to-c set interfaces ge-1/0/0 unit 9 family inet address /30 set interfaces lo0 unit 2 family inet filter input filter_bgp179 set interfaces lo0 unit 2 family inet address /32 set protocols bgp group external-peers type external set protocols bgp group external-peers peer-as 22 set protocols bgp group external-peers neighbor set protocols bgp group external-peers neighbor set protocols bgp group external-peers neighbor set routing-options autonomous-system 17 set firewall family inet filter filter_bgp179 term 1 from source-address /32 set firewall family inet filter filter_bgp179 term 1 from source-address /32 set firewall family inet filter filter_bgp179 term 1 from destination-port bgp set firewall family inet filter filter_bgp179 term 1 then accept set firewall family inet filter filter_bgp179 term 2 then reject 137

158 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Configuring Device E Step-by-Step Procedure The following example requires that you navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5 in the CLI User Guide. To configure Device E with a stateless firewall filter that blocks all TCP connection attempts to port 179 from all requestors except specified BGP peers: 1. Configure the interfaces. user@e# set interfaces ge-1/2/0 unit 0 description to-a user@e# set interfaces ge-1/2/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 user@e# set interfaces ge-1/2/1 unit 5 description to-b user@e# set interfaces ge-1/2/1 unit 5 family inet address /30 user@e# set interfaces ge-1/0/0 unit 9 description to-c user@e# set interfaces ge-1/0/0 unit 9 family inet address /30 2. Configure BGP. [edit protocols bgp group external-peers] user@e# set type external user@e# set peer-as 22 user@e# set neighbor user@e# set neighbor user@e# set neighbor Configure the autonomous system number. [edit routing-options] user@e# set autonomous-system Define the filter term that accepts TCP connection attempts to port 179 from the specified BGP peers. [edit firewall family inet filter filter_bgp179] user@e# set term 1 from source-address /32 user@e# set term 1 from source-address /32 user@e# set term 1 from destination-port bgp user@e# set term 1 then accept 5. Define the other filter term to reject packets from other sources. [edit firewall family inet filter filter_bgp179] user@e# set term 2 then reject 6. Apply the firewall filter to the loopback interface. [edit interfaces lo0 unit 2 family inet] user@e# set filter input filter_bgp179 user@e# set address /32 Results From configuration mode, confirm your configuration by entering the show firewall, show interfaces, show protocols, and show routing-options commands. If the output does not 138

159 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. show firewall family inet { filter filter_bgp179 { term 1 { from { source-address { /32; /32; destination-port bgp; then accept; term 2 { then { reject; user@e# show interfaces lo0 { unit 2 { family inet { filter { input filter_bgp179; address /32; ge-1/2/0 { unit 0 { description to-a; family inet { address /30; ge-1/2/1 { unit 5 { description to-b; family inet { address /30; ge-1/0/0 { unit 9 { description to-c; family inet { address /30; 139

160 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches show protocols bgp { group external-peers { type external; peer-as 22; neighbor ; neighbor ; neighbor ; user@e# show routing-options autonomous-system 17; If you are done configuring the device, enter commit from configuration mode. Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. Verifying That the Filter Is Configured on page 140 Verifying the TCP Connections on page 140 Monitoring Traffic on the Interfaces on page 141 Verifying That the Filter Is Configured Purpose Make sure that the filter is listed in output of the show firewall filter command. Action user@e> show firewall filter filter_bgp179 Filter: filter_bgp179 Verifying the TCP Connections Purpose Verify the TCP connections. Action From operational mode, run the show system connections extensive command on Device C and Device E. The output on Device C shows the attempt to establish a TCP connection. The output on Device E shows that connections are established with Device A and Device B only. user@c> show system connections extensive match tcp SYN_SENT user@e> show system connections extensive match tcp ESTABLISHED tcp ESTABLISHED tcp ESTABLISHED tcp ESTABLISHED 140

161 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic Monitoring Traffic on the Interfaces Purpose Use the monitor traffic command to compare the traffic on an interface that establishes a TCP connection with the traffic on an interface that does not establish a TCP connection. Action From operational mode, run the monitor traffic command on the Device E interface to Device B and on the Device E interface to Device C. The following sample output verifies that in the first example, acknowledgment (ack) messages are received. In the second example, ack messages are not received. user@e> monitor traffic size 1500 interface ge-1/2/1.5 19:02: Out IP bgp > : P : (19) ack win <nop,nop,timestamp >: BGP, length: 19 19:02: In IP > bgp:. ack 19 win <nop,nop,timestamp > 19:03: In IP > bgp: P 1:20(19) ack 19 win <nop,nop,timestamp >: BGP, length: 19 19:03: Out IP bgp > :. ack 20 win <nop,nop,timestamp > 19:03: Out IP bgp > : P 19:38(19) ack 20 win <nop,nop,timestamp >: BGP, length: 19 19:03: In IP > bgp:. ack 38 win <nop,nop,timestamp > user@e> monitor traffic size 1500 interface ge-1/0/0.9 18:54: Out IP > bgp: S : (0) win <mss 1460,nop,wscale 0,nop,nop,timestamp ,sackOK,eol> 18:54: Out IP > bgp: S : (0) win <mss 1460,nop,wscale 0,nop,nop,timestamp ,sackOK,eol> 18:54: Out IP > bgp: S : (0) win <mss 1460,nop,wscale 0,nop,nop,timestamp ,sackOK,eol> 18:54: Out IP > bgp: S : (0) win <mss 1460,sackOK,eol> 18:54: Out IP > bgp: S : (0) win <mss 1460,sackOK,eol> 18:54: Out IP > bgp: S : (0) win <mss 1460,sackOK,eol> Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Protect Against TCP and ICMP Floods on page 142 Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept Packets Based on IPv6 TCP Flags on page

162 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Protect Against TCP and ICMP Floods This example shows how to create a stateless firewall filter that protects against TCP and ICMP denial-of-service attacks. Requirements on page 142 Overview on page 142 Configuration on page 143 Verification on page 148 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring stateless firewall filters. Overview In this example, you create a stateless firewall filter called protect-re that polices TCP and ICMP packets. This example includes the following policers: tcp-connection-policer Limits the traffic rate of the TCP packets to 500,000 bps and the burst size to 15,000 bytes. Packets that exceed the traffic rate are discarded. icmp-policer Limits the traffic rate of the ICMP packets to 1,000,000 bps and the burst size to 15,000 bytes. Packets that exceed the traffic rate are discarded. When specifying limits, the bandwidth limit can be from 32,000 bps to 32,000,000,000 bps and the burst-size limit can be from 1,500 bytes through 100,000,000 bytes. Use the following abbreviations when specifying limits: k (1,000), m (1,000,000), and g (1,000,000,000). Each policer is incorporated into the action of a filter term. This example includes the following terms: tcp-connection-term Polices certain TCP packets with a source address of /24 or /24. These addresses are defined in the trusted-addresses prefix list. Filtered packets include tcp-established packets The tcp-established match condition is an alias for the bit-field match condition tcp-flags (ack rst), which indicates an established TCP session, but not the first packet of a TCP connection. icmp-term Polices ICMP packets. All ICMP packets are counted in the icmp-counter counter. NOTE: You can move terms within the firewall filter by using the insert command. See insert in the CLI User Guide. 142

163 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic You can apply a stateless firewall to the input or output sides, or both, of an interface. To filter packets transiting the device, apply the firewall filter to any non-routing Engine interface. To filter packets originating from, or destined for, the Routing Engine, apply the firewall filter to the loopback (lo0) interface. Figure 2 on page 143 shows the sample network. Figure 2: Firewall Filter to Protect Against TCP and ICMP Floods /16 R1 fe-1/2/0 fe-1/2/ R2 lo0: R R g Because this firewall filter limits Routing Engine traffic to TCP packets, routing protocols that use other transport protocols for Layer 4 cannot successfully establish sessions when this filter is active. To demonstrate, this example sets up OSPF between Device R1 and Device R2. CLI Quick Configuration on page 143 shows the configuration for all of the devices in Figure 2 on page 143. The section Step-by-Step Procedure on page 144 describes the steps on Device R2. Configuration CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure the stateless firewall filter, copy the following commands to a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI. Device R1 set interfaces fe-1/2/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 primary set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 set protocols bgp group ext type external set protocols bgp group ext export send-direct set protocols bgp group ext peer-as 200 set protocols bgp group ext neighbor set protocols ospf area interface fe-1/2/0.0 set protocols ospf area interface lo0.0 passive set policy-options policy-statement send-direct term 1 from protocol direct set policy-options policy-statement send-direct term 1 then accept set routing-options router-id set routing-options autonomous-system 100 Device R2 set interfaces fe-1/2/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet filter input protect-re set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 primary set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 143

164 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches set protocols bgp group ext type external set protocols bgp group ext export send-direct set protocols bgp group ext neighbor peer-as 100 set protocols ospf area interface lo0.0 passive set protocols ospf area interface fe-1/2/0.0 set policy-options prefix-list trusted-addresses /24 set policy-options prefix-list trusted-addresses /24 set policy-options policy-statement send-direct term 1 from protocol direct set policy-options policy-statement send-direct term 1 then accept set routing-options router-id set routing-options autonomous-system 200 set firewall family inet filter protect-re term tcp-connection-term from source-prefix-list trusted-addresses set firewall family inet filter protect-re term tcp-connection-term from protocol tcp set firewall family inet filter protect-re term tcp-connection-term from tcp-established set firewall family inet filter protect-re term tcp-connection-term then policer tcp-connection-policer set firewall family inet filter protect-re term tcp-connection-term then accept set firewall family inet filter protect-re term icmp-term from source-prefix-list trusted-addresses set firewall family inet filter protect-re term icmp-term from protocol icmp set firewall family inet filter protect-re term icmp-term then policer icmp-policer set firewall family inet filter protect-re term icmp-term then count icmp-counter set firewall family inet filter protect-re term icmp-term then accept set firewall policer tcp-connection-policer filter-specific set firewall policer tcp-connection-policer if-exceeding bandwidth-limit 1m set firewall policer tcp-connection-policer if-exceeding burst-size-limit 15k set firewall policer tcp-connection-policer then discard set firewall policer icmp-policer filter-specific set firewall policer icmp-policer if-exceeding bandwidth-limit 1m set firewall policer icmp-policer if-exceeding burst-size-limit 15k set firewall policer icmp-policer then discard Step-by-Step Procedure The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. To configure stateless firewall filter to discard : 1. Configure the device interfaces. [edit interfaces fe-1/2/0 unit 0 family inet ] user@r2# set address /30 [edit interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet] user@r2# set address /32 primary user@r2# set address /32 2. Configure the BGP peering session. [edit protocols bgp group ext] user@r2# set type external user@r2# set export send-direct user@r2# set neighbor peer-as Configure the autonomous system (AS) number and router ID. 144

165 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic [edit routing-options] set autonomous-system 200 set router-id Configure OSPF. [edit protocols ospf area ] set interface lo0.0 passive set interface fe-1/2/ Define the list of trusted addresses. [edit policy-options prefix-list trusted-addresses] set /24 set /24 6. Configure a policy to advertise direct routes. [edit policy-options policy-statement send-direct term 1] user@r2# set from protocol direct user@r2# set then accept 7. Configure the TCP policer. [edit firewall policer tcp-connection-policer] user@r2# set filter-specific user@r2# set if-exceeding bandwidth-limit 1m user@r2# set if-exceeding burst-size-limit 15k user@r2# set then discard 8. Create the ICMP policer. [edit firewall policer icmp-policer] user@r2# set filter-specific user@r2# set if-exceeding bandwidth-limit 1m user@r2# set if-exceeding burst-size-limit 15k user@r2# set then discard 9. Configure the TCP filter rules. [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re term tcp-connection-term] user@r2# set from source-prefix-list trusted-addresses user@r2# set from protocol tcp user@r2# set from tcp-established user@r2# set then policer tcp-connection-policer user@r2# set then accept 10. Configure the ICMP filter rules. [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re term icmp-term] user@r2# set from source-prefix-list trusted-addresses user@r2# set from protocol icmp user@r2# set then policer icmp-policer user@r2# set then count icmp-counter user@r2# set then accept 11. Apply the filter to the loopback interface. [edit interfaces lo0 unit 0] user@r2# set family inet filter input protect-re 145

166 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Results Confirm your configuration by entering the show interfaces, show protocols, show policy-options, show routing-options, and show firewall commands from configuration mode. If the output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. show interfaces fe-1/2/0 { unit 0 { family inet { address /30; lo0 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input protect-re; address /32 { primary; address /32; user@r2# show protocols bgp { group ext { type external; export send-direct; neighbor { peer-as 100; ospf { area { interface lo0.0 { passive; interface fe-1/2/0.0; user@r2# show policy-options prefix-list trusted-addresses { /24; /24; policy-statement send-direct { term 1 { from protocol direct; then accept; 146

167 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic show routing-options router-id ; autonomous-system 200; show firewall family inet { filter protect-re { term tcp-connection-term { from { source-prefix-list { trusted-addresses; protocol tcp; tcp-established; then { policer tcp-connection-policer; accept; term icmp-term { from { source-prefix-list { trusted-addresses; protocol icmp; then { policer icmp-policer; count icmp-counter; accept; policer tcp-connection-policer { filter-specific; if-exceeding { bandwidth-limit 1m; burst-size-limit 15k; then discard; policer icmp-policer { filter-specific; if-exceeding { bandwidth-limit 1m; burst-size-limit 15k; then discard; If you are done configuring the device, enter commit from configuration mode. 147

168 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. NOTE: To verify the TCP policer, you can use a packet generation tool. This task is not shown here. Displaying Stateless Firewall Filter That Are in Effect on page 148 Using telnet to Verify the tcp-established Condition in the TCP Firewall Filter on page 148 Using telnet to Verify the Trusted Prefixes Condition in the TCP Firewall Filter on page 149 Using OSPF to Verify the TCP Firewall Filter on page 150 Verifying the ICMP Firewall Filter on page 151 Displaying Stateless Firewall Filter That Are in Effect Purpose Verify the configuration of the firewall filter. Action From operational mode, enter the show firewall command. user@r2> show firewall Filter: protect-re Counters: Name Bytes Packets icmp-counter 0 0 Policers: Name Bytes Packets icmp-policer 0 tcp-connection-policer 0 Meaning The output shows the filter, the counter, and the policers that are in effect on Device R2. Using telnet to Verify the tcp-established Condition in the TCP Firewall Filter Purpose Make sure that telnet traffic works as expected. Action Verify that the device can establish only TCP sessions with hosts that meet the from tcp-established condition.. 1. From Device R2, make sure that the BGP session with Device R1 is established. user@r2> show bgp summary match down Groups: 1 Peers: 1 Down peers: 0 2. From Device R2, telnet to Device R1. user@r2> telnet Trying Connected to R1.acme.net. Escape character is '^]'. R1 (ttyp4) 148

169 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic login: 3. From Device R1, telnet to Device R2. telnet Trying telnet: connect to address : Operation timed out telnet: Unable to connect to remote host 4. On Device R2, deactivate the from tcp-established match condition. [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re term tcp-connection-term] deactivate from tcp-established commit 5. From Device R1, try again to telnet to Device R2. telnet Trying Connected to R2.acme.net. Escape character is '^]'. R2 (ttyp4) login: Meaning Verify the following information: As expected, the BGP session is established. The from tcp-established match condition is not expected to block BGP session establishment. From Device R2, you can telnet to Device R1. Device R1 has no firewall filter configured, so this is the expected behavior. From Device R1, you cannot telnet to Device R2. Telnet uses TCP as the transport protocol, so this result might be surprising. The cause for the lack of telnet connectivity is the from tcp-established match condition. This match condition limits the type of TCP traffic that is accepted of Device R2. After this match condition is deactivated, the telnet session is successful. Using telnet to Verify the Trusted Prefixes Condition in the TCP Firewall Filter Purpose Make sure that telnet traffic works as expected. Action Verify that the device can establish only telnet sessions with a host at an IP address that matches one of the trusted source addresses. For example, log in to the device with the telnet command from another host with one of the trusted address prefixes. Also, verify that telnet sessions with untrusted source addresses are blocked. 1. From Device R1, telnet to Device R2 from an untrusted source address. user@r1> telnet source Trying ^C 2. From Device R2, add /16 to the list of trusted prefixes. 149

170 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches [edit policy-options prefix-list trusted-addresses] set /16 commit 3. From Device R1, try again to telnet to Device R2. telnet source Trying Connected to R2.acme.net. Escape character is '^]'. R2 (ttyp4) login: Meaning Verify the following information: From Device R1, you cannot telnet to Device R2 with an unstrusted source address. After the /16 prefix is added to the list of trusted prefixes, the telnet request from source address is accepted. OSPF session establishment is blocked. OSPF does not use TCP as its transport protocol. After the from protocol tcp match condition is deactivated, OSPF session establishment is not blocked. Using OSPF to Verify the TCP Firewall Filter Purpose Make sure that OSPF traffic works as expected. Action Verify that the device cannot establish OSPF connectivity. 1. From Device R1, check the OSPF sessions. show ospf neighbor Address Interface State ID Pri Dead fe-1/2/0.0 Init From Device R2, check the OSPF sessions. show ospf neighbor 3. From Device R2, remove the from protocol tcp match condition. [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re term tcp-connection-term] deactivate from protocol commit 4. From Device R1, recheck the OSPF sessions. show ospf neighbor Address Interface State ID Pri Dead fe-1/2/0.0 Full From Device R2, recheck the OSPF sessions. show ospf neighbor Address Interface State ID Pri Dead fe-1/2/0.0 Full

171 Chapter 3: Applying Firewall Filters to Routing Engine Traffic Meaning Verify the following information: OSPF session establishment is blocked. OSPF does not use TCP as its transport protocol. After the from protocol tcp match condition is deactivated, OSPF session establishment is successful. Verifying the ICMP Firewall Filter Purpose Verify that ICMP packets are being policed and counted. Also make sure that ping requests are discarded when the requests originate from an untrusted source address. Action 1. Undo the configuration changes made in previous verification steps. Reactivate the TCP firewall settings, and delete the /16 trusted source address. [edit firewall family inet filter protect-re term tcp-connection-term] activate from protocol activate from tcp-established [edit policy-options prefix-list trusted-addresses] delete /16 commit 2. From Device R1, ping the loopback interface on Device R2. ping rapid count 600 size 2000 PING ( ): 2000 data bytes!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.!.! ping statistics packets transmitted, 536 packets received, 10% packet loss pinground-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 2.976/3.405/42.380/2.293 ms 3. From Device R2, check the firewall statistics. user@r2> show firewall Filter: protect-re Counters: Name Bytes Packets icmp-counter Policers: Name Bytes Packets icmp-policer 66 tcp-connection-policer 0 4. From an untrusted source address on Device R1, send a ping request to Device R2 s loopback interface. user@r1> ping source PING ( ): 56 data bytes ^C ping statistics packets transmitted, 0 packets received, 100% packet loss Meaning Verify the following information: 151

172 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches The ping output shows that 10% packet loss is occurring. The ICMP packet counter is incrementing, and the icmp-policer is incrementing. Device R2 does not send ICMP responses to the ping source command. Related Documentation Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Accept Traffic from Trusted Sources on page 115 Two-Color Policer Configuration Overview 152

173 CHAPTER 4 Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Interface-Specific Firewall Filters on page 153 Example: Configuring a Filter to Match on IPv6 Flags on page 154 Example: Configuring a Filter to Match on Port and Protocol Fields on page 155 Example: Configuring a Filter to Count Accepted and Rejected Packets on page 158 Example: Configuring a Filter to Count and Discard IP Options Packets on page 162 Example: Configuring a Filter to Count IP Options Packets on page 165 Example: Configuring a Filter to Count and Sample Accepted Packets on page 170 Example: Configuring a Filter to Set the DSCP Bit to Zero on page 174 Example: Configuring a Filter to Match on Two Unrelated Criteria on page 177 Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept DHCP Packets Based on Address on page 180 Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept OSPF Packets from a Prefix on page 182 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Handle Fragments on page 185 Example: Configuring a Rate-Limiting Filter Based on Destination Class on page 190 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Interface-Specific Firewall Filters To enable interface-specific instances for stateless firewall filters, include the interface-specific statement in the filter filter-name or service-filter service-filter-name stanza. Any counters specified as actions in an interface-specific filter are maintained separately per filter instance. Any policers specified as actions in an interface-specific filter are applied per filter instance. firewall { family family-name { (filter filter-name service-filter service-filter-name) {... interface-specific;... term term-name { from { match-conditions; then { count counter-name; policer policer-name; 153

174 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches... ] You can include the firewall configuration at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] Related Documentation Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Instances Overview Statement Hierarchy for Applying Interface-Specific Firewall Filters on page 241 Example: Configuring Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Counters Example: Configuring a Filter to Match on IPv6 Flags This example shows how to configure a filter to match on IPv6 TCP flags. Requirements on page 154 Overview on page 154 Configuration on page 154 Verification on page 155 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Overview In this example, you configure a filter to match on IPv6 TCP flags. You can use this example to configure IPv6 TCP flags in M Series, MX Series, and T Series routing devices. Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To configure a filter to match on IPv6 TCP flags: 1. Include the family statement at the firewall hierarchy level, specifying inet6 as the protocol family. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet6 2. Create the stateless firewall filter. [edit firewall family inet6] user@host# edit filter tcpfilt 154

175 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic 3. Define the first term for the filter. [edit firewall family inet6 filter tcpfilt] edit term 1 4. Define the source address match conditions for the term. [edit firewall family inet6 filter tcpfilt term 1] user@host# set from next-header tcp tcp-flags syn 5. Define the actions for the term. [edit firewall family inet6 filter tcpfilt term 1] user@host# set then count tcp_syn_pkt log accept 6. If you are done configuring the device, commit the configuration. [edit firewall family inet6 filter tcpfilt term 1] user@host top [edit] user@host# commit Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, enter the show firewall filter tcpfilt command. Example: Configuring a Filter to Match on Port and Protocol Fields This example shows how to configure a standard stateless firewall filter to match on destination port and protocol fields. Requirements on page 155 Overview on page 155 Configuration on page 156 Verification on page 158 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Overview In this example, you configure a stateless firewall filter that accepts all IPv4 packets except for TCP and UDP packets. TCP and UDP packets are accepted if destined for the SSH port or the Telnet port. All other packets are rejected. 155

176 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter on page 156 Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface on page 157 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 157 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following configuration commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level: set firewall family inet filter filter1 term term1 from protocol-except tcp set firewall family inet filter filter1 term term1 from protocol-except udp set firewall family inet filter filter1 term term1 then accept set firewall family inet filter filter1 term term2 from address /16 set firewall family inet filter filter1 term term2 then reject set firewall family inet filter filter1 term term3 from destination-port ssh set firewall family inet filter filter1 term term3 from destination-port telnet set firewall family inet filter filter1 term term3 then accept set firewall family inet filter filter1 term term4 then reject set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet filter input filter1 Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the stateless firewall filter filter1: 1. Create the IPv4 stateless firewall filter. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet filter filter1 2. Configure a term to accept all traffic except for TCP and UDP packets. [edit firewall family inet filter filter1] user@host# set term term1 from protocol-except tcp user@host# set term term1 from protocol-except udp user@host# set term term1 then accept 3. Configure a term to reject packets to or from the /16 prefix. [edit firewall family inet filter filter1] user@host# set term term2 from address /16 user@host# set term term2 then reject 4. Configure a term to accept packets destined for either the SSH port or the Telnet port. [edit firewall family inet filter filter1] user@host# set term term3 from destination-port ssh user@host# set term term3 from destination-port telnet user@host# set term term3 then accept 156

177 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic 5. Configure the last term to reject all packets. [edit firewall family inet filter filter1] set term term4 then reject Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the stateless firewall filter to a logical interface: 1. Configure the logical interface to which you will apply the stateless firewall filter. [edit] user@host# edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet 2. Configure the interface address for the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set address /30 3. Apply the stateless firewall filter to the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set filter input filter1 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall family inet { filter filter1 { term term1 { from { protocol-except [tcp udp]; then { accept; term term2 { from { address /16; then { reject; term term3 { from { destination-port [ssh telnet]; 157

178 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches then { accept; term term4 { then { reject; 2. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces ge-0/0/1 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input filter1; address /30; 3. If you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, enter the show firewall filter filter1 operational mode command. Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Example: Configuring a Filter to Match on IPv6 Flags on page 154 Example: Configuring a Filter to Match on Two Unrelated Criteria on page 177 Example: Configuring a Filter to Count Accepted and Rejected Packets This example shows how to configure a firewall filter to count packets. Requirements on page 159 Overview on page 159 Configuration on page 159 Verification on page

179 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Overview In this example, you use a stateless firewall filter to reject all addresses except /24. Topology In the first term, the match condition address /24 except causes this address to be considered a mismatch, and this address is passed to the next term in the filter. The match condition address /0 matches all other packets, and these are counted, logged, and rejected. In the second term, all packets that passed though the first term (that is, packets whose address matches /24) are counted, logged, and accepted. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter on page 159 Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface on page 160 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 160 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following configuration commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet filter fire1 term 1 from address /24 except set firewall family inet filter fire1 term 1 from address /0 set firewall family inet filter fire1 term 1 then count reject_pref1_1 set firewall family inet filter fire1 term 1 then log set firewall family inet filter fire1 term 1 then reject set firewall family inet filter fire1 term 2 then count reject_pref1_2 set firewall family inet filter fire1 term 2 then log set firewall family inet filter fire1 term 2 then accept set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet filter input fire1 set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the stateless firewall filter fire1: 1. Create the stateless firewall filter fire1. [edit] 159

180 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches edit firewall family inet filter fire1 2. Configure the first term to reject all addresses except those to or from the /24 prefix and then count, log, and reject all other packets. [edit firewall family inet filter fire1] set term 1 from address /24 except user@host# set term 1 from address /0 user@host# set term 1 then count reject_pref1_1 user@host# set term 1 then log user@host# set term 1 then reject 3. Configure the next term to count, log, and accept packets in the /24 prefix. [edit firewall family inet filter fire1] user@host# set term 2 then count reject_pref1_2 user@host# set term 2 then log user@host# set term 2 then accept Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the stateless firewall filter to a logical interface: 1. Configure the logical interface to which you will apply the stateless firewall filter. [edit] user@host# edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet 2. Configure the interface address for the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set address /30 3. Apply the stateless firewall filter to the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set filter input fire1 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall family inet { filter fire1 { term 1 { from { address { /24 except; /0; 160

181 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic then { count reject_pref1_1; log; reject; term 2 { then { count reject_pref1_2; log; accept; 2. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces ge-0/0/1 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input fire1; address /30; 3. If you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, enter the show firewall filter fire1 operational mode command. You can also display the log and individual counters separately by using the following forms of the command: show firewall counter reject_pref1_1 show firewall counter reject_pref1_2 show firewall log Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Example: Configuring a Filter to Count IP Options Packets on page 165 Example: Configuring a Filter to Count and Discard IP Options Packets on page

182 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Example: Configuring a Filter to Count and Discard IP Options Packets This example shows how to configure a standard stateless firewall to count packets. Requirements on page 162 Overview on page 162 Configuration on page 162 Verification on page 164 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Because the filter term matches on any IP option value, the filter term can use the count nonterminating action without the discard terminating action or (alternatively) without requiring an interface on a 10-Gigabit Ethernet Modular Port Concentrator (MPC), 60-Gigabit Ethernet MPC, 60-Gigabit Queuing Ethernet MPC, or 60-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing MPC on an MX Series router. Overview In this example, you use a standard stateless firewall filter to count and discard packets that include any IP option value but accept all other packets. The IP option header field is an optional field in IPv4 headers only. The ip-options and ip-options-except match conditions are supported for standard stateless firewall filters and service filters only. NOTE: On M and T series routers, firewall filters cannot count ip-options packets on a per option type and per interface basis. A limited work around is to use the show pfe statistics ip options command to see ip-options statistics on a per Packet Forwarding Engine (PFE) basis. See show pfe statistics ip for sample output. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter on page 163 Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface on page 163 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page

183 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following configuration commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet filter block_ip_options term 10 from ip-options any set firewall family inet filter block_ip_options term 10 then count option_any set firewall family inet filter block_ip_options term 10 then discard set firewall family inet filter block_ip_options term 999 then accept set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet filter input block_ip_options set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the stateless firewall filter: 1. Create the stateless firewall filter block_ip_options. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet filter block_ip_options 2. Configure the first term to count and discard packets that include any IP options header fields. [edit firewall family inet filter block_ip_options] user@host# set term 10 from ip-options any user@host# set term 10 then count option_any user@host# set term 10 then discard 3. Configure the other term to accept all other packets. [edit firewall family inet filter block_ip_options] user@host# set term 999 then accept Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the stateless firewall filter to a logical interface: 1. Configure the logical interface to which you will apply the stateless firewall filter. [edit] user@host# edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet 2. Configure the interface address for the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set address /30 3. Apply the stateless firewall filter to the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set filter input block_ip_options 163

184 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] show firewall family inet { filter block_ip_options { term 10 { from { ip-options any; then { count option_any; discard; term 999 { then accept; 2. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces ge-0/0/1 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input block_ip_options; address /30; 3. If you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, enter the show firewall filter block_ip_options operational mode command. To display the count of discarded packets separately, enter the show firewall count option_any form of the command. 164

185 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Example: Configuring a Filter to Count Accepted and Rejected Packets on page 158 Example: Configuring a Filter to Count IP Options Packets on page 165 Example: Configuring a Filter to Count IP Options Packets This example shows how use a stateless firewall filter to count individual IP options packets: Requirements on page 165 Overview on page 165 Configuration on page 165 Verification on page 169 Requirements This example uses an interface on a 10-Gigabit Ethernet Modular Port Concentrator (MPC), 60-Gigabit Ethernet MPC, 60-Gigabit Queuing Ethernet MPC, or 60-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing MPC on an MX Series router. This interface enables you to apply an IPv4 firewall filter (standard or service filter) that can use the count, log, and syslog nonterminating actions on packets that match a specific ip-option value without having to also use the discard terminating action. No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Overview In this example, you use a stateless firewall filter to count IP options packets but not block any traffic. Also, the filter logs packets that have loose or strict source routing. The IP option header field is an optional field in IPv4 headers only. The ip-options and ip-options-except match conditions are supported for standard stateless firewall filters and service filters only. NOTE: On M and T series routers, firewall filters cannot count ip-options packets on a per option type and per interface basis. A limited work around is to use the show pfe statistics ip options command to see ip-options statistics on a per Packet Forwarding Engine (PFE) basis. See show pfe statistics ip for sample output. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page

186 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter on page 166 Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface on page 167 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 168 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following configuration commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_strict_source from ip-options strict-source-route set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_strict_source then count strict_source_route set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_strict_source then log set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_strict_source then accept set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_loose_source from ip-options loose-source-route set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_loose_source then count loose_source_route set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_loose_source then log set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_loose_source then accept set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_record from ip-options record-route set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_record then count record_route set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_record then accept set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_timestamp from ip-options timestamp set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_timestamp then count timestamp set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_timestamp then accept set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_router_alert from ip-options router-alert set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_router_alert then count router_alert set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_router_alert then accept set firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter term match_all then accept set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet filter input ip_options_filter Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the stateless firewall filter ip_option_filter: 1. Create the stateless firewall filter ip_option_filter. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet filter ip_options_filter 2. Configure the first term to count, log, and accept packets with the strict_source_route IP optional header field. [edit firewall family inet filter ip_option_filter] user@host# set term match_strict_source from ip-options strict_source_route user@host# set term match_strict_source then count strict_source_route user@host# set term match_strict_source then log user@host# set term match_strict_source then accept 166

187 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic 3. Configure the next term to count, log, and accept packets with the loose-source-route IP optional header field. [edit firewall family inet filter ip_option_filter] set term match_loose_source from ip-options loose-source-route set term match_loose_source then count loose_source_route set term match_loose_source then log set term match_loose_source then accept 4. Configure the next term to count and accept packets with the record-route IP optional header field. [edit firewall family inet filter ip_option_filter] set term match_record from ip-options record-route set term match_record then count record_route set term match_record then accept 5. Configure the next term to count and accept packets with the timestamp IP optional header field. [edit firewall family inet filter ip_option_filter] set term match_timestamp from ip-options timestamp set term match_timestamp then count timestamp set term match_timestamp then accept 6. Configure the next term to count and accept packets with the router-alert IP optional header field. [edit firewall family inet filter ip_option_filter] set term match_router_alert from ip-options router-alert set term match_router_alert then count router_alert set term match_router_alert then accept 7. Create the last term to accept any packet without incrementing any counters. [edit firewall family inet filter ip_option_filter] set term match_all then accept Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the stateless firewall filter to a logical interface: 1. Configure the logical interface to which you will apply the stateless firewall filter. [edit] user@host# edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet 2. Configure the interface address for the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set address /30 3. Apply the stateless firewall filter to the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set filter input ip_options_filter 167

188 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] show firewall family inet { filter ip_options_filter { term match_strict_source { from { ip-options strict-source-route; then { count strict_source_route; log; accept; term match_loose_source { from { ip-options loose-source-route; then { count loose_source_route; log; accept; term match_record { from { ip-options record-route; then { count record_route; accept; term match_timestamp { from { ip-options timestamp; then { count timestamp; accept; term match_router_alert { from { ip-options router-alert; then { 168

189 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic count router_alert; accept; term match_all { then accept; 2. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces ge-0/0/1 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input ip_option_filter; address /30; 3. If you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, enter the show firewall filter ip_option_filter operational mode command. You can also display the log and individual counters separately by using the following forms of the command: show firewall counter strict_source_route show firewall counter loose_source_route show firewall counter record_route show firewall counter timestamp show firewall counter router_alert show firewall log Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Example: Configuring a Filter to Count Accepted and Rejected Packets on page 158 Example: Configuring a Filter to Count and Discard IP Options Packets on page

190 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Example: Configuring a Filter to Count and Sample Accepted Packets This example shows how to configure a standard stateless firewall filter to count and sample accepted packets. Requirements on page 170 Overview on page 170 Configuration on page 170 Verification on page 172 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Before you begin, configure traffic sampling by including the sampling statement at the [edit forwarding-options] hierarchy level. Overview In this example, you use a standard stateless firewall filter to count and sample all packets received on a logical interface. NOTE: When you enable reverse path forwarding (RPF) on an interface with an input filter for firewall log and count, the input firewall filter does not log the packets rejected by RPF, although the rejected packets are counted. To log the rejected packets, use an RPF check fail filter. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter on page 171 Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface on page 171 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 171 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following configuration commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet filter sam term all then count count_sam set firewall family inet filter sam term all then sample set interfaces at-2/0/0 unit 301 family inet address /30 set interfaces at-2/0/0 unit 301 family inet filter input sam 170

191 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the stateless firewall filter sam: 1. Create the stateless firewall filter sam. [edit] edit firewall family inet filter sam 2. Configure the term to count and sample all packets. [edit firewall family inet filter sam] set term all then count count_sam set term all then sample Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the stateless firewall filter to a logical interface: 1. Configure the logical interface to which you will apply the stateless firewall filter. [edit] user@host# edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet 2. Configure the interface address for the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set address /30 3. Apply the stateless firewall filter to the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set filter input sam NOTE: The Junos OS does not sample packets originating from the router or switch. If you configure a filter and apply it to the output side of an interface, then only the transit packets going through that interface are sampled. Packets that are sent from the Routing Engine to the Packet Forwarding Engine are not sampled. Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall family inet { filter sam { term all { 171

192 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches then { count count_sam; sample; # default action is accept 2. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces interfaces { at-2/0/0 { unit 301 { family inet { filter { input sam; address /30; 3. If you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. Displaying the Packet Counter on page 172 Displaying the Firewall Filter Log Output on page 172 Displaying the Sampling Output on page 173 Displaying the Packet Counter Purpose Verify that the firewall filter is evaluating packets. Action user@host> show firewall filter sam Filter: Counters: Name Bytes Packets sam sam Displaying the Firewall Filter Log Output Purpose Display the packet header information for all packets evaluated by the firewall filter. 172

193 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic Action show firewall log Time Filter A Interface Pro Source address Destination address 23:09:09 - A at-2/0/0.301 TCP :80 23:09:07 - A at-2/0/0.301 TCP :56 23:09:07 - A at-2/0/0.301 ICM : :02:27 - A at-2/0/0.301 TCP :56 23:02:25 - A at-2/0/0.301 TCP :80 23:01:22 - A at-2/0/0.301 ICM : :01:21 - A at-2/0/0.301 ICM : :01:20 - A at-2/0/0.301 ICM : :01:19 - A at-2/0/0.301 ICM :26873 Meaning This output file contains the following fields: Time Time at which the packet was received (not shown in the default). Filter Name of a filter that has been configured with the filter statement at the [edit firewall] hierarchy level. A hyphen (-) or the abbreviation pfe indicates that the packet was handled by the Packet Forwarding Engine. A space (no hyphen) indicates that the packet was handled by the Routing Engine. A Filter action: A Accept (or next term) D Discard R Reject Interface Interface on which the filter is configured. NOTE: We strongly recommend that you always explicitly configure an action in the then statement. Pro Packet s protocol name or number. Source address Source IP address in the packet. Destination address Destination IP address in the packet. Displaying the Sampling Output Purpose Verify that the sampling output contains appropriate data. 173

194 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Action wtmp.0.gz Size: 15017, Last changed: Dec 19 13:15:54 wtmp.1.gz Size: 493, Last changed: Nov 19 13:47:29 wtmp.2.gz Size: 57, Last changed: Oct 20 15:24:34 Pipe through a command user@host> show log /var/tmp/sam # Apr 7 15:48:50 Time Dest Src Dest Src Proto TOS Pkt Intf IP TCP addr addr port port len num frag flags Apr 7 15:48: x x0 0x0 Apr 7 15:48: x x0 0x0 Apr 7 15:48: x x0 0x0 Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Example: Configuring a Filter to Set the DSCP Bit to Zero Example: Configuring a Filter to Set the DSCP Bit to Zero This example shows how to configure a standard stateless firewall filter based on the Differentiated Services code point (DSCP). Requirements on page 174 Overview on page 174 Configuration on page 174 Verification on page 177 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Overview In this example, you use a stateless firewall filter to match packets on DSCP bit patterns. If the DSCP is 2, the packet is classified to the best-effort forwarding class, and the DSCP is set to 0. If the DSCP is 3, the packet is classified to the best-effort forwarding class. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter on page 175 Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface on page 175 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page

195 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following configuration commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall filter filter1 term 1 from dscp 2 set firewall filter filter1 term 1 then forwarding-class best-effort set firewall filter filter1 term 1 then dscp 0 set firewall filter filter1 term 2 from dscp 3 set firewall filter filter1 term 2 then forwarding-class best-effort set interfaces ge-0/1/0 unit 0 family inet filter input filter1 Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the stateless firewall filter filter1: 1. Create the stateless firewall filter. [edit] user@host# edit firewall filter filter1 2. Configure the first term to match a packet with a DSCP of 2, change the DSCP to 0, and classify the packet to the best-effort forwarding class. [edit firewall filter filter1] user@host# set term 1 from dscp 2 user@host# set term 1 then forwarding-class best-effort user@host# set term 1 then dscp 0 3. Configure the other term to match a packet with a DSCP of 3 and classify the packet to the best-effort forwarding class. [edit firewall filter filter1] user@host# set term 2 from dscp 3 user@host# set term 2 then forwarding-class best-effort Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the stateless firewall filter to the logical interface corresponding to the VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) instance: 1. Configure the logical interface to which you will apply the stateless firewall filter. [edit] user@host# edit interfaces ge-0/1/0 unit 0 family inet 2. Apply the stateless firewall filter to the logical interface. [ input filter1] user@host# set filter input filter1 175

196 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] show firewall filter filter1 { term term1 { from { dscp 2; then { forwarding-class best-effort; dscp 0; term term2 { from { dscp 3; then { forwarding-class best-effort; 2. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces ge-0/1/0 { unit 0 { family inet { filter input filter1; 3. If you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit 176

197 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, enter the following operational mode commands: show class-of-service Displays the entire class-of-service (CoS) configuration, including system-chosen defaults. show class-of-service classifier type dscp Displays only the classifiers of the DSCP for IPv4 type. Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Example: Configuring a Filter to Count and Sample Accepted Packets on page 170 Example: Configuring a Filter to Match on Two Unrelated Criteria This example shows how to configure a standard stateless firewall filter to match on two unrelated criteria. Requirements on page 177 Overview on page 177 Configuration on page 177 Verification on page 179 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Overview In this example, you use a standard stateless firewall filter to match IPv4 packets that are either OSPF packets or packets that come from an address in the prefix /16, and send an administratively-prohibited ICMP message for all packets that do not match. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configuring the IPv4 Firewall Filter on page 178 Applying the IPv4 Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface on page

198 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following configuration commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet filter ospf_or_131 term protocol_match from protocol ospf set firewall family inet filter ospf_or_131 term address-match from source-address /16 set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet filter input ospf_or_131 Configuring the IPv4 Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the IPv4 firewall filter: 1. Enable configuration of the IPv4 firewall filter. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet filter ospf_or_ Configure the first term to accept OSPF packets. [edit firewall family inet filter ospf_or_131] user@host# set term protocol_match from protocol ospf Packets that match the condition are accepted by default. Because another term follows this term, packets that do not match this condition are evaluated by the next term. 3. Configure the second term to accept packets from any IPv4 address in a particular prefix. [edit firewall family inet filter ospf_or_131] user@host# set term address_match from source-address /16 Packets that match this condition are accepted by default. Because this is the last term in the filter, packets that do not match this condition are discarded by default. Results Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this procedure to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall family inet { filter ospf_or_131 { term protocol_match { from { protocol ospf; term address_match { from { source-address { /16; 178

199 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic Applying the IPv4 Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the stateless firewall filter to a logical interface: 1. Enable configuration of a logical interface. [edit] user@host# edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet 2. Configure an IP address for the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set address /30 3. Apply the IPv4 firewall filter to the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set filter input ospf_or_131 Results Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this procedure to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces ge-0/0/1 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input ospf_or_131; address /30; If you are done configuring the device, enter commit from configuration mode. Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, enter the show firewall filter ospf_or_131 operational mode command. Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Example: Configuring a Filter to Match on IPv6 Flags on page 154 Example: Configuring a Filter to Match on Port and Protocol Fields on page

200 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept DHCP Packets Based on Address This example shows how to configure a standard stateless firewall filter to accept packets from a trusted source. Requirements on page 180 Overview on page 180 Configuration on page 180 Verification on page 182 Requirements This example is supported only on MX Series routers and EX Series switches. Overview In this example, you create a filter (rpf_dhcp) that accepts DHCP packets with a source address of and a destination address of Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter on page 180 Apply the Firewall Filter to the Loopback Interface on page 181 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 181 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following configuration commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet filter rpf_dhcp term dhcp_term from source-address /32 set firewall family inet filter rpf_dhcp term dhcp_term from destination-address /32 set firewall family inet filter rpf_dhcp term dhcp_term then accept set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet filter input sam Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the stateless firewall filter: 1. Create the stateless firewall filter rpf_dhcp. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet filter rpf_dhcp 2. Configure the term to match packets with a source address of and a destination address of [edit firewall family inet filter rpf_dhcp] 180

201 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic set term dhcp_term from source-address /32 set term dhcp_term from destination-address /32 3. Configure the term to accept packets that match the specified conditions. [edit firewall family inet filter rpf_dhcp] set term dhcp_term then accept Apply the Firewall Filter to the Loopback Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the filter to the input at the loopback interface: 1. Apply the rpf_dhcp filter if packets are not arriving on an expected path. [edit] set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet rpf-check fail-filter rpf_dhcp 2. Configure an address for the loopback interface. [edit] user@host# set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall family inet { filter rpf_dhcp { term dhcp_term { from { source-address { /32; destination-address { /32; then accept; 2. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces lo0 { unit 0 { family inet { 181

202 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches filter { rpf-check { fail-filter rpf_dhcp; mode loose; address /32; 3. When you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, enter the show firewall operational mode command. Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Accept Traffic from Trusted Sources on page 115 Example: Configuring a Filter to Block Telnet and SSH Access on page 120 Example: Configuring a Filter to Block TFTP Access on page 124 Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept OSPF Packets from a Prefix on page 182 Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept OSPF Packets from a Prefix This example shows how to configure a standard stateless firewall filter to accept packets from a trusted source. Requirements on page 182 Overview on page 182 Configuration on page 183 Verification on page 185 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Overview In this example, you create a filter that accepts only OSPF packets from an address in the prefix /16, discarding all other packets with an administratively-prohibited ICMP message 182

203 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter on page 183 Apply the Firewall Filter to the Loopback Interface on page 183 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 184 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following configuration commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet filter ospf_filter term term1 from source-address /16 set firewall family inet filter ospf_filter term term1 from protocol ospf set firewall family inet filter ospf_filter term term1 then accept set firewall family inet filter ospf_filter term default-term then reject administratively-prohibited set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet filter input ospf_filter Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the stateless firewall filter ospf_filter: 1. Create the filter. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet filter ospf_filter 2. Configure the term that accepts packets. [edit firewall family inet filter ospf_filter] user@host# set term term1 from source-address /16 user@host# set term term1 from protocol ospf user@host# set term term1 then accept 3. Configure the term that rejects all other packets. [edit firewall family inet filter ospf_filter] user@host# set term default_term then reject administratively-prohibited Apply the Firewall Filter to the Loopback Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the firewall filter to the loopback interface: 1. Configure the interface. [edit] user@host# edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet 183

204 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches 2. Configure the logical interface IP address. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set address /30 3. Apply the filter to the input. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set filter input ospf_filter Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall family inet { filter ospf_filter { term term1 { from { source-address { /16; protocol ospf; then { accept; term default_term { then { reject administratively-prohibited; # default reject action 2. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces lo0 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input ospf_filter; address /30; 184

205 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic 3. If you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] commit Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, enter the show firewall filter ospf_filter operational mode command. Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Accept Traffic from Trusted Sources on page 115 Example: Configuring a Filter to Block Telnet and SSH Access on page 120 Example: Configuring a Filter to Block TFTP Access on page 124 Example: Configuring a Filter to Accept DHCP Packets Based on Address on page 180 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Handle Fragments This example shows how to create a stateless firewall filter that handles packet fragments. Requirements on page 185 Overview on page 185 Configuration on page 186 Verification on page 189 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring stateless firewall filters. Overview In this example, you create a stateless firewall filter called fragment-re that accepts fragmented packets originating from /24 and destined for the BGP port. This example includes the following firewall filter terms: not-from-prefix-term- Discards packets that are not from /24 to ensure that subsequent terms in the firewall filter are matched against packets from /24 only. small-offset-term Discards small (1 5) offset packets to ensure that subsequent terms in the firewall filter can be matched against all the headers in the packet. In addition, the term adds a record to the system logging destinations for the firewall facility. 185

206 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches not-fragmented-term Accepts unfragmented TCP packets with a destination port that specifies the BGP protocol. A packet is considered unfragmented if the MF flag is not set and the fragment offset equals 0. first-fragment-term Accepts the first fragment of a fragmented TCP packet with a destination port that specifies the BGP protocol. fragment-term Accepts all fragments that were not discarded by small-offset-term. (packet fragments ). However, only those fragments that are part of a packet containing a first fragment accepted by first-fragment-term are reassembled by the destination device. Packet fragments offset can be from 1 through NOTE: You can move terms within the firewall filter by using the insert command. For more information, see insert in the CLI User Guide. Configuration CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands, paste them into a text file, remove any line breaks, change any details necessary to match your network configuration, and then copy and paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term not-from-prefix-term from source-address /0 set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term not-from-prefix-term from source-address /24 except set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term not-from-prefix-term then discard set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term small-offset-term from fragment-offset 1-5 set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term small-offset-term then syslog set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term small-offset-term then discard set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term not-fragmented-term from fragment-offset 0 set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term not-fragmented-term from fragment-flags "!more-fragments" set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term not-fragmented-term from protocol tcp set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term not-fragmented-term from destination-port bgp set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term not-fragmented-term then accept set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term first-fragment-term from first-fragment set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term first-fragment-term from protocol tcp set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term first-fragment-term from destination-port bgp set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term first-fragment-term then accept set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term fragment-term from fragment-offset set firewall family inet filter fragment-re term fragment-term then accept 186

207 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic Step-by-Step Procedure The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For instructions on how to do that, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5 in the CLI User Guide. To configure the stateless firewall filter: 1. Define the stateless firewall filter. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet filter fragment-re 2. Configure the first term for the filter. [edit firewall family inet filter fragment-re ] user@host# set term not-from-prefix-term from source-address /0 user@host# set term not-from-prefix-term from source-address /24 except user@host# set term not-from-prefix-term then discard 3. Define the second term for the filter. [edit firewall family inet filter fragment-re] user@host# edit term small-offset-term 4. Define the match conditions for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter fragment-re term small-offset-term] user@host# set from fragment-offset Define the action for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter fragment-re term small-offset-term] user@host# set then syslog discard 6. Define the third term for the filter. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet filter fragment-re term not-fragmented-term 7. Define the match conditions for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter fragment-re term not-fragmented-term] user@host# set from fragment-flags "!more-fragments" fragment-offset 0 protocol tcp destination-port bgp 8. Define the action for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter fragment-re term not-fragmented-term] user@host# set then accept 9. Define the fourth term for the filter. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet filter fragment-re term first-fragment-term 10. Define the match conditions for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter fragment-re term first-fragment-term] user@host# set from first-fragment protocol tcp destination-port bgp 187

208 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches 11. Define the action for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter fragment-re term first-fragment-term] set then accept 12. Define the last term for the filter. [edit] edit firewall family inet filter fragment-re term fragment-term 13. Define the match conditions for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter fragment-re term fragment-term] set from fragment-offset Define the action for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter fragment-re term fragment-term] user@host# set then accept Results Confirm your configuration by entering the show firewall command from configuration mode. If the output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. user@host# show firewall family inet { filter fragment-re { term not-from-prefix-term { from { source-address { /0; /24 except; then discard; term small-offset-term { from { fragment-offset 1-5; then { syslog; discard; term not-fragmented-term { from { fragment-offset 0; fragment-flags "!more-fragments"; protocol tcp; destination-port bgp; then accept; term first-fragment-term { from { first-fragment; 188

209 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic protocol tcp; destination-port bgp; then accept; term fragment-term { from { fragment-offset ; then accept; If you are done configuring the device, enter commit from configuration mode. Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, perform these tasks: Displaying Stateless Firewall Filter Configurations on page 189 Verifying a Firewall Filter that Handles Fragments on page 189 Displaying Stateless Firewall Filter Configurations Purpose Verify the configuration of the firewall filter. You can analyze the flow of the filter terms by displaying the entire configuration. Action From configuration mode, enter the show firewall command. Meaning Verify that the output shows the intended configuration of the firewall filter. In addition, verify that the terms are listed in the order in which you want the packets to be tested. You can move terms within a firewall filter by using the insert CLI command. Verifying a Firewall Filter that Handles Fragments Purpose Verify that the actions of the firewall filter terms are taken. Action Send packets to the device that match the terms. Meaning Verify that packets from /24 with small fragment offsets are recorded in the device s system logging destinations for the firewall facility. Related Documentation show route summary 189

210 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Example: Configuring a Rate-Limiting Filter Based on Destination Class This example shows how to configure a rate-limiting stateless firewall filter. Requirements on page 190 Overview on page 190 Configuration on page 190 Verification on page 192 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Before you begin, configure the destination class class1. Overview In this example, you use a stateless firewall filter to set rate limits based on a destination class. To activate a policer from within a stateless firewall filter configuration: Create a template for the policer by including the policer policer-name statement. Reference the policer in a filter term that specifies the policer in the policer policer-name nonterminating action. You can also activate a policer by including the policer (input output) policer-template-name statement at a logical interface. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter on page 191 Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface on page 191 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 191 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall filter rl_dclass1 policer police_class1 if-exceeding bandwidth-limit 25 set firewall filter rl_dclass1 policer police_class1 if-exceeding burst-size-limit 1000 set firewall filter rl_dclass1 policer police_class1 then discard set firewall filter rl_dclass1 term term1 from destination-class class1 set firewall filter rl_dclass1 term term1 then policer police_class1 set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet filter input ospf_or_

211 Chapter 4: Applying Firewall Filters to Transit Traffic Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the stateless firewall filter rl_dclass1 with policer police_class1 for destination class class1: 1. Create the stateless firewall filter rl_dclass1. [edit] edit firewall filter rl_dclass1 2. Configure the policer template police_class1. [edit firewall filter rl_dclass1] set policer police_class1 if-exceeding bandwidth-limit 25 set policer police_class1 if-exceeding burst-size-limit 1000 set policer police_class1 then discard 3. Configure a filter term that uses policer police_class1 to rate-limit traffic for destination class class1. [edit firewall filter rl_dclass1] user@host# set term term1 from destination-class class1 user@host# set term term1 then policer police_class1 Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the filter rl_dclass1 to a logical interface: 1. Configure the logical interface to which you will apply the stateless firewall filter. [edit] user@host# edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet 2. Configure the interface address for the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set address /30 3. Apply the stateless firewall filter to the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set filter input rl_dclass1 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall filter rl_dclass1 { policer police_class1 { if-exceeding { bandwidth-limit 25; 191

212 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches burst-size-limit 1000; then { discard; term term1 { from { destination-class class1; then { policer police_class1; 2. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces ge-0/0/1 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input rl_dclass1; address /30; 3. If you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, enter the show class-of-service ge-0/0/1 operational mode command. Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview on page 262 Statement Hierarchy for Defining an Interface Set on page 263 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring a Filter to Match on an Interface Set on page 263 Example: Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set on page

213 CHAPTER 5 Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Overview on page 193 Guidelines for Configuring and Applying Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page 194 References from a Firewall Filter in a Logical System to Subordinate Objects on page 197 References from a Firewall Filter in a Logical System to Nonfirewall Objects on page 198 References from a Nonfirewall Object in a Logical System to a Firewall Filter on page 200 Unsupported Firewall Filter Statements for Logical Systems on page 205 Unsupported Actions for Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page 207 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Protect a Logical System Against ICMP Floods on page 211 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on Logical Systems on page 214 Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Overview This topic covers the following information: Logical Systems on page 193 Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page 193 Identifiers for Firewall Objects in Logical Systems on page 194 Logical Systems With the Junos OS, you can partition a single physical router or switch into multiple logical devices that perform independent routing tasks. Because logical systems perform a subset of the tasks once handled by the physical router or switch, logical systems offer an effective way to maximize the use of a single router or switch. Firewall Filters in Logical Systems You can configure a separate set of firewall filters for each logical system on a router or switch. To configure a filter in a logical system, you must define the filter in the firewall stanza at the [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] hierarchy level, and you must apply the filter to a logical interface that is also configured at the [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] hierarchy level. 193

214 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Identifiers for Firewall Objects in Logical Systems To identify firewall objects configured under logical systems, operational show commands and firewall-related SNMP MIB objects include a logical-system-name/ prefix in the object name. For example, firewall objects configured under the ls1 logical system include ls1/ as the prefix. Related Documentation Stateless Firewall Filter Types on page 8 Guidelines for Configuring and Applying Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page 194 Unsupported Firewall Filter Statements for Logical Systems on page 205 Unsupported Actions for Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page 207 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Protect a Logical System Against ICMP Floods Introduction to Logical Systems Logical Systems Operations and Restrictions Guidelines for Configuring and Applying Firewall Filters in Logical Systems This topic covers the following information: Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page 194 Filter Types in Logical Systems on page 195 Firewall Filter Protocol Families in Logical Systems on page 195 Firewall Filter Match Conditions in Logical Systems on page 196 Firewall Filter Actions in Logical Systems on page 196 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page 196 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems To configure a firewall filter in a logical system, include the filter, service-filter, or simple-filter statement at the [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall family family-name] hierarchy level. [edit] logical systems { logical-system-name { firewall { family family-name { filter filter-name { interface-specific; physical-interface-filter; term term-name { filter filter-name; from { match-conditions; then { 194

215 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Filter Types in Logical Systems actions; service-filter filter-name { # For family inet or family inet6 only. term term-name { from { match-conditions; then { actions; simple-filter filter-name { # For family inet only. term term-name { from { match-conditions; then { actions; There are no special restrictions on the types of stateless firewall filter types that you can configure in logical systems. In a logical system, you can use the same types of stateless firewall filters that are available on a physical router or switch: Standard stateless firewall filters Service filters Simple filters Firewall Filter Protocol Families in Logical Systems There are no special restrictions on the protocol families supported with stateless firewall filters in logical systems. In a logical system, you can filter the same protocol families as you can on a physical router or switch. Standard stateless firewall filters In logical systems, you can filter the following traffic types: protocol-independent, IPv4, IPv6, MPLS, MPLS-tagged IPv4 or IPv6, VPLS, Layer 2 circuit cross-connection, and Layer 2 bridging. Service filters In logical systems, you can filter IPv4 and IPv6 traffic. 195

216 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Simple filters In logical systems, you can filter IPv4 traffic only. Firewall Filter Match Conditions in Logical Systems There are no special restrictions on the match conditions supported with stateless firewall filters in logical systems. Firewall Filter Actions in Logical Systems There are no special restrictions on the actions supported with stateless firewall filters in logical systems. Statement Hierarchy for Applying Firewall Filters in Logical Systems To apply a firewall filter in a logical system, include the filter filter-name, service-filter service-filter-name, or simple-filter simple-filter-name statement to a logical interface in the logical system. The following configuration shows the hierarchy levels at which you can apply the statements: [edit] logical-systems logical-system-name { interfaces { interface-name { unit logical-unit-number { family family-name { filter { group group-name; input filter-name; input-list [ filter-names ]; output filter-name; output-list [ filter-names ] rpf-check { # For family inet or family inet6 only. fail-filter filter-name; mode loose; service { # For family inet or family inet6 only. input { service-set service-set-name <service-filter service-filter-name>; post-service-filter service-filter-name; output { service-set service-set-name <service-filter service-filter-name>; simple-filter { # For family inet only. input simple-filter-name; 196

217 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Related Documentation Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Overview on page 193 References from a Firewall Filter in a Logical System to Subordinate Objects on page 197 References from a Firewall Filter in a Logical System to Nonfirewall Objects on page 198 References from a Nonfirewall Object in a Logical System to a Firewall Filter on page 200 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Protect a Logical System Against ICMP Floods Unsupported Firewall Filter Statements for Logical Systems on page 205 Unsupported Actions for Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page 207 References from a Firewall Filter in a Logical System to Subordinate Objects This topic covers the following information: Resolution of References from a Firewall Filter to Subordinate Objects on page 197 Valid Reference from a Firewall Filter to a Subordinate Object on page 197 Resolution of References from a Firewall Filter to Subordinate Objects If a firewall filter defined in a logical system references a subordinate object (for example, a policer or prefix list), that subordinate object must be defined within the firewall stanza of the same logical system. For example, if a firewall filter configuration references a policer, the firewall filter and the policer must be configured under the same [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall] hierarchy level. This rule applies even if the same policer is configured under the main firewall configuration or if the same policer is configured as part of a firewall in another logical system. Valid Reference from a Firewall Filter to a Subordinate Object In this example, the firewall filter filter1 references the policer pol1. Both filter1 and pol1 are defined under the same firewall object. This configuration is valid. If pol1 had been defined under another firewall object, the configuration would not be valid. [edit] logical systems { ls-a { firewall { policer pol1 { if-exceeding { bandwidth-limit 401k; burst-size-limit 50k; then discard; filter filter1 { term one { from { source-address /16; 197

218 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches then { reject host-unknown; term two { from { source-address /16; then policer pol1; Related Documentation Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Overview on page 193 Guidelines for Configuring and Applying Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page 194 References from a Firewall Filter in a Logical System to Nonfirewall Objects on page 198 References from a Nonfirewall Object in a Logical System to a Firewall Filter on page 200 References from a Firewall Filter in a Logical System to Nonfirewall Objects This topic covers the following information: Resolution of References from a Firewall Filter to Nonfirewall Objects on page 198 Valid Reference to a Nonfirewall Object Outside of the Logical System on page 199 Resolution of References from a Firewall Filter to Nonfirewall Objects In many cases, a firewall configuration references objects outside the firewall configuration. As a general rule, the referenced object must be defined under the same logical system as the referencing object. However, there are cases when the configuration of the referenced object is not supported at the [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] hierarchy level. 198

219 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Valid Reference to a Nonfirewall Object Outside of the Logical System This example configuration illustrates an exception to the general rule that the objects referenced by a firewall filter in a logical system must be defined under the same logical system as the referencing object. In the following scenario, the service filter inetsf1 is applied to IPv4 traffic associated with the service set fred at the logical interface fe-0/3/2.0, which is on an adaptive services interface. Service filter inetsf1 is defined in ls-b and references prefix list prefix1. Service set fred is defined at the main services hierarchy level, and the policy framework software searches the [edit services] hierarchy for the definition of the fred service set. Because service rules cannot be configured in logical systems. firewall filter configurations in the [edit logical-systems logical-system logical-system-name] hierarchy are allowed to reference service sets outside the logical system hierarchy. [edit] logical-systems { ls-b { interfaces { fe-0/3/2 { unit 0 { family inet { service { input { service-set fred service-filter inetsf1; policy-options { prefix-list prefix1 { /16; /16; /16; firewall { # Under logical-system ls-b. family inet { filter filter1 { term one { from { source-address { /16; then { reject host-unknown; term two { 199

220 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches from { source-address { /16; then policer pol1; service-filter inetsf1 { term term1 { from { source-prefix-list { prefix1; then count prefix1; policer pol1 { if-exceeding { bandwidth-limit 401k; burst-size-limit 50k; then discard; # End of logical systems configuration. services { # Main services hierarchy level. service-set fred { max-flows 100; interface-service { service-interface sp-1/2/0.0; Related Documentation Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Overview on page 193 Guidelines for Configuring and Applying Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page 194 References from a Firewall Filter in a Logical System to Subordinate Objects on page 197 References from a Nonfirewall Object in a Logical System to a Firewall Filter on page 200 References from a Nonfirewall Object in a Logical System to a Firewall Filter This topic covers the following information: Resolution of References from a Nonfirewall Object to a Firewall Filter on page 201 Invalid Reference to a Firewall Filter Outside of the Logical System on page 201 Valid Reference to a Firewall Filter Within the Logical System on page 202 Valid Reference to a Firewall Filter Outside of the Logical System on page

221 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Resolution of References from a Nonfirewall Object to a Firewall Filter If a nonfirewall filter object in a logical system references an object in a firewall filter configured in a logical system, the reference is resolved using the following logic: If the nonfirewall filter object is configured in a logical system that includes firewall filter configuration statements, the policy framework software searches the [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall] hierarchy level. Firewall filter configurations that belong to other logical systems or to the main [edit firewall] hierarchy level are not searched. If the nonfirewall filter object is configured in a logical system that does not include any firewall filter configuration statements, the policy framework software searches the firewall configurations defined at the [edit firewall] hierarchy level. Invalid Reference to a Firewall Filter Outside of the Logical System This example configuration illustrates an unresolvable reference from a nonfirewall object in a logical system to a firewall filter. In the following scenario, the stateless firewall filters filter1 and fred are applied to the logical interface fe-0/3/2.0 in the logical system ls-c. Filter filter1 is defined in ls-c. Filter fred is defined in the main firewall configuration. Because ls-c contains firewall filter statements (for filter1), the policy framework software resolves references to and from firewall filters by searching the [edit logical systems ls-c firewall] hierarchy level. Consequently, the reference from fe-0/3/2.0 in the logical system to fred in the main firewall configuration cannot be resolved. [edit] logical-systems { ls-c { interfaces { fe-0/3/2 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input-list [ filter1 fred ]; firewall { # Under logical system ls-c. family inet { filter filter1 { term one { from { source-address /16; then { reject host-unknown; 201

222 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches term two { from { source-address /16; then policer pol1; policer pol1 { if-exceeding { bandwidth-limit 401k; burst-size-limit 50k; then discard; # End of logical systems firewall { # Under the main firewall hierarchy level family inet { filter fred { term one { from { source-address /16; then { log; reject host-unknown; # End of main firewall configurations. Valid Reference to a Firewall Filter Within the Logical System This example configuration illustrates resolvable references from a nonfirewall object in a logical system to two firewall filter. In the following scenario, the stateless firewall filters filter1 and fred are applied to the logical interface fe-0/3/2.0 in the logical system ls-c. Filter filter1 is defined in ls-c. Filter fred is defined in ls-c and also in the main firewall configuration. Because ls-c contains firewall filter statements, the policy framework software resolves references to and from firewall filters by searching the [edit logical systems ls-c firewall] hierarchy level. Consequently, the references from fe-0/3/2.0 in the logical system to filter1 and fred use the stateless firewall filters configured in ls-c. [edit] logical-systems { ls-c { interfaces { 202

223 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems fe-0/3/2 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input-list [ filter1 fred ]; firewall { # Under logical system ls-c. family inet { filter filter1 { term one { from { source-address /16; then { reject host-unknown; term two { from { source-address /16; then policer pol1; filter fred { # This fred is in ls-c. term one { from { source-address /16; then { log; reject host-unknown; policer pol1 { if-exceeding { bandwidth-limit 401k; burst-size-limit 50k; then discard; # End of logical systems configurations. firewall { # Main firewall filter hierarchy level family inet { filter fred { term one { from { source-address /16; 203

224 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches then { log; reject host-unknown; # End of main firewall configurations. Valid Reference to a Firewall Filter Outside of the Logical System This example configuration illustrates resolvable references from a nonfirewall object in a logical system to two firewall filter. In the following scenario, the stateless firewall filters filter1 and fred are applied to the logical interface fe-0/3/2.0 in the logical system ls-c. Filter filter1 is defined in the main firewall configuration. Filter fred is defined in the main firewall configuration. Because ls-c does not contain any firewall filter statements, the policy framework software resolves references to and from firewall filters by searching the [edit firewall] hierarchy level. Consequently, the references from fe-0/3/2.0 in the logical system to filter1 and fred use the stateless firewall filters configured in the main firewall configuration. [edit] logical-systems { ls-c { interfaces { fe-0/3/2 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input-list [ filter1 fred ]; # End of logical systems configurations. firewall { # Main firewall hierarchy level. family inet { filter filter1 { term one { from { source-address /16; then { reject host-unknown; term two { from { source-address /16; 204

225 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems then policer pol1; filter fred { term one { from { source-address /16; then { log; reject host-unknown; policer pol1 { if-exceeding { bandwidth-limit 701k; burst-size-limit 70k; then discard; # End of main firewall configurations. Related Documentation Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Overview on page 193 Guidelines for Configuring and Applying Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page 194 References from a Firewall Filter in a Logical System to Subordinate Objects on page 197 References from a Firewall Filter in a Logical System to Nonfirewall Objects on page 198 Unsupported Firewall Filter Statements for Logical Systems Table 24 on page 206 shows statements that are supported at the [edit firewall] hierarchy level but not at the [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall] hierarchy level. 205

226 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 24: Unsupported Firewall Statements for Logical Systems Statement Example Description accounting-profile [edit] logical-systems { ls1 { firewall { family inet { filter myfilter { accounting-profile fw-profile;... term accept-all { then { count counter1; accept; In this example, the accounting-profile statement is not allowed because the accounting profile fw-profile is configured under the [edit accounting-options] hierarchy. hierarchical-policer [edit] logical-systems { lr1 { firewall { hierarchical-policer {... In this example, the hierarchical policer statement requires a class-of-service configuration, which is not supported under logical systems. load-balance-group [edit] logical-systems { ls1 { firewall { load-balance-group lb-group { next-hop-group nh-group; This configuration is not allowed because the next-hop-group nh-group statement must be configured at the [edit forwarding-options next-hop-group] hierarchy level outside the [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall] hierarchy. Currently, the forwarding-options dhcp-relay statement is the only forwarding option supported for logical systems. 206

227 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Table 24: Unsupported Firewall Statements for Logical Systems (continued) Statement Example Description virtual-channel [edit] logical-systems { ls1 { firewall { family inet { filter foo { term one { from { source-address /16; then { virtual-channel sammy; This configuration is not allowed because the virtual channel sammy refers to an object defined at the [edit class-of-service] hierarchy level, and class of service is not supported for logical systems. Related Documentation Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Overview on page 193 Guidelines for Configuring and Applying Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page 194 Unsupported Actions for Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page 207 Introduction to Logical Systems Logical Systems Operations and Restrictions Unsupported Actions for Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Table 25 on page 207 describes the firewall filter actions that are supported at the [edit firewall] hierarchy level, but not supported at the [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall] hierarchy level. Table 25: Unsupported Actions for Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Firewall Filter Action Example Description Terminating Actions Not Supported in a Logical System 207

228 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 25: Unsupported Actions for Firewall Filters in Logical Systems (continued) Firewall Filter Action Example Description logical-system [edit] logical-systems { ls1 { firewall { family inet { filter foo { term one { from { source-address /16; then { logical-system fred; Because the logical-system action refers to fred a logical system defined outside the local logical system, this action is not supported. Nonterminating Actions Not Supported in a Logical System ipsec-sa [edit] logical-systems { ls1 { firewall { family inet { filter foo { term one { from { source-address /16; then { ipsec-sa barney; Because the ipsec-sa action modifier references barney a security association defined outside the local logical system this action is not supported. 208

229 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Table 25: Unsupported Actions for Firewall Filters in Logical Systems (continued) Firewall Filter Action Example Description next-hop-group [edit] logical-systems { ls1 { firewall { family inet { filter foo { term one { from { source-address /16; then { next-hop-group fred; Because the next-hop-group action refers to fred an object defined at the [edit forwarding-options next-hop-group] hierarchy level this action is not supported. port-mirror [edit] logical-systems { ls1 { firewall { family inet { filter foo { term one { from { source-address /16; then { port-mirror; Because the port-mirror action relies on a configuration defined at the [edit forwarding-options port-mirroring] hierarchy level, this action is not supported. 209

230 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 25: Unsupported Actions for Firewall Filters in Logical Systems (continued) Firewall Filter Action Example Description sample [edit] logical-systems { ls1 { firewall { family inet { filter foo { term one { from { source-address /16; then { sample; In this example, the sample action depends on the sampling configuration defined under the [edit forwarding-options] hierarchy. Therefore, the sample action is not supported. syslog [edit] logical-systems { ls1 { firewall { family inet { filter icmp-syslog { term icmp-match { from { address { /32; protocol icmp; then { count packets; syslog; accept; term default { then accept; In this example, there must be at least one system log (system syslog file filename) with the firewall facility enabled for the icmp-syslog filter's logs to be stored. Because this firewall configuration relies on a configuration outside the logical system, the syslog action modifier is not supported. Related Documentation Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Overview on page 193 Guidelines for Configuring and Applying Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page 194 Unsupported Firewall Filter Statements for Logical Systems on page 205 Introduction to Logical Systems 210

231 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems Logical Systems Operations and Restrictions Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Protect a Logical System Against ICMP Floods This example shows how to configure a stateless firewall filter that protects against ICMP denial-of-service attacks on a logical system. Requirements on page 211 Overview on page 211 Configuration on page 212 Verification on page 213 Requirements In this example, no special configuration beyond device initialization is required. Overview This example shows a stateless firewall filter called protect-re that polices ICMP packets. The icmp-policer limits the traffic rate of the ICMP packets to 1,000,000 bps and the burst size to 15,000 bytes. Packets that exceed the traffic rate are discarded. The policer is incorporated into the action of a filter term called icmp-term. In this example, a ping is sent from a directly connected physical router to the interface configured on the logical system. The logical system accepts the ICMP packets if they are received at a rate of up to 1 Mbps (bandwidth-limit). The logical system drops all ICMP packets when this rate is exceeded. The burst-size-limit statement accepts traffic bursts up to 15 Kbps. If bursts exceed this limit, all packets are dropped. When the flow rate subsides, ICMP packets are again accepted. Figure 3 on page 211 shows the topology used in this example. Figure 3: Logical System with a Stateless Firewall Router 1 LS1 so-0/0/ /30 so-0/0/ /30 R2 g

232 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Configuration CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands, paste them into a text file, remove any line breaks, change any details necessary to match your network configuration, and then copy and paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set logical-systems LS1 interfaces ge-0/0/2 unit 0 family inet policer input icmp-policer set logical-systems LS1 interfaces ge-0/0/2 unit 0 family inet address /30 set logical-systems LS1 firewall family inet filter protect-re term icmp-term from protocol icmp set logical-systems LS1 firewall family inet filter protect-re term icmp-term then policer icmp-policer set logical-systems LS1 firewall family inet filter protect-re term icmp-term then accept set logical-systems LS1 firewall policer icmp-policer if-exceeding bandwidth-limit 1m set logical-systems LS1 firewall policer icmp-policer if-exceeding burst-size-limit 15k set logical-systems LS1 firewall policer icmp-policer then discard Step-by-Step Procedure The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5 in the CLI User Guide. To configure an ICMP firewall filter on a logical system: 1. Configure the interface on the logical system. [edit] user@host# set logical-systems LS1 interfaces ge-0/0/2 unit 0 family inet address /30 2. Explicitly enable ICMP packets to be received on the interface. [edit] user@host# set logical-systems LS1 firewall family inet filter protect-re term icmp-term from protocol icmp user@host# set logical-systems LS1 firewall family inet filter protect-re term icmp-term then accept 3. Create the policer. [edit] user@host# set logical-systems LS1 firewall policer icmp-policer if-exceeding bandwidth-limit 1m user@host# set logical-systems LS1 firewall policer icmp-policer if-exceeding burst-size-limit 15k user@host# set logical-systems LS1 firewall policer icmp-policer then discard 4. Apply the policer to a filter term. [edit] user@host# set logical-systems LS1 firewall family inet filter protect-re term icmp-term then policer icmp-policer 5. Apply the policer to the logical system interface. [edit] 212

233 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems set logical-systems LS1 interfaces ge-0/0/2 unit 0 family inet policer input icmp-policer 6. If you are done configuring the device, commit the configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Results Confirm your configuration by issuing the show logical-systems LS1 command. user@host# show logical-systems LS1 interfaces { ge-0/0/2 { unit 0 { family inet { policer { input icmp-policer; address /30; firewall { family inet { filter protect-re { term icmp-term { from { protocol icmp; then { policer icmp-policer; accept; policer icmp-policer { if-exceeding { bandwidth-limit 1m; burst-size-limit 15k; then discard; Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. Verifying That Ping Works Unless the Limits Are Exceeded Purpose Make sure that the logical system interface is protected against ICMP-based DoS attacks. 213

234 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Action Log in to a system that has connectivity to the logical system and run the ping command. user@r2> ping PING ( ): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=0 ttl=64 time=1.316 ms 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=1.277 ms 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=1.269 ms user@r2> ping size PING ( ): data bytes ^C ping statistics packets transmitted, 0 packets received, 100% packet loss Meaning When you send a normal ping, the packet is accepted. When you send a ping packet that exceeds the filter limit, the packet is discarded. Related Documentation Example: Creating an Interface on a Logical System Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on Logical Systems This example shows how to configure filter-based forwarding within a logical system. The filter classifies packets to determine their forwarding path within the ingress routing device. Requirements on page 214 Overview on page 214 Configuration on page 217 Verification on page 222 Requirements In this example, no special configuration beyond device initialization is required. Overview Filter-based forwarding is supported for IP version 4 (IPv4) and IP version 6 (IPv6). Use filter-based forwarding for service provider selection when customers have Internet connectivity provided by different ISPs yet share a common access layer. When a shared media (such as a cable modem) is used, a mechanism on the common access layer looks at Layer 2 or Layer 3 addresses and distinguishes between customers. You can use filter-based forwarding when the common access layer is implemented using a combination of Layer 2 switches and a single router. With filter-based forwarding, all packets received on an interface are considered. Each packet passes through a filter that has match conditions. If the match conditions are met for a filter and you have created a routing instance, filter-based forwarding is applied to a packet. The packet is forwarded based on the next hop specified in the routing instance. For static routes, the next hop can be a specific LSP. 214

235 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems NOTE: Source-class usage filter matching is not supported on an interface configured with filter-based forwarding (FBF). To configure filter-based forwarding, perform the following tasks: Create a match filter on an ingress router or switch. To specify a match filter, include the filter filter-name statement at the [edit firewall] hierarchy level. A packet that passes through the filter is compared against a set of rules to classify it and to determine its membership in a set. Once classified, the packet is forwarded to a routing table specified in the accept action in the filter description language. The routing table then forwards the packet to the next hop that corresponds to the destination address entry in the table. Create routing instances that specify the routing table(s) to which a packet is forwarded, and the destination to which the packet is forwarded at the [edit routing-instances] or [edit logical-systems logical-system-name routing-instances] hierarchy level. For example: [edit] routing-instances { routing-table-name1 { instance-type forwarding; routing-options { static { route /0 nexthop ; routing-table-name2 { instance-type forwarding; routing-options { static { route /0 nexthop ; Create a routing table group that adds interface routes to the forwarding routing instances used in filter-based forwarding (FBF), as well as to the default routing instance inet.0. This part of the configuration resolves the routes installed in the routing instances to directly connected next hops on that interface. Create the routing table group at the [edit routing-options] or [edit logical-systems logical-system-name routing-options] hierarchy level. NOTE: Specify inet.0 as one of the routing instances that the interface routes are imported into. If the default instance inet.0 is not specified, interface routes are not imported into the default routing instance. 215

236 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches This example shows a packet filter that directs customer traffic to a next-hop router in the domains, SP 1 or SP 2, based on the packet s source address. If the packet has a source address assigned to an SP 1 customer, destination-based forwarding occurs using the sp1-route-table.inet.0 routing table. If the packet has a source address assigned to an SP 2 customer, destination-based forwarding occurs using the sp2-route-table.inet.0 routing table. If a packet does not match either of these conditions, the filter accepts the packet, and destination-based forwarding occurs using the standard inet.0 routing table. One way to make filter-based forwarding work within a logical system is to configure the firewall filter on the logical system that receives the packets. Another way is to configure the firewall filter on the main router or switch and then reference the logical system in the firewall filter. This example uses the second approach. The specific routing instances are configured within the logical system. Because each routing instance has its own routing table, you have to reference the routing instances in the firewall filter, as well. The syntax looks as follows: [edit firewall filter filter-name term term-name] user@host# set then logical-system logical-system-name routing-instance routing-instance-name Figure 4 on page 216 shows the topology used in this example. On Logical System P1, an input filter classifies packets received from Logical System PE3 and Logical System PE4. The packets are routed based on the source addresses. Packets with source addresses in the /24 and /24 networks are routed to Logical System PE1. Packets with source addresses in the /24 and /24 networks are routed to Logical System PE2. Figure 4: Logical Systems with Filter-Based Forwarding SP 1 Customer / /24 PE3 lt-1/2/0 PE1 SP 1 P2 P / /24 PE4 Input Filter Classifying Customers PE2 SP 2 SP 2 Customer g To establish connectivity, OSPF is configured on all of the interfaces. For demonstration purposes, loopback interface addresses are configured on the routing devices to represent networks in the clouds. The CLI Quick Configuration on page 217 section shows the entire configuration for all of the devices in the topology. The Configuring the Routing Instances on the Logical System P1 on page 219 and Configuring the Firewall Filter on the Main Router on page

237 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems sections shows the step-by-step configuration of the ingress routing device, Logical System P1. Configuration CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands, paste them into a text file, remove any line breaks, change any details necessary to match your network configuration, and then copy and paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall filter classify-customers term sp1-customers from source-address /24 set firewall filter classify-customers term sp1-customers from source-address /24 set firewall filter classify-customers term sp1-customers then log set firewall filter classify-customers term sp1-customers then logical-system P1 routing-instance sp1-route-table set firewall filter classify-customers term sp2-customers from source-address /24 set firewall filter classify-customers term sp2-customers from source-address /24 set firewall filter classify-customers term sp2-customers then log set firewall filter classify-customers term sp2-customers then logical-system P1 routing-instance sp2-route-table set firewall filter classify-customers term default then accept set logical-systems P1 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 10 encapsulation ethernet set logical-systems P1 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 10 peer-unit 9 set logical-systems P1 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 10 family inet filter input classify-customers set logical-systems P1 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 10 family inet address /30 set logical-systems P1 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 13 encapsulation ethernet set logical-systems P1 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 13 peer-unit 14 set logical-systems P1 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 13 family inet address /30 set logical-systems P1 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 17 encapsulation ethernet set logical-systems P1 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 17 peer-unit 18 set logical-systems P1 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 17 family inet address /30 set logical-systems P1 protocols ospf rib-group fbf-group set logical-systems P1 protocols ospf area interface all set logical-systems P1 protocols ospf area interface fxp0.0 disable set logical-systems P1 routing-instances sp1-route-table instance-type forwarding set logical-systems P1 routing-instances sp1-route-table routing-options static route /0 next-hop set logical-systems P1 routing-instances sp2-route-table instance-type forwarding set logical-systems P1 routing-instances sp2-route-table routing-options static route /0 next-hop set logical-systems P1 routing-options rib-groups fbf-group import-rib inet.0 set logical-systems P1 routing-options rib-groups fbf-group import-rib sp1-route-table.inet.0 set logical-systems P1 routing-options rib-groups fbf-group import-rib sp2-route-table.inet.0 set logical-systems P2 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 2 encapsulation ethernet set logical-systems P2 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 2 peer-unit 1 set logical-systems P2 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 2 family inet address /30 set logical-systems P2 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 6 encapsulation ethernet set logical-systems P2 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 6 peer-unit 5 set logical-systems P2 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 6 family inet address /30 set logical-systems P2 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 9 encapsulation ethernet set logical-systems P2 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 9 peer-unit 10 set logical-systems P2 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 9 family inet address /30 set logical-systems P2 protocols ospf area interface all 217

238 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches set logical-systems P2 protocols ospf area interface fxp0.0 disable set logical-systems PE1 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 14 encapsulation ethernet set logical-systems PE1 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 14 peer-unit 13 set logical-systems PE1 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 14 family inet address /30 set logical-systems PE1 interfaces lo0 unit 3 family inet address /32 set logical-systems PE1 protocols ospf area interface all set logical-systems PE1 protocols ospf area interface fxp0.0 disable set logical-systems PE2 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 18 encapsulation ethernet set logical-systems PE2 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 18 peer-unit 17 set logical-systems PE2 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 18 family inet address /30 set logical-systems PE2 interfaces lo0 unit 4 family inet address /32 set logical-systems PE2 protocols ospf area interface all set logical-systems PE2 protocols ospf area interface fxp0.0 disable set logical-systems PE3 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 1 encapsulation ethernet set logical-systems PE3 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 1 peer-unit 2 set logical-systems PE3 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 1 family inet address /30 set logical-systems PE3 interfaces lo0 unit 1 family inet address /32 set logical-systems PE3 interfaces lo0 unit 1 family inet address /32 set logical-systems PE3 protocols ospf area interface all set logical-systems PE3 protocols ospf area interface fxp0.0 disable set logical-systems PE4 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 5 encapsulation ethernet set logical-systems PE4 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 5 peer-unit 6 set logical-systems PE4 interfaces lt-1/2/0 unit 5 family inet address /30 set logical-systems PE4 interfaces lo0 unit 2 family inet address /32 set logical-systems PE4 interfaces lo0 unit 2 family inet address /32 set logical-systems PE4 protocols ospf area interface all set logical-systems PE4 protocols ospf area interface fxp0.0 disable Configuring the Firewall Filter on the Main Router Step-by-Step Procedure The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5 in the CLI User Guide. To configure the firewall filter on the main router or switch: 1. Configure the source addresses for SP1 customers. [edit firewall filter classify-customers term sp1-customers] user@host# set from source-address /24 user@host# set from source-address /24 2. Configure the actions that are taken when packets are received with the specified source addresses. To track the action of the firewall filter, a log action is configured. The sp1-route-table.inet.0 routing table on Logical System P1 routes the packets. [edit firewall filter classify-customers term sp1-customers] user@host# set then log user@host# set then logical-system P1 routing-instance sp1-route-table 3. Configure the source addresses for SP2 customers. [edit firewall filter classify-customers term sp2-customers] user@host# set from source-address /24 user@host# set from source-address /24 218

239 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems 4. Configure the actions that are taken when packets are received with the specified source addresses. To track the action of the firewall filter, a log action is configured. The sp2-route-table.inet.0 routing table on Logical System P1 routes the packet. [edit firewall filter classify-customers term sp2-customers] user@host# set then log user@host# set then logical-system P1 routing-instance sp2-route-table 5. Configure the action to take when packets are received from any other source address. All of these packets are simply accepted and routed using the default IPv4 unicast routing table, inet.0. [edit firewall filter classify-customers term default] user@host# set then accept Configuring the Routing Instances on the Logical System P1 Step-by-Step Procedure The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5 in the CLI User Guide. To configure the routing instances on a logical system: 1. Configure the interfaces on the logical system. [edit logical-systems P1 interfaces lt-1/2/0] user@host# set unit 10 encapsulation ethernet user@host# set unit 10 peer-unit 9 user@host# set unit 10 family inet address /30 user@host# set unit 13 encapsulation ethernet user@host# set unit 13 peer-unit 14 user@host# set unit 13 family inet address /30 user@host# set unit 17 encapsulation ethernet user@host# set unit 17 peer-unit 18 user@host# set unit 17 family inet address /30 2. Assign the classify-customers firewall filter to router interface lt-1/2/0.10 as an input packet filter. [edit logical-systems P1 interfaces lt-1/2/0] user@host# set unit 10 family inet filter input classify-customers 3. Configure connectivity, using either a routing protocol or static routing. As a best practice, disable routing on the management interface. [edit logical-systems P1 protocols ospf area ] user@host# set interface all user@host# set interface fxp0.0 disable 219

240 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches 4. Create the routing instances. These routing instances are referenced in the classify-customers firewall filter. The forwarding instance type provides support for filter-based forwarding, where interfaces are not associated with instances. All interfaces belong to the default instance, in this case Logical System P1. [edit logical-systems P1 routing-instances] set sp1-route-table instance-type forwarding set sp2-route-table instance-type forwarding 5. Resolve the routes installed in the routing instances to directly connected next hops. [edit logical-systems P1 routing-instances] set sp1-route-table routing-options static route /0 next-hop set sp2-route-table routing-options static route /0 next-hop Group together the routing tables to form a routing table group. The first routing table, inet.0, is the primary routing table, and the additional routing tables are the secondary routing tables. The primary routing table determines the address family of the routing table group, in this case IPv4. [edit logical-systems P1 routing-options] user@host# set rib-groups fbf-group import-rib inet.0 user@host# set rib-groups fbf-group import-rib sp1-route-table.inet.0 user@host# set rib-groups fbf-group import-rib sp2-route-table.inet.0 7. Apply the routing table group to OSPF. This causes the OSPF routes to be installed into all the routing tables in the group. [edit logical-systems P1 protocols ospf] user@host# set rib-group fbf-group 8. If you are done configuring the device, commit the configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Results Confirm your configuration by issuing the show firewall and show logical-systems P1 commands. user@host# show firewall filter classify-customers { term sp1-customers { from { source-address { /24; 220

241 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems /24; then { log; logical-system P1 routing-instance sp1-route-table; term sp2-customers { from { source-address { /24; /24; then { log; logical-system P1 routing-instance sp2-route-table; term default { then accept; user@host# show logical-systems P1 interfaces { lt-1/2/0 { unit 10 { encapsulation ethernet; peer-unit 9; family inet { filter { input classify-customers; address /30; unit 13 { encapsulation ethernet; peer-unit 14; family inet { address /30; unit 17 { encapsulation ethernet; peer-unit 18; family inet { address /30; protocols { ospf { 221

242 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches rib-group fbf-group; area { interface all; interface fxp0.0 { disable; routing-instances { sp1-route-table { instance-type forwarding; routing-options { static { route /0 next-hop ; sp2-route-table { instance-type forwarding; routing-options { static { route /0 next-hop ; routing-options { rib-groups { fbf-group { import-rib [ inet.0 sp1-route-table.inet.0 sp2-route-table.inet.0 ]; Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. Pinging with Specified Source Addresses Purpose Send some ICMP packets across the network to test the firewall filter. Action 1. Log in to Logical System PE3. user@host> set cli logical-system PE3 Logical system: PE3 2. Run the ping command, pinging the lo0.3 interface on Logical System PE1. The address configured on this interface is Specify the source address , which is the address configured on the lo0.1 interface on Logical System PE3. user@host:pe3> ping source

243 Chapter 5: Configuring Firewall Filters in Logical Systems PING ( ): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=0 ttl=62 time=1.444 ms 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=1 ttl=62 time=2.094 ms ^C ping statistics packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 1.444/1.769/2.094/0.325 ms 3. Log in to Logical System PE4. user@host:pe3> set cli logical-system PE4 Logical system: PE4 4. Run the ping command, pinging the lo0.4 interface on Logical System PE2. The address configured on this interface is Specify the source address , which is the address configured on the lo0.2 interface on Logical System PE4. user@host:pe4> ping source PING ( ): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=0 ttl=62 time=1.473 ms 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=1 ttl=62 time=1.407 ms ^C ping statistics packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 1.407/1.440/1.473/0.033 ms Meaning Sending these pings activates the firewall filter actions. Verifying the Firewall Filter Purpose Make sure the firewall filter actions take effect. Action 1. Log in to Logical System P1. user@host> set cli logical-system P1 Logical system: P1 2. Run the show firewall log command on Logical System P1. user@host:p1> show firewall log Log : Time Filter Action Interface Protocol Src Addr Dest Addr 13:52:20 pfe A lt-1/2/0.10 ICMP :52:19 pfe A lt-1/2/0.10 ICMP :51:53 pfe A lt-1/2/0.10 ICMP :51:52 pfe A lt-1/2/0.10 ICMP Related Documentation Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on the Source Address on page 325 Copying and Redirecting Traffic with Port Mirroring and Filter-Based Forwarding Using Filter-Based Forwarding to Export Monitored Traffic to Multiple Destinations 223

244 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Filter-Based Forwarding Overview on page

245 CHAPTER 6 Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting and Logging Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting Profiles on page 225 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Firewall Filter Accounting Profiles on page 226 Accounting for Firewall Filters Overview on page 227 System Logging Overview on page 227 System Logging of Events Generated for the Firewall Facility on page 228 Logging of Packet Headers Evaluated by a Firewall Filter Term on page 230 Example: Configuring Statistics Collection for a Firewall Filter on page 231 Example: Configuring Logging for a Stateless Firewall Filter Term on page 236 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting Profiles To configure an accounting profile that you can apply to a firewall filter, include the filter-profile filter-profile-name statement in the accounting-options stanza. accounting-options { filter-profile filter-profile-name { file log-filename { archive-sites { site-urls; files number; size bytes; start-time time; transfer-interval minutes; interval minutes; counters { counter-name-1; counter-name-2; 225

246 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches You can include the accounting options configuration at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] To specify the name of the accounting data log file in the /var/log directory to be used in conjunction with the accounting profile, include the file log-filename statement. To specify how often statistics are collected for the accounting profile, include the interval minutes statement. To specify the names of the firewall filter counters for which filter profile statistics are collected, include the counters statement. Related Documentation Accounting for Firewall Filters Overview on page 227 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Firewall Filter Accounting Profiles on page 226 Example: Configuring Statistics Collection for a Firewall Filter on page 231 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Firewall Filter Accounting Profiles You can apply an accounting profile to a standard stateless firewall filter for any supported protocol family except family any. To apply a filter-accounting profile to a stateless firewall filter, include the accounting-profile accounting-profile-name statement at the firewall filter stanza: firewall { family family-name { filter filter-name { accounting-profile accounting-profile-name; interface-specific; physical-interface-policer; term { filter filter-profile-name; term term-name { from { match-conditions; then { actions; You can include the firewall configuration at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit] 226

247 Chapter 6: Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting and Logging [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] Related Documentation Accounting for Firewall Filters Overview on page 227 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting Profiles on page 225 Example: Configuring Statistics Collection for a Firewall Filter on page 231 Accounting for Firewall Filters Overview Juniper Networks devices can collect various kinds of data about traffic passing through the device. You can set up one or more accounting profiles that specify some common characteristics of this data, including the following: Fields used in the accounting records. Number of files that the routing platform retains before discarding, and the number of bytes per file. Polling period that the system uses to record the data There are several types of accounting profiles: interface, firewall filter, source class and destination class usage, and Routing Engine. If you apply the same profile name to both a firewall filter and an interface, it causes an error. Related Documentation Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting Profiles on page 225 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Firewall Filter Accounting Profiles on page 226 Example: Configuring Statistics Collection for a Firewall Filter on page 231 System Logging Overview The Junos OS generates system log messages (also called syslog messages) to record system events that occur on the device. Events consist of routine operations, failure and error conditions, and critical conditions that might require urgent resolution. This system logging utility is similar to the UNIX syslogd utility. Each Junos OS system log message belongs to a message category, called a facility, that reflects the hardware- or software-based source of the triggering event. A group of messages belonging to the same facility are either generated by the same software process or concern a similar hardware condition or user activity (such as authentication attempts). Each system log message is also preassigned a severity, which indicates how seriously the triggering event affects router (or switch) functions. Together, the facility and severity of an event are known as the message priority. The content of a syslog message identifies the Junos OS process that generates the message and briefly describes the operation or error that occurred. By default, syslog messages that have a severity of info or more serious are written to the main system log file messages in the /var/log directory of the local Routing Engine. 227

248 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches To configure global settings and facility-specific settings that override these default values, you can include statements at the [edit system syslog] hierarchy level. For all syslog facilities or for a specified facility, you can configure the syslog message utility to redirect messages of a specified severity to a specified file instead of to the main system log file. You can also configure the syslog message utility to write syslog messages of a specified severity, for all syslog facilities or for a specified facility, to additional destinations. In addition to writing syslog messages to a log file, you can write syslog messages to the terminal sessions of any logged-in users, to the router (or switch) console, or to a remote host or the other Routing Engine. At the global level for all system logging messages, regardless of facility, severity, or destination you can override the default values for file-archiving properties and the default timestamp format. Related Documentation System Logging of Events Generated for the Firewall Facility on page 228 Logging of Packet Headers Evaluated by a Firewall Filter Term on page 230 Example: Configuring Logging for a Firewall Filter Term System Logging of Events Generated for the Firewall Facility System log messages generated for firewall filter actions belong to the firewall facility. Just as you can for any other Junos OS system logging facility, you can direct firewall facility syslog messages to one or more specific destinations: to a specified file, to the terminal session of one or more logged in users (or to all users), to the router (or switch) console, or to a remote host or the other Routing Engine on the router (or switch). When you configure a syslog message destination for firewall facility syslog messages, you include a statement at the [edit system syslog] hierarchy level, and you specify the firewall facility name together with a severity level. Messages from the firewall that are rated at the specified level or more severe are logged to the destination. System log messages with the DFWD_ prefix are generated by the firewall process (dfwd), which manages compilation and downloading of Junos OS firewall filters. System log messages with the PFE_FW_ prefix are messages about firewall filters, generated by the Packet Forwarding Engine controller, which manages packet forwarding functions. For more information, see the Junos OS System Log Messages Reference. Table 26 on page 229 lists the system log destinations you can configure for the firewall facility. 228

249 Chapter 6: Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting and Logging Table 26: Syslog Message Destinations for the Firewall Facility Destination Description Configuration Statements Under [edit system syslog] File Configuring this option keeps the firewall syslog messages out of the main system log file. To include priority and facility with messages written to the file, include the explicit-priority statement. To override the default standard message format, which is based on a UNIX system log format, include the structured-data statement. When the structured-data statement is included, other statements that specify the format for messages written to the file are ignored (the explicit-priority statement at the [edit system syslog file filename] hierarchy level and the time-format statement at the [edit system syslog] hierarchy level). file filename { firewall severity; allow-duplicates; archive archive-optios; explicit-priority; structured-data; allow-duplicates; archive archive-options; time-format (option); Terminal session Configuring this option causes a copy of the firewall syslog messages to be written to the specified terminal sessions. Specify one or more user names, or specify * for all logged in users. user (username *) { firewall severity; time-format (option); Router (or switch) console Configuring this option causes a copy of the firewall syslog messages to be written to the router (or switch) console. console { firewall severity; time-format (option); Remote host or the other Routing Engine Configuring this option causes a copy of the firewall syslog messages to be written to the specified remote host or to the other Routing Engine. To override the default alternative facility for forwarding firewall syslog messages to a remote machine (local3), include the facility-override firewall statement. To include priority and facility with messages written to the file, include the explicit-priority statement. host (hostname other-routing-engine) { firewall severity; allow-duplicates; archive archive-optios; facility-override firewall; explicit-priority; allow-duplicates; # All destinations archive archive-options; time-format (option); By default, the timestamp recorded in a standard-format system log message specifies the month, date, hour, minute, and second when the message was logged, as in the example: Sep 07 08:00:10 229

250 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches To include the year, the millisecond, or both in the timestamp for all system logging messages, regardless of the facility, include one of the following statement at the [edit system syslog] hierarchy level: time-format year; time-format millisecond; time-format year millisecond; The following example illustrates the format for a timestamp that includes both the millisecond (401) and the year (2010): Sep 07 08:00: Related Documentation System Logging Overview on page 227 Logging of Packet Headers Evaluated by a Firewall Filter Term on page 230 Example: Configuring Logging for a Firewall Filter Term Junos OS System Logging Facilities and Message Severity Levels Junos OS System Log Configuration Hierarchy Junos OS Default System Log Settings Logging Messages in Structured-Data Format Including the Year or Millisecond in Timestamps Changing the Alternative Facility Name for System Log Messages Directed to a Remote Destination Alternate Facilities for System Log Messages Directed to a Remote Destination Logging of Packet Headers Evaluated by a Firewall Filter Term Built in to the stateless firewall filtering software is the capability to log packet-header information for the packets evaluated by a stateless firewall filter term. You can write the packet header information to the system log file on the local Routing Engine or to a firewall filter buffer in the Packet Forwarding Engine. Logging of packet headers evaluated by firewall filters is supported for standard stateless firewall filters for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic only. Service filters and simple filters do not support logging of packet headers. Table 27 on page 231 lists the packet-header logs you can configure for a firewall filter action. 230

251 Chapter 6: Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting and Logging Table 27: Packet-Header Logs for Stateless Firewall Filter Terms Log Description Configuration Statements Syslog message destinations configured for the firewall facility Configure this option by using the syslog nonterminating action. NOTE: Packet header information is interspersed with event messages. To list log files, enter the show log operational mode command without command options. To display log file contents for a specific file in the /var/log directory on the local Routing Engine, enter the show log filename operational mode command or the file show /var/log/filename operational mode command. To clear log file contents, enter the clear log filename <all> operational mode command. If you include the all option, the specified log file is truncated, all archived versions of the log file are deleted. firewall { family { filter filter-name { from { match-conditions; then {... syslog; terminating-action; Buffer in the Packet Forwarding Engine Configure this option by using the log nonterminating action. NOTE: Restarting the router (or switch) causes the contents of this buffer to be cleared. To display the local log entries for firewall filters, enter the show firewall log operational mode command. firewall { family { filter filter-name { from { match-conditions; then {... log; terminating-action; Related Documentation System Logging Overview on page 227 System Logging of Events Generated for the Firewall Facility on page 228 Example: Configuring Logging for a Firewall Filter Term Example: Configuring Statistics Collection for a Firewall Filter This example shows how to configure and apply a firewall filter that collects data according to parameters specified in an associated accounting profile. Requirements on page 231 Overview on page 232 Configuration on page 232 Verification on page 236 Requirements Firewall filter accounting profiles are supported for all traffic types except family any. 231

252 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Overview In this example, you create a firewall filter accounting profile and apply it to a firewall filter. The accounting profile specifies how frequently to collect packet and byte count statistics and the name of the file to which the statistics are written. The profile also specifies that statistics are to be collected for three firewall filter counters. Topology The firewall filter accounting profile filter_acctg_profile specifies that statistics are collected every 60 minutes, and the statistics are written to the file /var/log/ff_accounting_file. Statistics are collected for counters named counter1, counter2, and counter3. The IPv4 firewall filter named my_firewall_filter increments a counter for each of three filter terms. The filter is applied to logical interface ge-0/0/1.0. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configure an Accounting Profile on page 233 Configure a Firewall Filter That References the Accounting Profile on page 233 Apply the Firewall Filter to an Interface on page 234 Confirm Your Candidate Configuration on page 234 Clear the Counters and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 235 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following configuration commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set accounting-options filter-profile filter_acctg_profile file ff_accounting_file set accounting-options filter-profile filter_acctg_profile interval 60 set accounting-options filter-profile filter_acctg_profile counters counter1 set accounting-options filter-profile filter_acctg_profile counters counter2 set accounting-options filter-profile filter_acctg_profile counters counter3 set firewall family inet filter my_firewall_filter accounting-profile filter_acctg_profile set firewall family inet filter my_firewall_filter term term1 from protocol ospf set firewall family inet filter my_firewall_filter term term1 then count counter1 set firewall family inet filter my_firewall_filter term term1 then discard set firewall family inet filter my_firewall_filter term term2 from source-address /16 set firewall family inet filter my_firewall_filter term term2 then count counter2 set firewall family inet filter my_firewall_filter term term2 then discard set firewall family inet filter my_firewall_filter term accept-all then count counter3 set firewall family inet filter my_firewall_filter term accept-all then accept 232

253 Chapter 6: Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting and Logging set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet filter input my_firewall_filter Configure an Accounting Profile Step-by-Step Procedure To configure an accounting profile: 1. Create the accounting profile filter_acctg_profile. [edit] user@host# edit accounting-options filter-profile filter_acctg_profile 2. Configure the accounting profile to filter and collect packet and byte count statistics every 60 minutes and write them to the /var/log/ff_accounting_file file. [edit accounting-options filter-profile filter_acctg_profile] user@host# set file ff_accounting_file user@host# set interval Configure the accounting profile to collect filter profile statistics (packet and byte counts) for three counters. [edit accounting-options filter-profile filter_acctg_profile] user@host# set counters counter1 user@host# set counters counter2 user@host# set counters counter3 Configure a Firewall Filter That References the Accounting Profile Step-by-Step Procedure To configure a firewall filter that references the accounting profile: 1. Create the firewall filter my_firewall_filter. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet filter my_firewall_filter 2. Apply the filter-accounting profile filter_acctg_profile to the firewall filter. [edit firewall family inet filter my_firewall_filter] user@host# set accounting-profile filter_acctg_profile 3. Configure the first filter term and counter. [edit firewall family inet filter my_firewall_filter] user@host# set term term1 from protocol ospf user@host# set term term1 then count counter1 user@host# set term term1 then discard 4. Configure the second filter term and counter. [edit firewall family inet filter my_firewall_filter] user@host# set term term2 from source-address /16 user@host# set term term2 then count counter2 user@host# set term term2 then discard 5. Configure the third filter term and counter. [edit firewall family inet filter my_firewall_filter] user@host# set term accept-all then count counter3 233

254 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches set term accept-all then accept Apply the Firewall Filter to an Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the firewall filter to a logical interface: 1. Configure the logical interface to which you will apply the firewall filter. [edit] user@host# edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet 2. Configure the interface address for the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set address /30 3. Apply the firewall filter to the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set filter input my_firewall_filter Confirm Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the accounting profile by entering the show accounting-options configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show accounting-options filter-profile filter_acctg_profile { file ff_accounting_file; interval 60; counters { counter1; counter2; counter3; 2. Confirm the configuration of the firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall family inet { filter my_firewall_filter { accounting-profile filter_acctg_profile; term term1 { from { protocol ospf; then { count counter1; 234

255 Chapter 6: Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting and Logging discard; term term2 { from { source-address { /16; then { count counter2; discard; term accept-all { then { count counter3; accept; 3. Confirm the configuration of the interfaces by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces ge-0/0/1 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input my_firewall_filter; address /30; Clear the Counters and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To clear the counters and commit your candidate configuration: 1. From operational command mode, use the clear firewall all command to clear the statistics for all firewall filters. To clear only the counters incremented in this example, include the name of the firewall filter. [edit] user@host> clear firewall filter my_firewall_filter 2. Commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit 235

256 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Verification To verify that the filter is applied to the logical interface, run the show interfaces command with the detail or extensive output level. To verify that the three counters are collected separately, run the show firewall filter my_firewall_filter command. show firewall filter my_firewall_filter Filter: my_firewall_filter Counters: Name Bytes Packets counter1 0 0 counter2 0 0 counter3 0 0 Related Documentation Accounting for Firewall Filters Overview on page 227 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting Profiles on page 225 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Firewall Filter Accounting Profiles on page 226 Example: Configuring Logging for a Stateless Firewall Filter Term This example shows how to configure a standard stateless firewall filter to log packet headers. Requirements on page 236 Overview on page 236 Configuration on page 236 Verification on page 239 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Overview In this example, you use a stateless firewall filter that logs and counts ICMP packets that have as either their source or destination. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page

257 Chapter 6: Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting and Logging To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configure the Syslog Messages File for the Firewall Facility on page 237 Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter on page 237 Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface on page 238 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 238 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following configuration commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set system syslog file messages_firewall_any firewall any set system syslog file messages_firewall_any archive no-world-readable set firewall family inet filter icmp_syslog term icmp_match from address /32 set firewall family inet filter icmp_syslog term icmp_match from protocol icmp set firewall family inet filter icmp_syslog term icmp_match then count packets set firewall family inet filter icmp_syslog term icmp_match then log set firewall family inet filter icmp_syslog term icmp_match then accept set firewall family inet filter icmp_syslog term default_term then accept set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet filter input icmp_syslog Configure the Syslog Messages File for the Firewall Facility Step-by-Step Procedure To configure a syslog messages file for the firewall facility: 1. Configure a messages file for all syslog messages generated for the firewall facility. user@host# set system syslog file messages_firewall_any firewall any 2. Restrict permission to the archived firewall facility syslog files to the root user and users who have the Junos OS maintenance permission. user@host# set system syslog file messages_firewall_any archive no-world-readable Configure the Stateless Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the stateless firewall filter icmp_syslog that logs and counts ICMP packets that have as either their source or destination: 1. Create the stateless firewall filter icmp_syslog. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet filter icmp_syslog 2. Configure matching on the ICMP protocol and an address. [edit firewall family inet filter icmp_syslog] user@host# set term icmp_match from address /32 user@host# set term icmp_match from protocol icmp 3. Count, log,, and accept matching packets. [edit firewall family inet filter icmp_syslog] user@host# set term icmp_match then count packets 237

258 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches set term icmp_match then log set term icmp_match then accept 4. Accept all other packets. [edit firewall family inet filter icmp_syslog] set term default_term then accept Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter to a Logical Interface Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the stateless firewall filter to a logical interface: 1. Configure the logical interface to which you will apply the stateless firewall filter. [edit] user@host# edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet 2. Configure the interface address for the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set address /30 3. Apply the stateless firewall filter to the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set filter input icmp_syslog Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the syslog message file for the firewall facility by entering the show system configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show system syslog { file messages_firewall_any { firewall any; archive no-world-readable; 2. Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall family inet { filter icmp_syslog { term icmp_match { from { address { /32; 238

259 Chapter 6: Configuring Firewall Filter Accounting and Logging protocol icmp; then { count packets; log; accept; term default_term { then accept; 3. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces ge-0/0/1 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input icmp_syslog; address /30; 4. If you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, enter the show log filter command: user@host> show log messages_firewall_any Mar 20 08:03:11 hostname feb FW: ge-0/1/0.0 A icmp (1 packets) This output file contains the following fields: Date and Time Date and time at which the packet was received (not shown in the default). Filter action: A Accept (or next term) D Discard R Reject 239

260 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Protocol Packet s protocol name or number. Source address Source IP address in the packet. Destination address Destination IP address in the packet. NOTE: If the protocol is ICMP, the ICMP type and code are displayed. For all other protocols, the source and destination ports are displayed. The last two fields (both zero) are the source and destination TCP/UDP ports, respectively, and are shown for TCP or UDP packets only. This log message indicates that only one packet for this match has been detected in about a 1-second interval. If packets arrive faster, the system log function compresses the information so that less output is generated, and displays an output similar to the following: user@host> show log filter Mar 20 08:08:45 hostname feb FW: ge-0/1/0.0 A icmp (515 packets) Related Documentation System Logging Overview on page 227 Logging of Packet Headers Evaluated by a Firewall Filter Term on page 230 System log messages with the DFWD_ prefix, described in the Junos OS System Log Messages Reference System log messages with the PFE_FW_* prefix, described in the Junos OS System Log Messages Reference 240

261 CHAPTER 7 Attaching Multiple Firewall Filters to a Single Interface Statement Hierarchy for Applying Interface-Specific Firewall Filters on page 241 Understanding Multiple Firewall Filters in a Nested Configuration on page 242 Guidelines for Nesting References to Multiple Firewall Filters on page 243 Understanding Multiple Firewall Filters Applied as a List on page 245 Guidelines for Applying Multiple Firewall Filters as a List on page 249 Example: Applying Lists of Multiple Firewall Filters on page 250 Example: Nesting References to Multiple Firewall Filters on page 255 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Interface-Specific Firewall Filters To apply an interface-specific stateless firewall filter to a logical interface, include the input filter-name or output filter-name statement in the filter or service-filter stanza of the interfaces configuration: interfaces { interface-name { unit unit-number { family family-name { filter { input filter-name-1; output filter-name-2; service-filter { input service-filter-name-1; output service-filter-name-2; You can include the interface configuration at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] 241

262 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Related Documentation Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Instances Overview Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Interface-Specific Firewall Filters on page 153 Example: Configuring Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Counters Understanding Multiple Firewall Filters in a Nested Configuration This topic covers the following information: The Challenge: Simplify Large-Scale Firewall Filter Administration on page 242 A Solution: Configure Nested References to Firewall Filters on page 242 Configuration of Nested Firewall Filters on page 243 Application of Nested Firewall Filters to a Router or Switch Interface on page 243 The Challenge: Simplify Large-Scale Firewall Filter Administration Typically, you apply a single firewall filter to an interface in the input or output direction or both. This approach might not be practical, however, when you have a router (or switch) configured with many, even hundreds of interfaces. In an environment of this scale, you want the flexibility of being able to modify filtering terms common to multiple interfaces without having to reconfigure the filter of every affected interface. In general, the solution is to apply an effectively chained structure of multiple stateless firewall filters to a single interface. You partition your filtering terms into multiple firewall filters configured so that you can apply a unique filter to each router (or switch) interface but also apply common filters to multiple router (or switch) interfaces as required. The Junos OS policy framework provides two options for managing the application of multiple separate firewall filters to individual router (or switch) interfaces. One option is to apply multiple filters as a single input list or output list. The other option is to reference a stateless firewall filter from within the term of another stateless firewall filter. A Solution: Configure Nested References to Firewall Filters The most structured way to avoid configuring duplicate filtering terms common to multiple firewall filters is to configure multiple firewall filters so that each filter includes the shared filtering terms by referencing a separate filter that contains the common filtering terms. The Junos OS uses the filter terms in the order in which they appear in the filter definition to evaluate packets that transit the interface. If you need to modify filtering terms shared across multiple interfaces, you only need to modify one firewall filter. NOTE: Similar to the alternative approach (applying a list of firewall filters), configuring a nested firewall filter combines multiple firewall filters into a new firewall filter definition. 242

263 Chapter 7: Attaching Multiple Firewall Filters to a Single Interface Configuration of Nested Firewall Filters Configuring a nested firewall filter for each router (or switch) interface involves separating shared packet-filtering rules from interface-specific packet-filtering rules as follows: For each set of packet-filtering rules common across multiple interfaces, configure a separate firewall filter that contains the shared filtering terms. For each router (or switch) interface, configure a separate firewall filter that contains: All the filtering terms unique to that interface. An additional filtering term that includes a filter reference to the firewall filter that contains the common filtering terms. Application of Nested Firewall Filters to a Router or Switch Interface Applying nested firewall filters is no different from applying an unnested firewall filter. For each interface, you can include an input or output statement (or both) within the filter stanza to specify the appropriate nested firewall filter. Applying nested firewall filters to an interface, the shared filtering terms and the interface-specific firewall filters are applied through a single nested firewall filter that includes other filters through the filter statement within a separate filtering term. Related Documentation Guidelines for Nesting References to Multiple Firewall Filters on page 243 Example: Nesting References to Multiple Firewall Filters on page 255 Guidelines for Nesting References to Multiple Firewall Filters This topic covers the following information: Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Nested Firewall Filters on page 243 Filter-Defining Terms and Filter-Referencing Terms on page 244 Types of Filters Supported in Nested Configurations on page 244 Number of Filter References in a Single Filter on page 244 Depth of Filter Nesting on page 244 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Nested Firewall Filters To reference a filter from within a filter, include the filter filter-name statement as a separate filter term: firewall firewall-name { family family-name { filter filter-name { term term-name { filter filter-name; 243

264 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches You can include the firewall configuration at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] Filter-Defining Terms and Filter-Referencing Terms You cannot configure a firewall filter term that both references another firewall filter and defines a match condition or action. If a firewall filter term includes the filter statement, then it cannot also include the from or then statement. For example, the firewall filter term term term1 in the configuration is not valid: [edit] firewall { family inet { filter filter_1 { term term1 { filter filter_2; from { source-address /32; then { accept; In order for term term1 to be a valid filter term, you must either remove the filter filter_2 statement or remove both the from and then stanzas. Types of Filters Supported in Nested Configurations Nested configurations of firewall filters support firewall filters only. You cannot use service filters or simple filters in a nested firewall filter configuration. Number of Filter References in a Single Filter Depth of Filter Nesting The total number of filters referenced from within a filter cannot exceed 256. The Junos OS supports a single level of firewall filter nesting. If filter_1 references filter_2, you cannot configure a filter that references a filter that references filter_1. Related Documentation Understanding Multiple Firewall Filters in a Nested Configuration on page 242 Example: Nesting References to Multiple Firewall Filters on page

265 Chapter 7: Attaching Multiple Firewall Filters to a Single Interface Understanding Multiple Firewall Filters Applied as a List This topic covers the following information: The Challenge: Simplify Large-Scale Firewall Filter Administration on page 245 A Solution: Apply Lists of Firewall Filters on page 245 Configuration of Multiple Filters for Filter Lists on page 246 Application of Filter Lists to a Router Interface on page 246 Interface-Specific Names for Filter Lists on page 247 How Filter Lists Evaluate Packets When the Matched Term Includes Terminating or Next Term Actions on page 247 How Filter Lists Evaluate Packets When the List Includes Protocol-Independent and IP Firewall Filters on page 248 The Challenge: Simplify Large-Scale Firewall Filter Administration Typically, you apply a single firewall filter to an interface in the input or output direction or both. However, this approach might not be practical when you have a device configured with many interfaces. In large environments, you want the flexibility of being able to modify filtering terms common to multiple interfaces without having to reconfigure the filter of every affected interface. In general, the solution is to apply an effectively chained structure of multiple firewall filters to a single interface. You partition your filtering terms into multiple firewall filters that each perform a filtering task. You can then choose which filtering tasks you want to perform for a given interface and apply the filtering tasks to that interface. In this way, you only manage the configuration for a filtering task in a single firewall filter. The Junos OS policy framework provides two options for managing the application of multiple separate firewall filters to individual router interfaces. One option is to apply multiple filters as a single input list or output list. The other option is to reference a firewall filter from within the term of another firewall filter. A Solution: Apply Lists of Firewall Filters The most straightforward way to avoid configuring duplicate filtering terms common to multiple firewall filters is to configure multiple firewall filters and then apply a customized list of filters to each interface. The Junos OS uses the filters in the order in which they appear in the list to evaluate packets that transit the interface. If you need to modify filtering terms shared across multiple interfaces, you only need to modify one firewall filter that contains those terms. NOTE: In contrast with the alternative approach (configuring nested firewall filters) applying firewall filter lists combines multiple firewall filters at each interface application point. 245

266 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Configuration of Multiple Filters for Filter Lists Configuring firewall filters to be applied in unique lists for each router interface involves separating shared packet-filtering rules from interface-specific packet-filtering rules as follows: Unique filters For each set of packet-filtering rules unique to a specific interface, configure a separate firewall filter that contains only the filtering terms for that interface. Shared filters For each set of packet-filtering rules common across two or more interfaces, consider configuring a separate firewall filter that contains the shared filtering terms. TIP: When planning for a large number firewall filters to be applied using filter lists, administrators often organize the shared filters by filtering criteria, by the services to which customers subscribe, or by the purposes of the interfaces. Application of Filter Lists to a Router Interface Applying a list of firewall filters to an interface is a matter of selecting the filters that meet the packet-filtering requirements of that interface. For each interface, you can include an input-list or output-list statement (or both) within the filter stanza to specify the relevant filters in the order in which they are to be used: Include any filters that contain common filtering terms relevant to the interface. Include the filter that contain only the filtering terms unique to the interface. 246

267 Chapter 7: Attaching Multiple Firewall Filters to a Single Interface Interface-Specific Names for Filter Lists Because a filter list is configured under an interface, the resulting concatenated filter is interface-specific. NOTE: When a filter list is configured under an interface, the resulting concatenated filter is interface-specific, regardless whether the firewall filters in the filter list are configured as interface-specific or not. Furthermore, the instantiation of interface-specfic firewall filters not only creates separate instances of any firewall filter counters, but also separate instances of any policer actions. Any policers applied through an action specified in the firewall filter configuration are applied separately to each interface in the interface group. The system-generated name of an interface-specific filter consists of the full interface name followed by either -i for an input filter list or -o for an output filter list. Input filter list name For example, if you use the input-list statement to apply a chain of filters to logical interface ge-1/3/0.0, the Junos OS uses the following name for the filter: ge-1/3/0.0-i Output filter list name For example, if you use the output-list statement to apply a chain of filters to logical interface fe-0/1/2.0, the Junos OS uses the following name for the filter: fe-0/1/2.0-o You can use the interface-specific name of a filter list when you enter a Junos OS operational mode command that specifies a firewall filter name. How Filter Lists Evaluate Packets When the Matched Term Includes Terminating or Next Term Actions The device evaluates a packet against the filters in a list sequentially, beginning with the first filter in the list until either a terminating action occurs or the packet is implicitly discarded. Table 28 on page 248 describes how a firewall filter list evaluates a packet based on whether the matched term specifies a terminating action and the next term action. The next term action is neither a terminating action nor a nonterminating action but a flow control action. 247

268 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 28: Firewall Filter List Behavior Firewall Filter Actions Included in the Matched Term Terminating next term Term Description Packet-Filtering Behavior Yes The matched term includes a terminating action (such as discard) but not the next term action The device executes the terminating action. No subsequent terms in the filter and no subsequent filters in the list are used to evaluate the packet. Yes The matched term includes the next term action, but it does not include any terminating actions. The device executes any nonterminating actions, then the device evaluates the packet against the next term in the filter or the next filter in the list. The matched term includes neither the next term action nor any terminating actions. The device executes any nonterminating actions, then the device implicitly accepts the packet. Because the accept action is a terminating action, no subsequent terms in the filter and no subsequent filters in the list are used to evaluate the packet. For information about terminating actions, see Firewall Filter Terminating Actions on page 98. NOTE: You cannot configure the next term action with a terminating action in the same firewall filter term. How Filter Lists Evaluate Packets When the List Includes Protocol-Independent and IP Firewall Filters On a single interface associated with a protocol-independent (family any) firewall filter and a protocol-specific (family inet or family inet6) firewall filter simultaneously, the protocol-independent firewall filter executes first. The terminating action of the first filter determines whether the second filter also evaluates the packet: If the first filter terminates by executing the accept action, the second filter also evaluates the packet. If the first filter terminates without any terms matching the packet (an implicit discard action), the second filter also evaluates the packet. If the first filter terminates by executing an explicit discard action, the second filter does not evaluate the packet. Related Documentation How Firewall Filters Evaluate Packets on page 18 Guidelines for Applying Multiple Firewall Filters as a List on page 249 Example: Applying Lists of Multiple Firewall Filters on page

269 Chapter 7: Attaching Multiple Firewall Filters to a Single Interface Guidelines for Applying Multiple Firewall Filters as a List This topic covers the following information: Statement Hierarchy for Applying Lists of Multiple Firewall Filters on page 249 Filter Input Lists and Output Lists for Router or Switch Interfaces on page 249 Types of Filters Supported in Lists on page 249 Restrictions on Applying Filter Lists for MPLS or Layer 2 CCC Traffic on page 250 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Lists of Multiple Firewall Filters To apply a single filter to the input or output direction of a router (or switch) logical interface, you include the input filter-name or output filter-name statement under the filter stanza for a protocol family. To apply a list of multiple filters to the input or output direction of a router (or switch) logical interface, include the input-list [ filter-names ] or output-list [ filter-names ] statement under the filter stanza for a protocol family: interfaces { interface-name { unit logical-unit-number { family family-name { filter {...filter-options... input-list [ filter-names ]; output-list [ filter-names ]; You can include the interface configuration at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] Filter Input Lists and Output Lists for Router or Switch Interfaces When applying a list of firewall filters as a list, the following limitations apply: You can specify up to 16 firewall filters for a filter input list. You can specify up to 16 firewall filters for a filter output list. Types of Filters Supported in Lists Lists of multiple firewall filters applied to a router (or switch) interface support standard stateless firewall filters only. You cannot apply lists containing service filters or simple filters to a router (or switch) interface. 249

270 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Restrictions on Applying Filter Lists for MPLS or Layer 2 CCC Traffic When applying firewall filters that evaluate MPLS traffic (family mpls) or Layer 2 circuit cross-connection traffic (family ccc), you can use the input-list [ filter-names ] and output-list [ filter-names ] statements for all interfaces except the following: Management and internal Ethernet (fxp) interfaces Loopback (lo0) interfaces USB modem (umd) interfaces Related Documentation Understanding Multiple Firewall Filters Applied as a List on page 245 Example: Applying Lists of Multiple Firewall Filters on page 250 Example: Applying Lists of Multiple Firewall Filters This example shows how to apply lists of multiple firewall filters. Requirements on page 250 Overview on page 251 Configuration on page 251 Verification on page 254 Requirements Before you begin, be sure that you have: Installed your router or switch, and supported PIC, DPC, or MPC and performed the initial router or switch configuration. Configured basic Ethernet in the topology. Configured a logical interface to run the IP version 4 (IPv4) protocol (family inet) and configured the logical interface with an interface address. This example uses logical interface ge-1/3/0.0 configured with the IP address /30. NOTE: For completeness, the configuration section of this example includes setting an IP address for logical interface ge-1/3/0.0. Verified that traffic is flowing in the topology and that ingress and egress IPv4 traffic is flowing through logical interface ge-1/3/0.0. Verified that you have access to the remote host that is connected to this router s or switch s logical interface ge-1/3/

271 Chapter 7: Attaching Multiple Firewall Filters to a Single Interface Overview In this example, you configure three IPv4 firewall filters and apply each filter directly to the same logical interface by using a list. Topology This example applies the following firewall filters as a list of input filters at logical interface ge-1/3/0.0. Each filter contains a single term that evaluates IPv4 packets and accepts packets based on the value of the destination port field in the TCP header: Filter filter_ftp matches on the FTP port number (21). Filter filter_ssh matches on the SSH port number (22). Filter filter_telnet matches on the Telnet port number (23). If an inbound packet does not match any of the filters in the input list, the packet is discarded. NOTE: The Junos OS uses filters in a list in the order in which the filter names appear in the list. In this simple example, the order is irrelevant because all of the filters specify the same action. Any of the filters can be applied to other interfaces, either alone (using the input or output statement) or in combination with other filters (using the input-list or output-list statement). The objective is to configure multiple minimalist firewall filters that you can reuse in interface-specific filter lists. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. Configure Multiple IPv4 Firewall Filters on page 252 Apply the Filters to a Logical Interface as an Input List and an Output List on page 252 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 253 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet filter filter_ftp term 0 from protocol tcp set firewall family inet filter filter_ftp term 0 from destination-port 21 set firewall family inet filter filter_ftp term 0 then count pkts_ftp set firewall family inet filter filter_ftp term 0 then accept set firewall family inet filter filter_ssh term 0 from protocol tcp set firewall family inet filter filter_ssh term 0 from destination-port 22 set firewall family inet filter filter_ssh term 0 then count pkts_ssh set firewall family inet filter filter_ssh term 0 then accept set firewall family inet filter filter_telnet term 0 from protocol tcp set firewall family inet filter filter_telnet term 0 from destination-port

272 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches set firewall family inet filter filter_telnet term 0 then count pkts_telnet set firewall family inet filter filter_telnet term 0 then accept set firewall family inet filter filter_discard term 1 then count pkts_discarded set firewall family inet filter filter_discard term 1 then discard set interfaces ge-1/3/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-1/3/0 unit 0 family inet filter input-list filter_ftp set interfaces ge-1/3/0 unit 0 family inet filter input-list filter_ssh set interfaces ge-1/3/0 unit 0 family inet filter input-list filter_telnet set interfaces ge-1/3/0 unit 0 family inet filter input-list filter_discard Configure Multiple IPv4 Firewall Filters Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the IPv4 firewall filters: 1. Navigate the CLI to the hierarchy level at which you configure IPv4 firewall filters. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet 2. Configure the first firewall filter to count and accept packets for port 21. [edit firewall family inet] user@host# set filter filter_ftp term 0 from protocol tcp user@host# set filter filter_ftp term 0 from destination-port 21 user@host# set filter filter_ftp term 0 then count pkts_ftp user@host# set filter filter_ftp term 0 then accept 3. Configure the second firewall filter to count and accept packets for port 22. [edit firewall family inet] user@host# set filter filter_ssh term 0 from protocol tcp user@host# set filter filter_ssh term 0 from destination-port 22 user@host# set filter filter_ssh term 0 then count pkt_ssh user@host# set filter filter_ssh term 0 then accept 4. Configure the third firewall filter to count and accept packets from port 23. [edit firewall family inet] user@host# set filter filter_telnet term 0 from protocol tcp user@host# set filter filter_telnet term 0 from destination-port 23 user@host# set filter filter_telnet term 0 then count pkts_telnet user@host# set filter filter_telnet term 0 then accept 5. Configure the last firewall filter to count the discarded packets. [edit firewall family inet] user@host# set filter filter_discard term 1 then count pkts_discarded user@host# set filter filter_discard term 1 then discard Apply the Filters to a Logical Interface as an Input List and an Output List Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the six IPv4 firewall filters as a list of input filters and a list of output filters: 1. Navigate the CLI to the hierarchy level at which you apply IPv4 firewall filters to logical interface ge-1/3/0.0. [edit] user@host# edit interfaces ge-1/3/0 unit 0 family inet 252

273 Chapter 7: Attaching Multiple Firewall Filters to a Single Interface 2. Configure the IPv4 protocol family for the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-1/3/0 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set address /30 3. Apply the filters as a list of input filters. [edit interfaces ge-1/3/0 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set filter input-list [ filter_ftp filter_ssh filter_telnet filter_discard ] Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the firewall filters by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall family inet { filter filter_ftp { term 0 { from { protocol tcp; destination-port 21; then { count pkts_ftp; accept; filter filter_ssh { term 0 { from { protocol tcp; destination-port 22; then { count pkts_ssh; accept; filter filter_telnet { term 0 { from { protocol tcp; destination-port 23; then { count pkts_telnet; accept; 253

274 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches filter filter_discard { term 1 { then { count pkts_discarded; discard; 2. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces ge-1/3/0 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input-list [ filter_ftp filter_ssh filter_telnet filter_discard ]; address /30; 3. If you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. Verifying That Inbound Packets Are Accepted Only If Destined for the FTP, SSH or Telnet Port on page 254 Verifying That Inbound Packets Are Accepted Only If Destined for the FTP, SSH or Telnet Port Purpose Verify that all three filters are active for the logical interface. Action To verify that input packets are accepted according to the three filters: 1. From the remote host that is connected to this router s (or switch s) logical interface ge-1/3/0.0, send a packet with destination port number 21 in the header. The packet should be accepted. 2. From the remote host that is connected to this router s (or switch s) logical interface ge-1/3/0.0, send a packet with destination port number 23 in the header. The packet should be accepted. 254

275 Chapter 7: Attaching Multiple Firewall Filters to a Single Interface 3. From the remote host that is connected to this router s (or switch s) logical interface ge-1/3/0.0, send a packet with destination port number 22 in the header. The packet should be accepted. 4. From the remote host that is connected to this router s (or switch s) logical interface ge-1/3/0.0, send a packet with a destination port number other than 21, 22, or 23. The packet should be discarded. 5. To display counter information for the list of filters applied to the input at ge-1/3/0.0-i enter the show firewall filter ge-1/3/0.0-i operational mode command. The command output displays the number of bytes and packets that match filter terms associated with the following counters: pkts_ftp-ge-1/3/0.0-i pkts_ssh-ge-1/3/0.0-i pkts_telnet-ge-1/3/0.0-i pkts_discard-ge-1/3/0.0-i Related Documentation Understanding Multiple Firewall Filters Applied as a List on page 245 Guidelines for Applying Multiple Firewall Filters as a List on page 249 Example: Nesting References to Multiple Firewall Filters This example shows how to configure nested references to multiple firewall filters. Requirements on page 255 Overview on page 255 Configuration on page 256 Verification on page 258 Requirements No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Overview In this example, you configure a firewall filter for a match condition and action combination that can be shared among multiple firewall filters. You then configure two firewall filters that reference the first firewall filter. Later, if the common filtering criteria needs to be changed, you would modify only the one shared firewall filter configuration. Topology The common_filter firewall filter discards packets that have a UDP source or destination port field number of 69. Both of the two additional firewall filters, filter1 and filter2, reference the common_filter. 255

276 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. Configure the Nested Firewall Filters on page 256 Apply Both Nested Firewall Filters to Interfaces on page 257 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 257 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet filter common_filter term common_term from protocol udp set firewall family inet filter common_filter term common_term from port tftp set firewall family inet filter common_filter term common_term then discard set firewall family inet filter filter1 term term1 filter common-filter set firewall family inet filter filter1 term term2 from address /16 set firewall family inet filter filter1 term term2 then reject set firewall family inet filter filter2 term term1 filter common-filter set firewall family inet filter filter2 term term2 from protocol udp set firewall family inet filter filter2 term term2 from port bootps set firewall family inet filter filter2 term term2 then accept set interfaces ge-0/0/0 unit 0 family inet address /24 set interfaces ge-0/0/0 unit 0 family inet filter input filter1 set interfaces ge-0/0/3 unit 0 family inet address /24 set interfaces ge-0/0/0 unit 0 family inet filter input filter2 Configure the Nested Firewall Filters Step-by-Step Procedure To configure two nested firewall filters that share a common filter: 1. Navigate the CLI to the hierarchy level at which you configure IPv4 firewall filters. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet 2. Configure the common filter that will be referenced by multiple other filters. [edit firewall family inet] user@host# set filter common_filter term common_term from protocol udp user@host# set filter common_filter term common_term from port tftp user@host# set filter common_filter term common_term then discard 3. Configure a filter that references the common filter. [edit firewall family inet] user@host# set filter filter1 term term1 filter common-filter user@host# set filter filter1 term term2 from address /16 user@host# set filter filter1 term term2 then reject 4. Configure a second filter that references the common filter. [edit firewall family inet] user@host# set filter filter2 term term1 filter common-filter user@host# set filter filter2 term term2 from protocol udp 256

277 Chapter 7: Attaching Multiple Firewall Filters to a Single Interface user@host# set filter filter2 term term2 from port bootps user@host# set filter filter2 term term2 then accept Apply Both Nested Firewall Filters to Interfaces Step-by-Step Procedure To apply both nested firewall filters to logical interfaces: 1. Apply the first nested filter to a logical interface input. [edit] user@host# set interfaces ge-0/0/0 unit 0 family inet address /24 user@host# set interfaces ge-0/0/0 unit 0 family inet filter input filter1 2. Apply the second nested filter to a logical interface input. [edit] user@host# set interfaces ge-0/0/3 unit 0 family inet address /24 user@host# set interfaces ge-0/0/0 unit 0 family inet filter input filter2 Confirm and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm and then commit your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall family inet { filter common_filter { term common_term { from { protocol udp; port tftp; then { discard; filter filter1 { term term1 { filter common-filter; term term2 { from { address /16; then { reject; filter filter2 { term term1 { 257

278 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches filter common-filter; term term2 { from { protocol udp; port bootps; then { accept; 2. Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces ge-0/0/0 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input filter1; address /24; ge-0/0/3 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input filter2; address /24; 3. If you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Verification To confirm that the configuration is working properly, enter the show firewall filter filter1 and show firewall filter filter2 operational mode commands. Related Documentation Understanding Multiple Firewall Filters in a Nested Configuration on page 242 Guidelines for Nesting References to Multiple Firewall Filters on page

279 CHAPTER 8 Attaching a Single Firewall Filter to Multiple Interfaces Statement Hierarchy for Applying Interface-Specific Firewall Filters on page 259 Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Instances Overview on page 260 Filtering Packets Received on a Set of Interface Groups Overview on page 262 Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview on page 262 Statement Hierarchy for Defining an Interface Set on page 263 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring a Filter to Match on an Interface Set on page 263 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring a Filter to Match on a Set of Interface Groups on page 264 Statement Hierarchy for Assigning Interfaces to Interface Groups on page 265 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Filters to an Interface Group on page 266 Example: Configuring Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Counters on page 266 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter on an Interface Group on page 271 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Interface-Specific Firewall Filters To apply an interface-specific stateless firewall filter to a logical interface, include the input filter-name or output filter-name statement in the filter or service-filter stanza of the interfaces configuration: interfaces { interface-name { unit unit-number { family family-name { filter { input filter-name-1; output filter-name-2; service-filter { input service-filter-name-1; output service-filter-name-2; 259

280 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches You can include the interface configuration at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] Related Documentation Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Instances Overview Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Interface-Specific Firewall Filters on page 153 Example: Configuring Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Counters Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Instances Overview This topic covers the following information: Instantiation of Interface-Specific Firewall Filters on page 260 Interface-Specific Names for Firewall Filter Instances on page 261 Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Counters on page 261 Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Policers on page 262 Instantiation of Interface-Specific Firewall Filters On T Series, M120, M320, MX Series routers, and EX Series switches, you can enable the Junos OS to automatically create an interface-specific instance of a firewall filter for each interface to which you apply the filter. If you enable interface-specific instantiation of a firewall filter and then apply that filter to multiple interfaces, any count actions or policer actions configured in the filter terms act on the traffic stream entering or exiting each individual interface, regardless of the sum of traffic on the multiple interfaces. You can enable this option per firewall filter by including the interface-specific statement in the filter configuration. NOTE: On T Series, M120, M320, MX Series routers, and EX Series switches, interfaces are distributed among multiple packet-forwarding components. Interface-specific firewall filtering is not supported on M Series routers other than the M120 and M320 routers. If you apply a firewall filter to multiple interfaces on an M Series router other than the M120 or M320 routers, the filter acts on the sum of traffic entering or exiting those interfaces. Interface-specific firewall filtering is supported for standard stateless firewall filters and for service filters. Interface-specific instances are not supported for simple filters. 260

281 Chapter 8: Attaching a Single Firewall Filter to Multiple Interfaces Interface-Specific Names for Firewall Filter Instances When the Junos OS creates a separate instance of a firewall filter for a logical interface, the instance is associate with an interface-specific name. The system-generated name of a firewall filter instance consists of the name of the configured filter followed by a hyphen ( - ), the full interface name, and either -i for an input filter instance or -o for an output filter instance. Input filter instance name For example, if you apply the interface-specific firewall filter filter_s_tcp to the input at logical interface at-1/1/1.0, the Junos OS instantiates an interface-specific filter instance with the following system-generated name: filter_s_tcp-at-1/1/1.0-i Output filter instance name For example, if you apply the interface-specific firewall filter filter_s_tcp to the output at logical interface ge-2/2/2.2, the Junos OS instantiates an interface-specific filter instance with the following system-generated name: count_s_tcp-ge-2/2/2.2-o You can use the interface-specific name of a filter instance when you enter a Junos OS operational mode command that specifies a stateless firewall filter name. TIP: When you configure a firewall filter with interface-specific instances enabled, we recommend you limit the filter name to 52 bytes in length. This is because firewall filter names are restricted to 64 bytes in length. If a system-generated filter instance name exceeds this maximum length, the policy framework software might reject the instance name. Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Counters Instantiation of interface-specific firewall filters causes the Packet Forwarding Engine to maintain any counters for the firewall filter separately for each interface. You specify interface-specific counters per firewall filter term by specifying the count counter-name non-terminating action. The system-generated name of an interface-specific firewall filter counter consists of the name of the configured counter followed by a hyphen ( - ), the full interface name, and either -i for an input filter instance or -o for an output filter instance. Interface-specific input filter counter name For example, suppose you configure the filter counter count_tcp for an interface-specific firewall filter. If the filter is applied to the input at logical interface at-1/1/1.0, the Junos OS creates the following system-generated counter name: count_tcp-at-1/1/1.0-i 261

282 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Interface-specific output filter counter name For example, suppose you configure the filter counter count_udp for an interface-specific firewall filter. If the filter is applied to the output at logical interface ge-2/2/2.2, the Junos OS creates the following system-generated counter name: count_udp-ge-2/2/2.2-o Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Policers Instantiation of interface-specific firewall filters not only creates separate instances of any firewall filter counters but also creates separate instances of any policer actions. Any policers applied through an action specified in the firewall filter configuration are applied separately to each interface in the interface group. You specify interface-specific policers per firewall filter term by specifying the policer policer-name non-terminating action. Related Documentation Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Interface-Specific Firewall Filters on page 153 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Interface-Specific Firewall Filters on page 241 Example: Configuring Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Counters Filtering Packets Received on a Set of Interface Groups Overview You can configure a firewall filter term that matches packets tagged for a specified interface group or set of interface groups. An interface group consists of one or more logical interfaces with the same group number. Packets received on an interface in an interface group are tagged as being part of that group. For standard stateless firewall filters, you can filter packets received on an interface group for IPv4, IPv6, virtual private LAN service ( VPLS), Layer 2 circuit cross-connection (CCC), and Layer 2 bridging traffic. For service filters, you can filter packets received on an interface group for either IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. NOTE: You can also configure a firewall filter term that matches on packets tagged for a specified interface set. For more information, see Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview on page 262. Related Documentation Statement Hierarchy for Assigning Interfaces to Interface Groups on page 265 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring a Filter to Match on a Set of Interface Groups on page 264 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter on an Interface Group on page 271 Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview You can configure a standard stateless firewall filter term that matches packets tagged for a specified interface set. An interface set groups two or more physical or logical 262

283 Chapter 8: Attaching a Single Firewall Filter to Multiple Interfaces interfaces into a single interface-set name. You can filter packets received on an interface set for protocol-independent, IPv4, IPv6, MPLS, VPLS, or bridging traffic. NOTE: You can also configure a standard stateless firewall filter term or a service filter term that matches on packets tagged for a specified interface group. For more information, see Filtering Packets Received on a Set of Interface Groups Overview on page 262. Related Documentation Statement Hierarchy for Defining an Interface Set on page 263 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring a Filter to Match on an Interface Set on page 263 Example: Configuring a Rate-Limiting Filter Based on Destination Class on page 190 Example: Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set on page 130 Statement Hierarchy for Defining an Interface Set To configure a named group of interfaces that can be referenced in a stateless firewall filter match condition, use the interface-set statement to define the interface-set name and two or more interfaces: firewall { interface-set interface-set-name { interface-name; You can include the statements at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit firewall] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall] To specify that the interface set contains all interfaces of a particular type, you can use the * (asterisk) wildcard character. For example, use fe-* to specify all Fast Ethernet interfaces. Related Documentation Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview on page 262 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring a Filter to Match on an Interface Set on page 263 Example: Configuring a Rate-Limiting Filter Based on Destination Class on page 190 Example: Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set on page 130 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring a Filter to Match on an Interface Set To configure a standard stateless firewall filter that matches packets tagged for a specified interface group or set of interface groups, configure a filter term that uses the interface-group interface-group-name match condition: firewall { 263

284 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches family (any inet inet6 mpls vpls bridge) { filter filter-name { term term-name { from { interface-set interface-set-name; then { filter-actions; NOTE: The interface set, for which the interface-set-name variable is defined, cannot contain dynamic interfaces because it supports only static interfaces when it is used in the filter's match condition. Related Documentation Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview on page 262 Statement Hierarchy for Defining an Interface Set on page 263 Example: Configuring a Rate-Limiting Filter Based on Destination Class on page 190 Example: Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set on page 130 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring a Filter to Match on a Set of Interface Groups You can configure a standard stateless firewall filter or a service filter term that matches packets tagged for a specified interface group or set of interface groups. To configure a standard stateless firewall filter that matches packets tagged for a specified interface group or set of interface groups, configure a filter term that uses the interface-group interface-group-number match condition: firewall { family (inet inet6 vpls ccc bridge) { filter filter-name { term term-name { from { interface-group interface-group-number; then { filter-actions; 264

285 Chapter 8: Attaching a Single Firewall Filter to Multiple Interfaces To configure a service filter that matches packets tagged for a specified interface group or set of interface groups, configure a filter term that uses the interface-group interface-group-name match condition: firewall { family (inet inet6) { service-filter filter-name { term term-name { from { interface-group interface-group-number; then { service-filter-actions; You can configure the firewall filter at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] Related Documentation Filtering Packets Received on a Set of Interface Groups Overview on page 262 Statement Hierarchy for Assigning Interfaces to Interface Groups on page 265 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter on an Interface Group on page 271 Statement Hierarchy for Assigning Interfaces to Interface Groups To assign a logical interface to an interface group, specify the group number by including the group interface-group-number statement in the filter stanza: interfaces { interface-name { unit unit-number { family ( inet inet6 vpls ccc bridge) { filter { group interface-group-number; NOTE: The number 0 is not a valid number for an interface group. You can configure the firewall filter at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit] 265

286 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] Related Documentation Filtering Packets Received on a Set of Interface Groups Overview on page 262 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring a Filter to Match on a Set of Interface Groups on page 264 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter on an Interface Group on page 271 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Filters to an Interface Group To apply a standard stateless firewall filter to an interface group, include the input filter-name or output filter-name in the filter stanza: interfaces { interface-name { unit unit-number { family family-name {... filter { input filter-name; output filter-name; You can include the interface configuration at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] Related Documentation Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Instances Overview Statement Hierarchy for Assigning Interfaces to Interface Groups on page 265 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring a Filter to Match on a Set of Interface Groups on page 264 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter on an Interface Group on page 271 Example: Configuring Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Counters This example shows how to configure and apply an interface-specific standard stateless firewall filter. Requirements on page 267 Overview on page 267 Configuration on page 267 Verification on page

287 Chapter 8: Attaching a Single Firewall Filter to Multiple Interfaces Requirements Interface-specific stateless firewall filters are supported on T Series, M Series, MX Series and PTX Series routers, and on EX Series switches only. No special configuration beyond device initialization is required before configuring this example. Overview In this example, you create an interface-specific stateless firewall filter that counts and accepts packets with source or destination addresses in a specified prefix and the IP protocol type field set to a specific value. Topology You configure the interface-specific stateless firewall filter filter_s_tcp to count and accept packets with IP source or destination addresses in the /12 prefix and the IP protocol type field set to tcp (or the numeric value 6). The name of the firewall filter counter is count_s_tcp. You apply the firewall filter to multiple logical interfaces: at-1/1/1.0 input ge-2/2/2.2 output Applying the filter to these two interfaces results in two instances of the filter: filter_s_tcp-at-1/1/1.0-i and filter_s_tcp-ge-2/2/2.2-o, respectively. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configure the Interface-Specific Firewall Filter on page 268 Apply the Interface-Specific Firewall Filter to Multiple Interfaces on page 268 Confirm Your Candidate Configuration on page 268 Clear the Counters and Commit Your Candidate Configuration on page 269 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet filter filter_s_tcp interface-specific set firewall family inet filter filter_s_tcp term 1 from address /12 set firewall family inet filter filter_s_tcp term 1 from protocol tcp set firewall family inet filter filter_s_tcp term 1 then count count_s_tcp set firewall family inet filter filter_s_tcp term 1 then accept set interfaces at-1/1/1 unit 0 family inet filter input filter_s_tcp set interfaces ge-2/2/2 unit 2 family inet filter output filter_s_tcp 267

288 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Configure the Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the interface-specific firewall filter: 1. Create the IPv4 firewall filter filter_s_tcp. [edit] edit firewall family inet filter filter_s_tcp 2. Enable interface-specific instances of the filter. [edit firewall family inet filter filter_s_tcp] set interface-specific 3. Configure the match conditions for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter filter_s_tcp] set term 1 from address /12 user@host# set term 1 from protocol tcp 4. Configure the actions for the term. [edit firewall family inet filter filter_s_tcp] user@host# set term 1 then count count_s_tcp user@host# set term 1 then accept Apply the Interface-Specific Firewall Filter to Multiple Interfaces Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the filter filter_s_tcp to logical interfaces at-1/1/1.0 and ge-2/2/2.2: 1. Apply the interface-specific filter to packets received on logical interface at-1/1/1.0. [edit] user@host# set interfaces at-1/1/1 unit 0 family inet filter input filter_s_tcp 2. Apply the interface-specific filter to packets transmitted from logical interface ge-2/2/2.2. [edit] user@host# set interfaces ge-2/2/2 unit 2 family inet filter output filter_s_tcp Confirm Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To confirm your candidate configuration: 1. Confirm the configuration of the stateless firewall filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall family inet { filter filter_s_tcp { interface-specific; term 1 { from { address { 268

289 Chapter 8: Attaching a Single Firewall Filter to Multiple Interfaces /12; protocol tcp; then { count count_s_tcp; accept; 2. Confirm the configuration of the interfaces by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces at-1/1/1 { unit 0 family inet { filter { input filter_s_tcp; ] ge-2/2/2 { unit 2 family inet { filter { output filter_s_tcp; Clear the Counters and Commit Your Candidate Configuration Step-by-Step Procedure To clear the counters and commit your candidate configuration: 1. From operational command mode, use the clear firewall all command to clear the statistics for all firewall filters. To clear only the counters used in this example, include the interface-specific filter instance names: [edit] user@host> clear firewall filter filter_s_tcp-at-1/1/1.0-i user@host> clear firewall filter filter_s_tcp-ge-2/2/2.2-o 2. Commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit 269

290 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. Verifying That the Filter Is Applied to Each of the Multiple Interfaces on page 270 Verifying That the Counters Are Collected Separately by Interface on page 270 Verifying That the Filter Is Applied to Each of the Multiple Interfaces Purpose Verify that the filter is applied to each of the multiple interfaces. Action Run the show interfaces command with the detail or extensive output level. 1. Verify that the filter is applied to the input for at-1/1/1.0: show interfaces at-1/1/1 detail Physical interface: at-1/1/1, Enabled, Physical link is Up Interface index: 300, SNMP ifindex: 194, Generation: Logical interface at-1/1/1.0 (Index 64) (SNMP ifindex 204) (Generation 5) Flags: Point-To-Point SNMP-Traps 0x4000 Encapsulation: ATM-SNAP... Protocol inet, MTU: 4470, Generation: 13, Route table: 0 Flags: Sendbcast-pkt-to-re Input Filters: filter_s_tcp-at-1/1/1.0-i,,,,, 2. Verify that the filter is applied to the output for ge-2/2/2.2: user@host> show interfaces ge-2/2/2 detail Physical interface: ge-2/2/2, Enabled, Physical link is Up Interface index: 129, SNMP ifindex: 502, Generation: Logical interface ge-2/2/2.2 (Index 70) (SNMP ifindex 536) (Generation 135) Flags: Point-To-Point SNMP-Traps 0x4000 Encapsulation: PPP... Protocol inet, MTU: 4470, Generation: 146, Route table: 0 Flags: Sendbcast-pkt-to-re Output Filters: filter_s_tcp-ge-2/2/2.2-o,,,,, Verifying That the Counters Are Collected Separately by Interface Purpose Make sure that the count_s_tcp counters are collected separately for the two logical interfaces. Action Run the show firewall command. user@host> show firewall filter filter_s_tcp Filter: filter_s_tcp Counters: Name Bytes Packets count_s_tcp-at-1/1/1.0-i count_s_tcp-ge-2/2/2.2-o

291 Chapter 8: Attaching a Single Firewall Filter to Multiple Interfaces Related Documentation Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Instances Overview Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Interface-Specific Firewall Filters on page 153 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Interface-Specific Firewall Filters on page 241 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter on an Interface Group Firewall filters are essential for securing a network and simplifying network management. In Junos OS, you can configure a stateless firewall filters to control the transit of data packets through the system and to manipulate packets as necessary. Applying a stateless firewall filter to an interface group helps to filter packets transiting through each interface in the interface group. This example shows how to configure a standard stateless firewall filter to match packets tagged for a particular interface group. Requirements on page 271 Overview on page 271 Configuration on page 272 Verification on page 275 Requirements This example uses the following hardware and software components: Any two Juniper Networks routers or switches that are physically or logically connected to each other through interfaces belonging to a routing instance Junos OS Release 7.4 or later Overview You can apply a stateless firewall filter to an interface group to apply it across all the interfaces in the interface group. This helps you to manage the packet filtering on various interfaces simultaneously. In this example, you configure two router or switch interfaces to belong to the interface group. You also configure a stateless firewall filter with three terms. In term term1, the filter matches packets that have been tagged as received on that interface group and contain an ICMP protocol tag. The filter counts, logs, and rejects packets that match the conditions. In term term2, the filter matches packets that contain the ICMP protocol tag. The filter counts, logs, and accepts all packets that match the condition. In term term3, the filter counts all the transit packets. By applying the firewall filter to the routing instance, you can simultaneously apply the filtering mechanism on all the interfaces in the interface group. For this to happen, all the interfaces in the interface group must belong to a single routing instance. NOTE: When you apply a firewall filter to a loopback interface, the interface filters all the packets destined to the Routing Engine. 271

292 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Figure 5: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter on an Interface Group CLI Quick Configuration shows the configuration for all of the devices in Figure 5 on page 272. The section Step-by-Step Procedure describes the steps on Device R1. Configuration CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands, paste them into a text file, remove any line breaks, change any details necessary to match your network configuration, copy and paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level, and then enter commit from configuration mode. Device R0 set interfaces ge-0/0/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-0/0/2 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 Device R1 set firewall family inet filter filter_if_group term term1 from interface-group 1 set firewall family inet filter filter_if_group term term1 from protocol icmp set firewall family inet filter filter_if_group term term1 then count if_group_counter1 set firewall family inet filter filter_if_group term term1 then log set firewall family inet filter filter_if_group term term1 then reject set firewall family inet filter filter_if_group term term2 from protocol icmp set firewall family inet filter filter_if_group term term2 then count if_group_counter2 set firewall family inet filter filter_if_group term term2 then log set firewall family inet filter filter_if_group term term2 then accept set firewall family inet filter filter_if_group term term3 then count default set interfaces ge-0/0/0 unit 0 family inet filter group 1 set interfaces ge-0/0/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-0/0/2 unit 0 family inet filter group 1 set interfaces ge-0/0/2 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 set forwarding-options family inet filter input filter_if_group 272

293 Chapter 8: Attaching a Single Firewall Filter to Multiple Interfaces Configure and Apply the Stateless Firewall Filter on an Interface Group Step-by-Step Procedure The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5 in the CLI User Guide. To configure the stateless firewall filter filter_if_group on an interface group: 1. Create the stateless firewall filter filter_if_group. [edit firewall] user@r1# edit family inet filter filter_if_group 2. Configure the interfaces and assign two interfaces to interface group 1. [edit interfaces] user@r1# set ge-0/0/0 unit 0 family inet filter group 1 user@r1# set ge-0/0/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 user@r1# set ge 0/0/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 user@r1# set ge-0/0/2 unit 0 family inet filter group 1 user@r1# set ge-0/0/2 unit 0 family inet address /30 user@r1# set lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 3. Configure term term1 to match packets received on interface group 1 and with the ICMP protocol. [edit firewall] user@r1# set family inet filter filter_if_group term term1 from interface-group 1 user@r1# set family inet filter filter_if_group term term1 from protocol icmp 4. Configure term term1 to count, log, and reject all the matching packets. [edit firewall] user@r1# set family inet filter filter_if_group term term1 then count if_group_counter1 user@r1# set family inet filter filter_if_group term term1 then log user@r1# set family inet filter filter_if_group term term1 then reject 5. Configure term term2 to match packets with the ICMP protocol. [edit firewall] user@r1# set family inet filter filter_if_group term term2 from protocol icmp 6. Configure term term2 to count, log, and accept all the matching packets. [edit firewall] user@r1# set family inet filter filter_if_group term term2 then count if_group_counter2 user@r1# set family inet filter filter_if_group term term2 then log user@r1# set family inet filter filter_if_group term term2 then accept 7. Configure term term3 to count all the transit packets. [edit firewall] user@r1# set family inet filter filter_if_group term term3 then count default 273

294 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches 8. Apply the firewall filter to the router s (or switch s) interface group by applying it to the routing instance. [edit] user@r1# set forwarding-options family inet filter input filter_if_group 9. If you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. [edit] user@host# commit Results From configuration mode, confirm your configuration by issuing the show interfaces, show firewall, and show forwarding-options commands. If the output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@r1# show interfaces ge-0/0/0 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { group 1; address /30; ge-0/0/1 { unit 0 { family inet { address /30; ge-0/0/2 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { group 1; address /30; lo0 { unit 0 { family inet { address /32; [edit] user@r1# show firewall 274

295 Chapter 8: Attaching a Single Firewall Filter to Multiple Interfaces family inet { filter filter_if_group { term term1 { from { interface-group 1; protocol icmp; then { count if_group_counter1; log; reject; term term2 { from { protocol icmp; then { count if_group_counter2; log; accept; term term3 { then count default; [edit] user@r1# show forwarding-options family inet { filter { input filter_if_group; Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. Verifying the Configuration of the Interfaces on page 275 Verifying Stateless Firewall Filter Configuration on page 276 Verifying the Configuration of the Interfaces Purpose Verify that the interfaces are properly configured. Action To display the state of the interfaces, use the show interfaces terse operational mode command. Device R0 user@r0> show interfaces terse Interface Admin Link Proto Local Remote ge-0/0/0 up up 275

296 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches ge-0/0/0.0 up up inet /30 multiservice ge-0/0/1 up up ge-0/0/1.0 up up inet /30 multiservice ge-0/0/2 up up ge-0/0/2.0 up up inet /30 multiservice lo0 up up lo0.0 up up inet > 0/0 Device R1 show interfaces terse Interface Admin Link Proto Local Remote ge-0/0/0 up up ge-0/0/0.0 up up inet /30 multiservice... ge-0/0/1 up up ge-0/0/1.0 up up inet /30 multiservice ge-0/0/2 up up ge-0/0/2.0 up up inet /30 multiservice... Meaning All the interfaces on Devices R0 and R1 are physically connected and up. The interface group 1 on Device R1 consists of two interfaces, namely ge-0/0/0.0 and ge-0/0/2.0. Verifying Stateless Firewall Filter Configuration Purpose Verify that the firewall filter match conditions are configured properly. Action To display the firewall filter counters, enter the show firewall filter filter_if_group operational mode command. user@r1> show firewall filter filter_if_group Filter: filter_if_group Counters: Name Bytes Packets default if_group_counter if_group_counter To display the local log of packet headers for packets evaluated by the firewall filter, enter the show firewall log operational mode command. user@r1> show firewall log Log : Time Filter Action Interface Protocol Src Addr Dest Addr 22:27:33 pfe A lo0.0 ICMP :27:33 pfe R ge-0/0/2.0 ICMP :27:32 pfe A lo0.0 ICMP

297 Chapter 8: Attaching a Single Firewall Filter to Multiple Interfaces 22:27:32 pfe R ge-0/0/2.0 ICMP :27:31 pfe A lo0.0 ICMP :27:31 pfe R ge-0/0/2.0 ICMP :27:30 pfe A lo0.0 ICMP :27:30 pfe R ge-0/0/2.0 ICMP :27:29 pfe A lo0.0 ICMP :27:29 pfe A lo0.0 ICMP :27:29 pfe R ge-0/0/2.0 ICMP :27:21 pfe A ge-0/0/1.0 ICMP :27:20 pfe A ge-0/0/1.0 ICMP :27:19 pfe A ge-0/0/1.0 ICMP :27:18 pfe A ge-0/0/1.0 ICMP :27:04 pfe A lo0.0 ICMP :27:04 pfe R ge-0/0/0.0 ICMP :27:04 pfe A lo0.0 ICMP :27:04 pfe R ge-0/0/0.0 ICMP :27:02 pfe A lo0.0 ICMP :27:02 pfe R ge-0/0/0.0 ICMP :27:01 pfe A lo0.0 ICMP :27:01 pfe R ge-0/0/0.0 ICMP :27:00 pfe A lo0.0 ICMP :27:00 pfe R ge-0/0/0.0 ICMP :24:48 filter_if_group A fxp0.0 ICMP To make sure that the firewall filters are active on interface group 1 on Device R1, use the ping <address> operational mode command on the CLI of Device R0. user@r0> ping PING ( ): 56 data bytes 36 bytes from : Communication prohibited by filter Vr HL TOS Len ID Flg off TTL Pro cks Src Dst f46b bytes from : Communication prohibited by filter Vr HL TOS Len ID Flg off TTL Pro cks Src Dst f b bytes from : Communication prohibited by filter 277

298 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Vr HL TOS Len ID Flg off TTL Pro cks Src Dst f d user@r0> ping PING ( ): 56 data bytes 36 bytes from : Communication prohibited by filter Vr HL TOS Len ID Flg off TTL Pro cks Src Dst f5bd ae bytes from : Communication prohibited by filter Vr HL TOS Len ID Flg off TTL Pro cks Src Dst f5cd ad bytes from : Communication prohibited by filter Vr HL TOS Len ID Flg off TTL Pro cks Src Dst f5d acb bytes from : Communication prohibited by filter Vr HL TOS Len ID Flg off TTL Pro cks Src Dst f5f aae To make sure that the firewall filter is not applied on an interface that is not in interface group 1, use the ping <address> operational mode command on the CLI of Device R0. user@r0> ping PING ( ): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=0 ttl=64 time=8.689 ms 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=4.076 ms 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=8.501 ms 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=3 ttl=64 time=3.954 ms... Meaning The stateless firewall filter is applied to all interfaces in interface group 1. The term term1 match condition in the stateless firewall filter counts, logs, and rejects packets that are received on or sent from the interfaces in interface group 1 and with a source ICMP protocol. The term term2 match condition matches packets tagged with the ICMP protocol and counts, logs, and accepts those packets. The term term3 match condition counts all the transit packets. Related Documentation Filtering Packets Received on a Set of Interface Groups Overview on page 262 Statement Hierarchy for Assigning Interfaces to Interface Groups on page 265 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring a Filter to Match on a Set of Interface Groups on page

299 CHAPTER 9 Configuring Service Filters Service Filter Overview Service Filter Overview on page 279 How Service Filters Evaluate Packets on page 280 Guidelines for Configuring Service Filters on page 282 Guidelines for Applying Service Filters on page 285 Example: Configuring and Applying Service Filters on page 288 Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 293 Service Filter Terminating Actions on page 302 Service Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 302 This topic covers the following information: Services on page 279 Service Rules on page 279 Service Rule Refinement on page 280 Service Filter Counters on page 280 Services The Adaptive Services Physical Interface Cards (PICs), Multiservices PICs, and Multiservices Dense Port Concentrators (DPCs) provide adaptive services interfaces. Adaptive services interfaces enable you to coordinate a special range of services on a single PIC or DPC by configuring a set of services and applications. NOTE: Service filters are not supported on T4000 routers. Service Rules A service set is an optional definition you can apply to the traffic at an adaptive services interface. A service set enables you to configure combinations of directional rules and default settings that control the behavior of each service in the service set. 279

300 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Service Rule Refinement Service Filter Counters When you apply a service set to the traffic at an adaptive services interface, you can optionally use service filters to refine the target of the set of services and also to process traffic. Service filters enable you to manipulate traffic by performing packet filtering to a defined set of services on an adaptive services interface before the traffic is delivered to its destination. You can apply a service filter to traffic before packets are accepted for input or output service processing or after packets return from input service processing. Like standard firewall filters, service filters support counting of matched packets. When you display counters for a service filter, however, the syntax for specifying the filter name includes the name of the service set to which the service filter is applied. To enable counting of the packets matched by a service filter term, specify the count counter-name nonterminating action in that term. To display counters for service filters, use the show firewall filter filter-name <counter counter-name> operational mode command, and specify the filter-name as follows: service-service-set-name:service-filter-name For example, suppose you configure a service filter named out_filter with a counter named out_counter and apply that service filter to a logical interface to direct certain packets for processing by the output services associated with the service set nat_set. In this scenario, the syntax for using the show firewall operational mode command to display the counter is as follows: [edit] user@host> show firewall filter service-nat_set:out_filter counter out_counter Related Documentation Stateless Firewall Filter Types on page 8 How Service Filters Evaluate Packets on page 280 Guidelines for Configuring Service Filters on page 282 Guidelines for Applying Service Filters on page 285 Example: Configuring and Applying Service Filters on page 288 Adaptive Services Overview Configuring Service Sets to be Applied to Services Interfaces Configuring Service Rules How Service Filters Evaluate Packets This topic covers the following information: Service Filters That Contain a Single Term on page 281 Service Filters That Contain Multiple Terms on page

301 Chapter 9: Configuring Service Filters Service Filter Terms That Do Not Contain Any Match Conditions on page 281 Service Filter Terms That Do Not Contain Any Actions on page 281 Service Filter Default Action on page 281 Service Filters That Contain a Single Term For a service filter that consists of a single term, the policy framework software evaluates a packet as follows: If the packet matches all the conditions, the actions are taken. If the packet matches all the conditions and no actions are specified, the packet is accepted. If the packet does not match all the conditions, it is discarded. Service Filters That Contain Multiple Terms For a service filter that consists of multiple terms, the policy framework software evaluates a packet against the terms in the filter sequentially, beginning with the first term in the filter, until either the packet matches all the conditions in one of the terms or there are no more terms in the filter. If the packet matches all the conditions in a term, the actions in that term are performed and evaluation of the packet ends at that term. Any subsequent terms in the filter are not used. If the packet does not match all the conditions in the term, evaluation of the packet proceeds to the next term in the filter. Service Filter Terms That Do Not Contain Any Match Conditions For service filters with a single term and for filters with multiple terms, if a term does not contain any match conditions, the actions are taken on any packet evaluated. Service Filter Terms That Do Not Contain Any Actions Service Filter Default Action If a term does not contain any actions, and if the packet matches the conditions in the term, the packet is accepted. Each service filter has an implicit skip action at the end of the filter, which is equivalent to including the following example term explicit_skip as the final term in the service filter: term explicit_skip { then skip; By default, if a packet matches none of the terms in a service filter, the packet bypasses service processing. Related Documentation Service Filter Overview on page

302 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Guidelines for Configuring Service Filters on page 282 Guidelines for Applying Service Filters on page 285 Example: Configuring and Applying Service Filters on page 288 Guidelines for Configuring Service Filters This topic covers the following information: Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Service Filters on page 282 Service Filter Protocol Families on page 282 Service Filter Names on page 282 Service Filter Terms on page 283 Service Filter Match Conditions on page 283 Service Filter Terminating Actions on page 283 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Service Filters Service Filter Protocol Families Service Filter Names To configure a service filter, include the service-filter service-filter-name statement at the [edit firewall family (inet inet6)] hierarchy level: [edit] firewall { family (inet inet6) { service-filter service-filter-name { term term-name { from { match-conditions; then { actions; Individual statements supported under the service-filter service-filter-name statement are described separately in this topic and are illustrated in the example of configuring and applying a service filter. You can configure service filters to filter IPv4 traffic (family inet) and IPv6 traffic (family inet6) only. No other protocol families are supported for service filters. Under the family inet or family inet6 statement, you can include service-filter service-filter-name statements to create and name service filters. The filter name can 282

303 Chapter 9: Configuring Service Filters contain letters, numbers, and hyphens (-) and be up to 64 characters long. To include spaces in the name, enclose the entire name in quotation marks ( ). Service Filter Terms Under the service-filter service-filter-name statement, you can include term term-name statements to create and name filter terms. You must configure at least one term in a firewall filter. You must specify a unique name for each term within a firewall filter. The term name can contain letters, numbers, and hyphens (-) and can be up to 64 characters long. To include spaces in the name, enclose the entire name in quotation marks ( ). The order in which you specify terms within a firewall filter configuration is important. Firewall filter terms are evaluated in the order in which they are configured. By default, new terms are always added to the end of the existing filter. You can use the insert configuration mode command to reorder the terms of a firewall filter. Service Filter Match Conditions Service filter terms support only a subset of the IPv4 and IPv6 match conditions that are supported for standard stateless firewall filters. If you specify an IPv6 address in a match condition (the address, destination-address, or source-address match conditions), use the syntax for text representations described in RFC 4291, IP Version 6 Addressing Architecture. For more information about IPv6 addresses, see IPv6 Overview and Supported IPv6 Standards. Service Filter Terminating Actions When configuring a service filter term, you must specify one of the following filter-terminating actions: service skip NOTE: These actions are unique to service filters. Service filter terms support only a subset of the IPv4 and IPv6 nonterminating actions that are supported for standard stateless firewall filters: count counter-name log port-mirror sample Service filters do not support the next action. 283

304 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches BEST PRACTICE: Explicit Control of Skip Action If you are using an interface style service set for NAT and have defined service filters, carefully verify what is skipped in the input service-filter and reverse the match condition exactly to skip the return packets on the output service filter., The rest should be serviced in output service filter. For Junos OS Release 10.4R2 and above, If you have not properly reversed the match condition, the services PIC will forward returning packets and a SYSLOG message will be generated as long as an IDS policy is configured. This behavior differs significantly from Junos OS releases prior to 10.4R2 which dropped packets because the services PIC did not see a complete TCP 3-way handshake, The following is an example of correctly configured explicit control of skip action: <<-- Input Service Filter service-filter nat-exclude-input { term natip { from { source-address { /32; /32; /32; /32; then skip; term rfc1918 { from { destination-address { /8; /12; /16; then skip; term public { from { destination-prefix-list { public-nat-include except; public-nat-exclude; then skip; term default { then service; <<-- Output Service Filter - inverted filter to be applied in output direction service-filter nat-exclude-output { term natip { from { destination-address { /32; 284

305 Chapter 9: Configuring Service Filters /32; /32; /32; then skip; term rfc1918 { from { source-address { /8; /12; /16; then skip; term public { from { source-prefix-list { public-nat-include except; public-nat-exclude; then skip; term default { then service; Related Documentation Service Filter Overview on page 279 How Service Filters Evaluate Packets on page 280 Guidelines for Applying Service Filters on page 285 Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 293 Service Filter Terminating Actions on page 302 Service Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 302 Example: Configuring and Applying Service Filters on page 288 Guidelines for Applying Service Filters This topic covers the following information: Restrictions for Adaptive Services Interfaces on page 286 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Service Filters on page 286 Associating Service Rules with Adaptive Services Interfaces on page 287 Filtering Traffic Before Accepting Packets for Service Processing on page 287 Postservice Filtering of Returning Service Traffic on page

306 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Restrictions for Adaptive Services Interfaces The following restrictions apply to adaptive services interfaces and service filters. Adaptive Services Interfaces You can apply a service filter to IPv4 or IPv6 traffic associated with a service set at an adaptive services interface only. Adaptive services interfaces are supported for the following hardware only: Adaptive Services (AS) PICs on M Series and T Series routers Multiservices (MS) PICs on M Series and T Series routers Multiservices (MS) DPCs on MX Series routers (and EX Series switches) System Logging to a Remote Host from M Series Routers Logging of adaptive services interfaces messages to an external server by means of the fxp0 or em0 port is not supported on M Series routers. The architecture does not support system logging traffic out of a management interface. Instead, access to an external server is supported on a Packet Forwarding Engine interface. Statement Hierarchy for Applying Service Filters You can enable packet filtering of IPv4 or IPv6 traffic before a packet is accepted for input or output service processing. To do this, apply a service filter to the adaptive services interface input or output in conjunction with an interface service set. You can also enable packet filtering of IPv4 or IPv6 traffic that is returning to the Packet Forwarding Engine after input service processing completes. To do this, apply a post-service filter to the adaptive services interface input. The following configuration shows the hierarchy levels at which you can apply the service filters to adaptive services interfaces: [edit] interfaces { interface-name { unit unit-number { family (inet inet6) { service { input { service-set service-set-name service-filter service-filter-name; post-service-filter service-filter-name; output { service-set service-set-name service-filter service-filter-name; 286

307 Chapter 9: Configuring Service Filters Associating Service Rules with Adaptive Services Interfaces To define and group the service rules be applied to an adaptive services interface, you define an interface service set by including the service-set service-set-name statement at the [edit services] hierarchy level. To apply an interface service set to the input and output of an adaptive services interface, you include the service-set service-set-name at the following hierarchy levels: [edit interfaces interface-name unit unit-number input] [edit interfaces interface-name unit unit-number output] If you apply a service set to one direction of an adaptive services interface but do not apply a service set to the other direction, an error occurs when you commit the configuration. The adaptive services PIC performs different actions depending on whether the packet is sent to the PIC for input service or for output service. For example, you can configure a single service set to perform Network Address Translation (NAT) in one direction and destination NAT (dnat) in the other direction. Filtering Traffic Before Accepting Packets for Service Processing To filter IPv4 or IPv6 traffic before accepting packets for input or output service processing, include the service-set service-set-name service-filter service-filter-name at one of the following interfaces: [edit interfaces interface-name unit unit-number family (inet inet6) service input] [edit interfaces interface-name unit unit-number family (inet inet6) service output] For the service-set-name, specify a service set configured at the [edit services service-set] hierarchy level. The service set retains the input interface information even after services are applied, so that functions such as filter-class forwarding and destination class usage (DCU) that depend on input interface information continue to work. The following requirements apply to filtering inbound or outbound traffic before accepting packets for service processing: You configure the same service set on the input and output sides of the interface. If you include the service-set statement without an optional service-filter definition, the Junos OS assumes the match condition is true and selects the service set for processing automatically. The service filter is applied only if a service set is configured and selected. 287

308 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches You can include more than one service set definition on each side of an interface. The following guidelines apply: If you include multiple service sets, the router (or switch) software evaluates them in the order in which they appear in the configuration. The system executes the first service set for which it finds a match in the service filter and ignores the subsequent definitions. A maximum of six service sets can be applied to an interface. When you apply multiple service sets to an interface, you must also configure and apply a service filter to the interface. Postservice Filtering of Returning Service Traffic As an option to filtering of IPv4 or IPv6 input service traffic, you can apply a service filter to IPv4 or IPv6 traffic that is returning to the services interface after the service set is executed. To apply a service filter in this manner, include the post-service-filter service-filter-name statement at the [edit interfaces interface-name unit unit-number family (inet inet6) service input] hierarchy level. Related Documentation Service Filter Overview on page 279 How Service Filters Evaluate Packets on page 280 Guidelines for Configuring Service Filters on page 282 Example: Configuring and Applying Service Filters on page 288 Adaptive Services Overview Configuring Service Sets to be Applied to Services Interfaces Configuring Service Rules Example: Configuring and Applying Service Filters This example shows how to configure and apply service filters. Requirements on page 288 Overview on page 289 Configuration on page 289 Verification on page 292 Requirements This example use the logical interface xe-0/1/0.0 on any of the following hardware components: Adaptive Services (AS) PIC on an M Series or T Series router Multiservices (MS) PIC on an M Series or T Series router 288

309 Chapter 9: Configuring Service Filters Multiservices (MS) DPC on an MX Series router EX Series switch Before you begin, make sure that you have: Installed your supported router (or switch) and PICs or DPCs and performed the initial router (or switch) configuration. Configured basic Ethernet in the topology, and verified that traffic is flowing in the topology and that IPv4 traffic is flowing through logical interface xe-0/1/0.0. Configured the service set vrf_svcs with service input and output rules and default settings for services at a service interface. For guidelines for configuring service sets, see Configuring Service Sets to be Applied to Services Interfaces. Overview In this example, you create three types of service filters for IPv4 traffic: one input service filter, one postservice input filter, and one output service filter. Topology You apply the input service filter and postservice input filter to input traffic at logical interface xe-0/1/0.0, and you apply the output service filter to the output traffic at the same logical interface. Filtering IPv4 traffic before it is accepted for input service processing At logical interface xe-0/1/0.0, you use the service filter in_filter_presvc to filter IPv4 input traffic before the traffic can be accepted for processing by services associated with service set vrf_svcs. The in_filter_presvc service filter counts packets sent from ICMP port 179, directs these packets to the input services associated with the service set vrf_svcs, and discards all other packets. Filtering IPv4 traffic after it has completed input service processing At logical interface xe-0/1/0.0, you use the service filter in_filter_postsvc to filter traffic that is returning to the services interface after the input service set in_filter_presvc is executed. The in_filter_postsvc service filter counts packets sent from ICMP port 179 and then discards them. Filtering IPv4 traffic before it is accepted for output service processing At logical interface xe-0/1/0.0, you use the service-filter out_filter_presvc to filter IPv4 output traffic before the traffic can be accepted for processing by the services associated with service set vrf_svcs. The out_filter_presvc service filter counts packets destined for TCP port 179 and then directs the packets to the output services associated with the service set vrf_svcs. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page

310 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configuring the Three Service Filters on page 290 Applying the Three Service Filters on page 292 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet service-filter in_filter_presvc term t1 from protocol tcp set firewall family inet service-filter in_filter_presvc term t1 from source-port bgp set firewall family inet service-filter in_filter_presvc term t1 then count svc_in_pkts set firewall family inet service-filter in_filter_presvc term t1 then service set firewall family inet service-filter in_filter_postsvc term t2 from protocol tcp set firewall family inet service-filter in_filter_postsvc term t2 from source-port bgp set firewall family inet service-filter in_filter_postsvc term t2 then count svc_in_pkts_rtn set firewall family inet service-filter in_filter_postsvc term t2 then skip set firewall family inet service-filter out_filter_presvc term t3 from protocol icmp set firewall family inet service-filter out_filter_presvc term t3 from destination-port bgp set firewall family inet service-filter out_filter_presvc term t3 then count svc_out_pkts set firewall family inet service-filter out_filter_presvc term t3 then service set interfaces xe-0/1/0 unit 0 family inet service input service-set vrf_svcs service-filter in_filter_presvc set interfaces xe-0/1/0 unit 0 family inet service input post-service-filter in_filter_postsvc set interfaces xe-0/1/0 unit 0 family inet service output service-set vrf_svcs service-filter out_filter_presvc Configuring the Three Service Filters Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the three service filters: 1. Configure the input service filter. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet service-filter in_filter_presvc [edit firewall family inet service-filter in_filter_presvc] user@host# set term t1 from protocol tcp user@host# set term t1 from source-port bgp user@host# set term t1 then count svc_in_pkts user@host# set term t1 then service 2. Configure the postservice input filter. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet service-filter in_filter_postsvc [edit firewall family inet service-filter in_filter_postsvc] user@host# set term t2 from protocol tcp user@host# set term t2 from source-port bgp user@host# set term t2 then count svc_in_pkts_rtn user@host# set term t2 then skip 3. Configure the output service filter. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet service-filter out_filter_presvc 290

311 Chapter 9: Configuring Service Filters [edit firewall family inet service-filter out_filter_presvc] set term t3 from protocol icmp set term t3 from destination-port bgp set term t3 then count svc_out_pkts set term t3 then service Results Confirm the configuration of the input and output service filters and the postservice input filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this procedure to correct the configuration. [edit] show firewall family inet { service-filter in_filter_presvc { term t1 { from { protocol tcp; source-port bgp; then { count svc_in_pkts; service; service-filter in_filter_postsvc { term t2 { from { protocol tcp; source-port bgp; then { count svc_in_pkts_rtn; skip; service-filter out_filter_presvc { term t3 { from { protocol icmp; destination-port bgp; then { count svc_out_pkts; service; 291

312 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Applying the Three Service Filters Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the three service filters: 1. Access the IPv4 protocol on the input interface xe-0/1/0.0. [edit] edit interfaces xe-0/1/0 unit 0 family inet 2. Apply the input service filter and the postservice input filter. [edit interfaces xe-0/1/0 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set service input service-set vrf_svcs service-filter in_filter_presvc user@host# set service input post-service-filter in_filter_postsvc user@host# set service output service-set vrf_svcs service-filter out_filter_presvc Results Confirm the configuration of the interfaces by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces xe-0/1/0 { unit 0 { family inet { service { input { service-set vrf_svcs service-filter in_filter_presvc; post-service-filter in_filter_postsvc; output { service-set vrf_svcs service-filter out_filter_presvc; When you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. Verifying That Inbound Traffic Is Filtered Before Input Service on page 292 Verifying That Inbound Traffic Is Filtered After Input Service Processing on page 293 Verifying That Outbound Traffic Is Filtered Before Output Service Processing on page 293 Verifying That Inbound Traffic Is Filtered Before Input Service Purpose Verify that inbound packets sent from TCP port 179 are sent for processing by the input services associated with the service set vrf_svcs. 292

313 Chapter 9: Configuring Service Filters Action Display the count of packets sent for processing by the input services associated with the service set vrf_svcs. [edit] show firewall filter in_filter_presvc-vrf_svcs counter svc_in_pkts Verifying That Inbound Traffic Is Filtered After Input Service Processing Purpose Verify that inbound packets sent from TCP port 179 are returned from processing by the input services associated with the service set vrf_svcs. Action Display the count of packets returned from processing by the input services associated with the service set vrf_svcs. [edit] show firewall filter in_filter_postsvc-vrf_svcs counter svc_in_pkts_rtn Verifying That Outbound Traffic Is Filtered Before Output Service Processing Purpose Verify that outbound packets sent to ICMP port 179 are sent for processing by the output services associated with the service set vrf_svcs. Action Display the count of packets sent for processing by the output services associated with the service set vrf_svcs. [edit] show firewall filter out_filter_presvc-vrf_svcs counter svc_out_pkts Related Documentation Service Filter Overview on page 279 How Service Filters Evaluate Packets on page 280 Guidelines for Configuring Service Filters on page 282 Guidelines for Applying Service Filters on page 285 Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic Service filters support only a subset of the stateless firewall filter match conditions for IPv4 and IPv6 traffic. Table 29 on page 293 describes the service filter match conditions. Table 29: Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic Match Condition Description Protocol Families address address Match the IP source or destination address field. family inet family inet6 address address except Do not match the IP source or destination address field. family inet family inet6 293

314 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 29: Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description Protocol Families ah-spi spi-value (M Series routers, except M120 and M320) Match on the IPsec authentication header (AH) security parameter index (SPI) value. family inet ah-spi-except spi-value (M Series routers, except M120 and M320) Do not match on the IPsec AH SPI value. family inet destination-address address Match the IP destination address field. You cannot specify both the address and destination-address match conditions in the same term. family inet family inet6 destination-address address except Do not match the IP destination address field. You cannot specify both the address and destination-address match conditions in the same term. family inet family inet6 294

315 Chapter 9: Configuring Service Filters Table 29: Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description Protocol Families destination-port number Match the UDP or TCP destination port field. You cannot specify both the port and destination-port match conditions in the same term. If you configure this match condition for IPv4 traffic, we recommend that you also configure the protocol udp or protocol tcp match statement in the same term to specify which protocol is being used on the port. family inet family inet6 If you configure this match condition for IPv6 traffic, we recommend that you also configure the next-header udp or next-header tcp match condition in the same term to specify which protocol is being used on the port. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the port numbers are also listed): afs (1483), bgp (179), biff (512), bootpc (68), bootps (67), cmd (514), cvspserver (2401), dhcp (67), domain (53), eklogin (2105), ekshell (2106), exec (512), finger (79), ftp (21), ftp-data (20), http (80), https (443), ident (113), imap (143), kerberos-sec (88), klogin (543), kpasswd (761), krb-prop (754), krbupdate (760), kshell (544), ldap (389), ldp (646), login (513), mobileip-agent (434), mobilip-mn (435), msdp (639), netbios-dgm (138), netbios-ns (137), netbios-ssn (139), nfsd (2049), nntp (119), ntalk (518), ntp (123), pop3 (110), pptp (1723), printer (515), radacct (1813), radius (1812), rip (520), rkinit (2108), smtp (25), snmp (161), snmptrap (162), snpp (444), socks (1080), ssh (22), sunrpc (111), syslog (514), tacacs (49), tacacs-ds (65), talk (517), telnet (23), tftp (69), timed (525), who (513), or xdmcp (177). destination-port-except number Do not match the UDP or TCP destination port field. For details, see the destination-port match description. family inet family inet6 destination-prefix-list name Match the list of destination prefixes. The prefix list is defined at the [edit policy-options prefix-list prefix-list-name] hierarchy level. family inet family inet6 295

316 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 29: Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description Protocol Families esp-spi value Match the IPsec encapsulating security payload (ESP) SPI value. Specify a single value or a range of values. You can specify a value in hexadecimal, binary, or decimal form. To specify the value in hexadecimal form, include 0x as a prefix. To specify the value in binary form, include b as a prefix. family inet family inet6 esp-spi-except value Do not match the IPsec ESP SPI value or range of values. For details, see the esp-spi match condition. family inet family inet6 first-fragment Match if the packet is the first fragment of a fragmented packet. Do not match if the packet is a trailing fragment of a fragmented packet. The first fragment of a fragmented packet has a fragment offset value of 0. This match condition is an alias for the bit-field match condition fragment-offset 0 match condition. family inet To match both first and trailing fragments, you can use two terms that specify different match conditions: first-fragment and is-fragment. fragment-flags number (Ingress only) Match the three-bit IP fragmentation flags field in the IP header. In place of the numeric field value, you can specify one of the following keywords (the field values are also listed): dont-fragment (0x4), more-fragments (0x2), or reserved (0x8). family inet fragment-offset number Match the 13-bit fragment offset field in the IP header. The value is the offset, in 8-byte units, in the overall datagram message to the data fragment. Specify a numeric value, a range of values, or a set of values. An offset value of 0 indicates the first fragment of a fragmented packet. The first-fragment match condition is an alias for the fragment-offset 0 match condition. family inet To match both first and trailing fragments, you can use two terms that specify different match conditions (first-fragment and is-fragment). fragment-offset-except number Do not match the 13-bit fragment offset field. family inet 296

317 Chapter 9: Configuring Service Filters Table 29: Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description Protocol Families interface-group group-number Match the interface group (set of one or more logical interfaces) on which the packet was received. For group-number, specify a value from 0 through 255. For information about configuring interface groups, see Filtering Packets Received on a Set of Interface Groups Overview on page 262. family inet family inet6 interface-group-except group-number Do not match the interface group on which the packet was received. for details, see the interface-group match condition. family inet family inet6 297

318 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 29: Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description Protocol Families ip-options values Match the 8-bit IP option field, if present, to the specified value or list of values. family inet family inet In place of a numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the option values are also listed): loose-source-route (131), record-route (7), router-alert (148), security (130), stream-id (136), strict-source-route (137), or timestamp (68). To match any value for the IP option, use the text synonym any. To match on multiple values, specify the list of values within square brackets ('[ and '] ). To match a range of values, use the value specification [ value1-value2 ]. For example, the match condition ip-options [ ] matches on an IP options field that contains the loose-source-route, record-route, or security values, or any other value from 0 through 147. However, this match condition does not match on an IP options field that contains only the router-alert value (148). For most interfaces, a filter term that specifies an ip-option match on one or more specific IP option values (a value other than any) causes packets to be sent to the Routing Engine so that the kernel can parse the IP option field in the packet header. For a firewall filter term that specifies an ip-option match on one or more specific IP option values, you cannot specify the count, log, or syslog nonterminating actions unless you also specify the discard terminating action in the same term. This behavior prevents double-counting of packets for a filter applied to a transit interface on the router (or switch). Packets processed on the kernel might be dropped in case of a system bottleneck. To ensure that matched packets are instead sent to the Packet Forwarding Engine (where packet processing is implemented in hardware), use the ip-options any match condition. The 10-Gigabit Ethernet Modular Port Concentrator (MPC), 60-Gigabit Ethernet MPC, 60-Gigabit Queuing Ethernet MPC, 60-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing MPC on MX Series routers and EX Series switches are capable of parsing the IP option field of the IPv4 packet header. This capability is supported on EX Series switches also. For interfaces configured on those MPCs, all packets that are matched using the ip-options match condition are sent to the Packet Forwarding Engine for processing. 298

319 Chapter 9: Configuring Service Filters Table 29: Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description Protocol Families ip-options-except values Do not match the IP option field to the specified value or list of values. For details about specifying the values, see the ip-options match condition. family inet is-fragment Match if the packet is a trailing fragment of a fragmented packet. Do not match the first fragment of a fragmented packet. This match condition is an alias for the bit-field match condition fragment-offset 0 except bits. family inet NOTE: To match both first and trailing fragments, you can use two terms that specify different match conditions (first-fragment and is-fragment). port number Match the UDP or TCP source or destination port field. If you configure this match condition, you cannot configure the destination-port match condition or the source-port match condition in the same term. family inet family inet6 If you configure this match condition for IPv4 traffic, we recommend that you also configure the protocol udp or protoco tcp match statement in the same term to specify which protocol is being used on the port. If you configure this match condition for IPv6 traffic, we recommend that you also configure the next-header udp or next-header tcp match condition in the same term to specify which protocol is being used on the port. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the text synonyms listed under destination-port. port-except number Do not match the UDP or TCP source or destination port field. For details, see the port match condition. family inet family inet6 prefix-list prefix-list-name Match the prefixes of the source or destination address fields to the prefixes in the specified list. The prefix list is defined at the [edit policy-options prefix-list prefix-list-name] hierarchy level. family inet family inet6 299

320 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Table 29: Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description Protocol Families protocol number Match the IP protocol type field. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text synonyms (the field values are also listed): ah (51), dstopts (60), egp (8), esp (50), fragment (44), gre (47), hop-by-hop (0), icmp (1), icmp6 (58), icmpv6 (58), igmp (2), ipip (4), ipv6 (41), ospf (89), pim (103), rsvp (46), sctp (132), tcp (6), udp (17), or vrrp (112). family inet protocol-except number Do not match the IP protocol type field. For details, see the protocol match condition. family inet source-address address Match the IP source address. You cannot specify both the address and source-address match conditions in the same term. family inet family inet6 source-address address except Do not match the IP source address. You cannot specify both the address and source-address match conditions in the same term. family inet family inet6 source-port number Match the UDP or TCP source port field. You cannot specify the port and source-port match conditions in the same term. If you configure this match condition for IPv4 traffic, we recommend that you also configure the protocol udp or protocol tcp match statement in the same term to specify which protocol is being used on the port. family inet family inet6 If you configure this match condition for IPv6 traffic, we recommend that you also configure the next-header udp or next-header tcp match condition in the same term to specify which protocol is being used on the port. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the text synonyms listed with the destination-port number match condition. source-port-except number Do not match the UDP or TCP source port field. For details, see the source-port match condition. family inet family inet6 source-prefix-list name Match source prefixes in the specified list. Specify the name of a prefix list defined at the [edit policy-options prefix-list prefix-list-name] hierarchy level. family inet family inet6 300

321 Chapter 9: Configuring Service Filters Table 29: Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic (continued) Match Condition Description Protocol Families tcp-flags value Match one or more of the low-order 6 bits in the 8-bit TCP flags field in the TCP header. To specify individual bit fields, you can specify the following text synonyms or hexadecimal values: family inet family inet6 fin (0x01) syn (0x02) rst (0x04) push (0x08) ack (0x10) urgent (0x20) In a TCP session, the SYN flag is set only in the initial packet sent, while the ACK flag is set in all packets sent after the initial packet. You can string together multiple flags using the bit-field logical operators. For combined bit-field match conditions, see the tcp-established and tcp-initial match conditions. If you configure this match condition for IPv4 traffic, we recommend that you also configure the protocol tcp match statement in the same term to specify that the TCP protocol is being used on the port. If you configure this match condition for IPv6 traffic, we recommend that you also configure the next-header tcp match condition in the same term to specify that the TCP protocol is being used on the port. NOTE: If you specify an IPv6 address in a match condition (the address, destination-address, or source-address match conditions), use the syntax for text representations described in RFC 4291, IP Version 6 Addressing Architecture. For more information about IPv6 addresses, see IPv6 Overviewand Supported IPv6 Standards. Related Documentation Service Filter Overview on page 279 Guidelines for Configuring Service Filters on page 282 Example: Configuring and Applying Service Filters on page 288 Service Filter Terminating Actions on page 302 Service Filter Nonterminating Actions on page

322 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Service Filter Terminating Actions Service filters support different sets of terminating actions than standard stateless firewall filters or simple filters. NOTE: Service filters do not support the next term action. Table 30 on page 302 describes the terminating actions you can configure in a service filter term. Table 30: Terminating Actions for Service Filters Terminating Action Description Protocol Families service Direct the packet to service processing. inet inet6 skip Let the packet bypass service processing. inet inet6 Related Documentation Service Filter Overview on page 279 Guidelines for Configuring Service Filters on page 282 Example: Configuring and Applying Service Filters on page 288 Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 293 Service Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 302 Service Filter Nonterminating Actions Service filters support different sets of terminating actions for each protocol family. NOTE: Service filters do not support the next term action. Table 31 on page 302 describes the nonterminating actions you can configure in a service filter term. Table 31: Nonterminating Actions for Service Filters Nonterminating Action Description Protocol Families count counter-name Count the packet in the named counter. inet inet6 302

323 Chapter 9: Configuring Service Filters Table 31: Nonterminating Actions for Service Filters (continued) Nonterminating Action Description Protocol Families log Log the packet header information in a buffer within the Packet Forwarding Engine. You can access this information by issuing the show firewall log command at the command-line interface (CLI). inet inet6 port-mirror Port-mirror the packet based on the specified family. Supported on M120 routers, M320 routers configured with Enhanced III FPCs, MX Series routers, and EX Series switches only. inet inet6 sample Sample the packet. inet inet6 Related Documentation Service Filter Overview on page 279 Guidelines for Configuring Service Filters on page 282 Example: Configuring and Applying Service Filters on page 288 Service Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 293 Service Filter Terminating Actions on page

324 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches 304

325 CHAPTER 10 Configuring Simple Filters Simple Filter Overview Simple Filter Overview on page 305 How Simple Filters Evaluate Packets on page 305 Guidelines for Configuring Simple Filters on page 307 Guidelines for Applying Simple Filters on page 310 Example: Configuring and Applying a Simple Filter on page 311 Simple filters are supported on Gigabit Ethernet intelligent queuing 2 (IQ2) and Enhanced Queuing Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) interfaces only. Simple filters are recommended for metropolitan Ethernet applications. Related Documentation How Simple Filters Evaluate Packets on page 305 Guidelines for Configuring Simple Filters on page 307 Guidelines for Applying Simple Filters on page 310 Example: Configuring and Applying a Simple Filter on page 311 How Simple Filters Evaluate Packets This topic covers the following information: Simple Filters That Contain a Single Term on page 305 Simple Filters That Contain Multiple Terms on page 306 Simple Filter Terms That Do Not Contain Any Match Conditions on page 306 Simple Filter Terms That Do Not Contain Any Actions on page 306 Simple Filter Default Action on page 306 Simple Filters That Contain a Single Term For a simple filter that consists of a single term, the policy framework software evaluates a packet as follows: If the packet matches all the conditions, the actions are taken. 305

326 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches If the packet matches all the conditions and no actions are specified, the packet is accepted. If the packet does not match all the conditions, it is discarded. Simple Filters That Contain Multiple Terms For a simple filter that consists of multiple terms, the policy framework software evaluates a packet against the terms in the filter sequentially, beginning with the first term in the filter, until either the packet matches all the conditions in one of the terms or there are no more terms in the filter. If the packet matches all the conditions in a term, the actions in that term are performed and evaluation of the packet ends at that term. Any subsequent terms in the filter are not used. If the packet does not match all the conditions in the term, evaluation of the packet proceeds to the next term in the filter. Simple Filter Terms That Do Not Contain Any Match Conditions For simple filters with a single term and for filters with multiple terms, if a term does not contain any match conditions, the actions are taken on any packet evaluated. Simple Filter Terms That Do Not Contain Any Actions Simple Filter Default Action If a simple filter term does not contain any actions, and if the packet matches the conditions in the term, the packet is accepted. Each simple filter has an implicit discard action at the end of the filter, which is equivalent to including the following example term explicit_discard as the final term in the simple filter: term explicit_discard { then discard; By default, if a packet matches none of the terms in a simple filter, the packet is discarded. Related Documentation Simple Filter Overview on page 305 Guidelines for Configuring Simple Filters on page 307 Guidelines for Applying Simple Filters on page 310 Example: Configuring and Applying a Simple Filter on page

327 Chapter 10: Configuring Simple Filters Guidelines for Configuring Simple Filters This topic covers the following information: Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Simple Filters on page 307 Simple Filter Protocol Families on page 307 Simple Filter Names on page 307 Simple Filter Terms on page 308 Simple Filter Match Conditions on page 308 Simple Filter Terminating Actions on page 309 Simple Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 309 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Simple Filters Simple Filter Protocol Families Simple Filter Names To configure a simple filter, include the simple-filter simple-filter-name statement at the [edit firewall family inet] hierarchy level. [edit] firewall { family inet { simple-filter simple-filter-name { term term-name { from { match-conditions; then { actions; Individual statements supported under the simple-filter simple-filter-name statement are described separately in this topic and are illustrated in the example of configuring and applying a simple filter. You can configure simple filters to filter IPv4 traffic (family inet) only. No other protocol family is supported for simple filters. Under the family inet statement, you can include simple-filter simple-filter-name statements to create and name simple filters. The filter name can contain letters, numbers, and hyphens (-) and be up to 64 characters long. To include spaces in the name, enclose the entire name in quotation marks ( ). 307

328 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Simple Filter Terms Under the simple-filter simple-filter-name statement, you can include term term-name statements to create and name filter terms. You must configure at least one term in a firewall filter. You must specify a unique name for each term within a firewall filter. The term name can contain letters, numbers, and hyphens (-) and can be up to 64 characters long. To include spaces in the name, enclose the entire name in quotation marks ( ). The order in which you specify terms within a firewall filter configuration is important. Firewall filter terms are evaluated in the order in which they are configured. By default, new terms are always added to the end of the existing filter. You can use the insert configuration mode command to reorder the terms of a firewall filter. Simple filters do not support the next term action. Simple Filter Match Conditions Simple filter terms support only a subset of the IPv4 match conditions that are supported for standard stateless firewall filters. Unlike standard stateless firewall filters, the following restrictions apply to simple filters: On MX Series routers with the Enhanced Queuing DPC and on EX Series switches, simple filters do not support the forwarding- class match condition. Simple filters support only one source-address and one destination-address prefix for each filter term. If you configure multiple prefixes, only the last one is used. Simple filters do not support multiple source addresses and destination addresses in a single term. If you configure multiple addresses, only the last one is used. Simple filters do not support negated match conditions, such as the protocol-except match condition or the exception keyword. Simple filters support a range of values for source-port and destination-port match conditions only. For example, you can configure source-port or destination-port Simple filters do not support noncontiguous mask values. Table 32: Simple Filter Match Conditions Table 32 on page 308 lists the simple filter match conditions. Match Condition Description destination-address destination-address Match IP destination address. 308

329 Chapter 10: Configuring Simple Filters Table 32: Simple Filter Match Conditions (continued) Match Condition Description destination-port number TCP or UDP destination port field. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the protocol match statement to determine which protocol is being used on the port. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text aliases (the port numbers are also listed): afs (1483), bgp (179), biff (512), bootpc (68), bootps (67), cmd (514), cvspserver (2401), dhcp (67), domain (53), eklogin (2105), ekshell (2106), exec (512), finger (79), ftp (21), ftp-data (20), http (80), https (443), ident (113), imap (143), kerberos-sec (88), klogin (543), kpasswd (761), krb-prop (754), krbupdate (760), kshell (544), ldap (389), login (513), mobileip-agent (434), mobilip-mn (435), msdp (639), netbios-dgm (138), netbios-ns (137), netbios-ssn (139), nfsd (2049), nntp (119), ntalk (518), ntp (123), pop3 (110), pptp (1723), printer (515), radacct (1813), radius (1812), rip (520), rkinit (2108), smtp (25), snmp (161), snmptrap (162), snpp (444), socks (1080), ssh (22), sunrpc (111), syslog (514), tacacs-ds (65), talk (517), telnet (23), tftp (69), timed (525), who (513), or xdmcp (177). forwarding-class class Match the forwarding class of the packet. Specify assured-forwarding, best-effort, expedited-forwarding, or network-control. For information about forwarding classes and router-internal output queues, see Forwarding Classes Overview. protocol number IP protocol field. In place of the numeric value, you can specify one of the following text aliases (the field values are also listed): ah (51), dstopts (60), egp (8), esp (50), fragment (44), gre (47), hop-by-hop (0), icmp (1), icmp6 (58), icmpv6 (58), igmp (2), ipip (4), ipv6 (41), ospf (89), pim (103), rsvp (46), sctp (132), tcp (6), udp (17), or vrrp (112). source-address ip-source-address Match the IP source address. source-port number Match the UDP or TCP source port field. If you configure this match condition, we recommend that you also configure the protocol match statement to determine which protocol is being used on the port. In place of the numeric field, you can specify one of the text aliases listed for destination-port. Simple Filter Terminating Actions Simple filters do not support explicitly configurable terminating actions, such as accept, reject, and discard. Terms configured in a simple filter always accept packets. Simple filters do not support the next action. Simple Filter Nonterminating Actions Simple filters support only the following nonterminating actions: forwarding-class (forwarding-class assured-forwarding best-effort expedited-forwarding network-control) 309

330 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches NOTE: On the MX Series routers and EX Series switches with the Enhanced Queuing DPC, the forwarding class is not supported as a from match condition. loss-priority (high low medium-high medium-low) Simple filters do not support actions that perform other functions on a packet (such as incrementing a counter, logging information about the packet header, sampling the packet data, or sending information to a remote host using the system log functionality). Related Documentation Simple Filter Overview on page 305 How Simple Filters Evaluate Packets on page 305 Guidelines for Applying Simple Filters on page 310 Example: Configuring and Applying a Simple Filter on page 311 Guidelines for Applying Simple Filters This topic covers the following information: Statement Hierarchy for Applying Simple Filters on page 310 Restrictions for Applying Simple Filters on page 310 Statement Hierarchy for Applying Simple Filters You can apply a simple filter to the IPv4 ingress traffic at a logical interface by including the simple-filter input simple-filter-name statement at the [edit interfaces interface-name unit unit-number family inet] hierarchy level. [edit] interfaces { interface-name { unit logical-unit-number { family inet { simple-filter { input filter-name; Restrictions for Applying Simple Filters You can apply a simple filter to the ingress IPv4 traffic at a logical interface configured on the following hardware only: Gigabit Ethernet intelligent queuing (IQ2) PICs installed on M120, M320, or T Series routers. 310

331 Chapter 10: Configuring Simple Filters Enhanced Queuing Dense Port Concentrators (EQ DPCs) installed on MX Series routers and EX Series switches. The following additional restrictions pertain to applying simple filters: Simple filters are not supported on Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) interfaces, including Enhanced Queuing MPC interfaces. Simple filters are not supported for interfaces in an aggregated-ethernet bundle. You can apply simple filters to family inet traffic only. No other protocol family is supported. You can apply simple filters to ingress traffic only. Egress traffic is not supported. You can apply only a single simple filter to a supported logical interface. Input lists are not supported. Related Documentation Simple Filter Overview on page 305 How Simple Filters Evaluate Packets on page 305 Guidelines for Configuring Simple Filters on page 307 Example: Configuring and Applying a Simple Filter on page 311 Example: Configuring and Applying a Simple Filter This example shows how to configure a simple filter. Requirements on page 311 Overview on page 312 Configuration on page 312 Verification on page 314 Requirements This example uses one of the following hardware components: One Gigabit Ethernet intelligent queuing (IQ2) PIC installed on an M120, M320, or T Series router One Enhanced Queuing Dense Port Concentrator (EQ DPC) installed on an MX Series router or an EX Series switch Before you begin, make sure that you have: Installed your supported router (or switch) and PIC or DPC and performed the initial router (or switch) configuration. Configured basic Ethernet in the topology, and verified that traffic is flowing in the topology and that ingress IPv4 traffic is flowing into logical interface ge-0/0/

332 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Overview This simple filter sets the loss priority to low for TCP traffic with source address , sets the loss priority to high for HTTP (Web) traffic with source addresses in the /8 range, and sets the loss priority to low for all traffic with destination address Topology The simple filter is applied as an input filter (arriving packets are checking for destination address , not queued output packets) on interface ge-0/0/1.0. Configuration The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5. To configure this example, perform the following tasks: Configuring the Simple Firewall Filter on page 312 Applying the Simple Filter to the Logical Interface Input on page 314 CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands into a text file, remove any line breaks, and then paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set firewall family inet simple-filter sf_classify_1 term 1 from source-address /32 set firewall family inet simple-filter sf_classify_1 term 1 from protocol tcp set firewall family inet simple-filter sf_classify_1 term 1 then loss-priority low set firewall family inet simple-filter sf_classify_1 term 2 from source-address /8 set firewall family inet simple-filter sf_classify_1 term 2 from protocol tcp set firewall family inet simple-filter sf_classify_1 term 2 from source-port http set firewall family inet simple-filter sf_classify_1 term 2 then loss-priority high set firewall family inet simple-filter sf_classify_1 term 3 from destination-address /32 set firewall family inet simple-filter sf_classify_1 term 3 then loss-priority low set firewall family inet simple-filter sf_classify_1 term 3 then forwarding-class best-effort set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet simple-filter input sf_classify_1 set interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 Configuring the Simple Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure To configure the simple filter: 1. Create the simple filter sf_classify_1. [edit] user@host# edit firewall family inet simple-filter sf_classify_1 2. Configure classification of TCP traffic based on the source IP address. [edit firewall family inet simple-filter sf_classify_1] user@host# set term 1 from source-address /32 user@host# set term 1 from protocol tcp user@host# set term 1 then loss-priority low 312

333 Chapter 10: Configuring Simple Filters 3. Configure classification of HTTP traffic based on the source IP address. [edit firewall family inet simple-filter sf_classify_1] set term 2 from source-address /8 user@host# set term 2 from protocol tcp user@host# set term 2 from source-port http user@host# set term 2 then loss-priority high 4. Configure classification of other traffic based on the destination IP address. [edit firewall family inet simple-filter sf_classify_1] user@host# set term 3 from destination-address /32 user@host# set term 3 then loss-priority low user@host# set term 3 then forwarding-class best-effort Results Confirm the configuration of the simple filter by entering the show firewall configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show firewall family inet { simple-filter sf_classify_1 { term 1 { from { source-address { /32; protocol { tcp; then loss-priority low; term 2 { from { source-address { /8; source-port { http; protocol { tcp; then loss-priority high; term 3 { from { destination-address { /32; then { loss-priority low; 313

334 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches forwarding-class best-effort; Applying the Simple Filter to the Logical Interface Input Step-by-Step Procedure To apply the simple filter to the logical interface input: 1. Configure the logical interface to which you will apply the simple filter. [edit] edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet 2. Configure the interface address for the logical interface. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set address /30 3. Apply the simple filter to the logical interface input. [edit interfaces ge-0/0/1 unit 0 family inet] user@host# set simple-filter input sf_classify_1 Results Confirm the configuration of the interface by entering the show interfaces configuration mode command. If the command output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the instructions in this example to correct the configuration. [edit] user@host# show interfaces ge-0/0/1 { unit 0 { family inet { simple-filter { input sf_classify_1; address /30; When you are done configuring the device, commit your candidate configuration. Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. Displaying the Mapping of Forwarding Class Maps and Names to Queue Numbers on page 315 Displaying CoS Queue Counters for the Interface on page 315 Displaying CoS Queue Counter Details for the Physical Interface on page

335 Chapter 10: Configuring Simple Filters Displaying the Mapping of Forwarding Class Maps and Names to Queue Numbers Purpose Display the mapping of forwarding class names to queue numbers. Action Enter the show class-of-service forwarding-class operational mode command. [edit] show class-of-service forwarding-class For information about the command output, see show class-of-service forwarding-class in the CLI Explorer. Displaying CoS Queue Counters for the Interface Purpose Verify that the class-of-service (CoS) queue counters for the interface reflect the simple filter applied to the logical interface. Action Enter the show interfaces command for the physical interface on which the simple filter is applied, and specify detail or extensive output level. [edit] show interfaces ge-0/0/1 detail In the Physical interface section, under Ingress queues, the Queue counters section displays ingress queue counters for each forwarding class. For more detailed information about the command output, see show interfaces (Gigabit Ethernet) or show interfaces (10-Gigabit Ethernet) in the CLI Explorer. Displaying CoS Queue Counter Details for the Physical Interface Purpose Verify that the CoS queue counter details for the physical interface reflect the simple filter applied to the logical interface. Action Enter the show interfaces queue command for the physical interface on which the simple filter is applied, and specify the ingress option. [edit] show interfaces queue ge-0/0/1 ingress For information about the command output, see show interfaces queue in the CLI Explorer. Related Documentation Simple Filter Overview on page 305 How Simple Filters Evaluate Packets on page 305 Guidelines for Configuring Simple Filters on page 307 Guidelines for Applying Simple Filters on page

336 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches 316

337 PART 2 Configuring Firewall Filters for Forwarding, Fragments, and Policing Filter-Based Forwarding Overview Filter-Based Forwarding Overview on page 317 Firewall Filters That Handle Fragmented Packets Overview on page 319 Stateless Firewall Filters That Reference Policers Overview on page 319 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring FBF for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 320 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring FBF for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 Traffic on page 321 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Routing Instances for FBF on page 323 Statement Hierarchy for Applying FBF Filters to Interfaces on page 324 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on the Source Address on page 325 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address on page 335 Filters That Classify Packets or Direct Them to Routing Instances on page 317 Input Filtering to Classify and Forward Packets Within the Router or Switch on page 318 Output Filtering to Forward Packets to Another Routing Table on page 318 Restrictions for Applying Filter-Based Forwarding on page 319 Filters That Classify Packets or Direct Them to Routing Instances For IPv4 or IPv6 traffic only, you can use stateless firewall filters in conjunction with forwarding classes and routing instances to control how packets travel in a network. This is called filter-based forwarding (FBF). You can define a filtering term that matches incoming packets based on source address and then classifies matching packets to a specified forwarding class. This type of filtering can be configured to grant certain types of traffic preferential treatment or to improve load balancing. To configure a stateless firewall filter to classify packets to a forwarding class, configure a term with the nonterminating action forwarding-class class-name. You can also define a filtering term that directs matching packets to a specified routing instance. This type of filtering can be configured to route specific types of traffic through a firewall or other security device before the traffic continues on its path. To configure a 317

338 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches stateless firewall filter to direct traffic to a routing instance, configure a term with the terminating action routing-instance routing-instance-name <topology topology-name> to specify the routing instance to which matching packets will be forwarded. NOTE: Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding (urpf) check is compatible with FBF actions. urpf check is processed for source address checking before any FBF actions are enabled for static and dynamic interfaces. This applies to both IPv4 and IPv6 families. To forward traffic to the master routing instance, reference routing-instance default in the firewall configuration, as shown here: [edit firewall] family inet { filter test { term 1 { then { routing-instance default; NOTE: Do not reference routing-instance master. This does not work. Input Filtering to Classify and Forward Packets Within the Router or Switch You can configure filters to classify packets based on source address and specify the forwarding path the packets take within the router or switch by configuring a filter on the ingress interface. For example, you can use this filter for applications to differentiate traffic from two clients that have a common access layer (for example, a Layer 2 switch) but are connected to different Internet service providers (ISPs). When the filter is applied, the router or switch can differentiate the two traffic streams and direct each to the appropriate network. Depending on the media type the client is using, the filter can use the source IP address to forward the traffic to the corresponding network through a tunnel. You can also configure filters to classify packets based on IP protocol type or IP precedence bits. Output Filtering to Forward Packets to Another Routing Table You can also forward packets based on output filters by configuring a filter on the egress interfaces. In the case of port mirroring, it is useful for port-mirrored packets to be distributed to multiple monitoring PICs and collection PICs based on patterns in packet headers. FBF on the port-mirroring egress interface must be configured. Packets forwarded to the output filter have been through at least one route lookup when an FBF filter is configured on the egress interface. After the packet is classified at the 318

339 Part 2: Configuring Firewall Filters for Forwarding, Fragments, and Policing egress interface by the FBF filter, it is redirected to another routing table for further route lookup. Restrictions for Applying Filter-Based Forwarding An interface configured with filter-based forwarding does not support source-class usage (SCU) filter matching or source-class and destination-class usage (SCU/DCU) accounting. Related Documentation Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on the Source Address on page 325 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on Logical Systems on page 214 Firewall Filters That Handle Fragmented Packets Overview You can create stateless firewall filters that handle fragmented packets destined for the Routing Engine. By applying these policies to the Routing Engine, you protect against the use of IP fragmentation as a means to disguise TCP packets from a firewall filter. For example, consider an IP packet that is fragmented into the smallest allowable fragment size of 8 bytes (a 20-byte IP header plus an 8-byte payload). If this IP packet carries a TCP packet, the first fragment (fragment offset of 0) that arrives at the device contains only the TCP source and destination ports (first 4 bytes), and the sequence number (next 4 bytes). The TCP flags, which are contained in the next 8 bytes of the TCP header, arrive in the second fragment (fragment offset of 1). See RFC 1858, Security Considerations for IP Fragment Filtering. Related Documentation Understanding How to Use Firewall Filters on page 4 Example: Configuring a Stateless Firewall Filter to Handle Fragments on page 185 Stateless Firewall Filters That Reference Policers Overview Policing, or rate limiting, is an important component of firewall filters that lets you limit the amount of traffic that passes into or out of an interface. A firewall filter that references a policer can provide protection from denial-of-service (DOS) attacks. Traffic that exceeds the rate limits configured for the policer is either discarded or marked as lower priority than traffic that conforms to the configured rate limits. Packets can be marked for a lower priority by being set to a specific output queue, set to a specific packet loss priority (PLP) level, or both. When necessary, low-priority traffic can be discarded to prevent congestion. A policer specifies two types of rate limits on traffic: Bandwidth limit The average traffic rate permitted, specified as a number of bits per second. Maximum burst size The packet size permitted for bursts of data that exceed the bandwidth limit. 319

340 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Policing uses an algorithm to enforce a limit on average bandwidth while allowing bursts up to a specified maximum value. You can use policing to define specific classes of traffic on an interface and apply a set of rate limits to each class. After you name and configure a policer, it is stored as a template. You can then apply the policer in an interface configuration or, to rate-limit packet-filtered traffic only, in a firewall filter configuration. For an IPv4 firewall filter term only, you can also specify a prefix-specific action as a nonterminating action that applies a policer to the matched packets. A prefix-specific action applies additional matching criteria on the filter-matched packets based on specified address prefix bits and then associates the matched packets with a counter and policer instance for that filter term or for all terms in the firewall filter. To apply a policer or a prefix action to packet-filtered traffic, you can use the following firewall filter nonterminating actions: policer policer-name three-color-policer (single-rate two-rate) policer-name prefix-action action-name NOTE: The packet lengths that a policer considers depends on the address family of the firewall filter. See Understanding the Frame Length for Policing Packets. Related Documentation Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 103 Traffic Policing Overview Prefix-Specific Counting and Policing Overview Statement Hierarchy for Configuring FBF for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic You can configure stateless firewall filters for filter-based forwarding by configuring filter terms that specify the forwarding-class class-name nonterminating action or the routing-instance routing-instance-name terminating action: firewall { family (inet inet6) { filter filter-name { term term-name { from { ipv4-or-ipv6-match-conditions; then { forwarding-class class-name; #optional other-optional-nonterminating-actions; routing-instance routing-instance-name <topology topology-name>; 320

341 Part 2: Configuring Firewall Filters for Forwarding, Fragments, and Policing You can include the firewall configuration at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] Related Documentation Filter-Based Forwarding Overview on page 317 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic on page 50 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic on page 60 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Routing Instances for FBF on page 323 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on the Source Address on page 325 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring FBF for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 Traffic Matching on IPv4 Address and TCP/UDP Port Fields on page 321 Configuration Example on page 322 Matching on IPv4 Address and TCP/UDP Port Fields To configure a firewall filter term that matches on IP source and destination address fields, and TCP and UDP ports in the IPv4 header of packets in an MPLS flow, you can specify supported match conditions as shown here: [edit] interfaces { interface-name { unit logical-unit-number { family family { address ip-address; family mpls { filter { input filter-name; firewall { family mpls { filter filter-name { term term-name { from { ip-version ipv4 { destination-address { ip-address; source-address { ip-address; 321

342 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Configuration Example protocol tcp { destination-port tcp-port; destination-port-except tcp-port; source-port tcp-port; source-port-except tcp-port; protocol udp { destination-port udp-port; destination-port-except udp-port; source-port udp-port; source-port-except udp-port; then {... interfaces { ge-6/0/0 { unit 0 { family inet { address /30; family mpls { filter { input mpls-ipv4-filter1; firewall { family mpls { filter mpls-ipv4-filter1 { term term1 { from { ip-version ipv4 { source-address { /32; protocol tcp { destination-port ftp; then { count counter1; discard; 322

343 Part 2: Configuring Firewall Filters for Forwarding, Fragments, and Policing Related Documentation Filter-Based Forwarding Overview on page 317 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 72 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Routing Instances for FBF on page 323 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on the Source Address on page 325 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Routing Instances for FBF A routing instance is a collection of routing tables, interfaces, and routing protocol parameters. The set of interfaces belongs to the routing tables, and the routing protocol parameters control the information in the routing tables. To configure a routing instance for filter-based forwarding: 1. The instance-type must be forwarding. The forwarding routing instance type supports filter-based forwarding, where interfaces are not associated with instances. For this instance type, there is no one-to-one mapping between an interface and a routing instance. All interfaces belong to the default instance inet The name of the routing instance name must be the one referenced in the firewall filter action. NOTE: In Junos OS Release 9.0 and later, you can no longer specify a routing-instance name of default or include special characters within the name of a routing instance. You must also create a routing table group that adds interface routes to the following routing instances: Routing instance named in the action Default routing table inet.0 You create a routing table group to resolve the routes installed in the routing instance to directly connected next hops on that interface. For more information on routing table groups and interface routes, see the Routing Databases Overview. routing-instances { routing-table-name { instance-type forwarding; routing-options { static { route destination-prefix nexthop address; 323

344 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches You can include the forwarding routing instance at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] Related Documentation Filter-Based Forwarding Overview on page 317 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring FBF for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 320 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring FBF for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 Traffic on page 321 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on the Source Address on page 325 Statement Hierarchy for Applying FBF Filters to Interfaces To apply filter-based forwarding to a logical interface, include the input or output statement in the filter stanza. NOTE: An interface configured with filter-based forwarding does not support source-class usage (SCU) filter matching check filters. interfaces { interface-name { unit unit-number { family (inet inet6 mpls) { filter { input filter-name; output filter-name; address address; You can include the interfaces configuration at one of the following hierarchy levels: [edit] [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] Related Documentation Filter-Based Forwarding Overview on page 317 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring FBF for IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 320 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring FBF for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 Traffic on page 321 Statement Hierarchy for Configuring Routing Instances for FBF on page 323 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on the Source Address on page

345 Part 2: Configuring Firewall Filters for Forwarding, Fragments, and Policing Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on the Source Address This example shows how to configure filter-based forwarding. The filter classifies packets to determine their forwarding path within the ingress routing device. Requirements on page 325 Overview on page 325 Configuration on page 327 Verification on page 332 Requirements In this example, no special configuration beyond device initialization is required. Overview Filter-based forwarding is supported for IP version 4 (IPv4) and IP version 6 (IPv6). NOTE: Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding (urpf) check is compatible with FBF actions. urpf check is processed for source address checking before any FBF actions are enabled for static and dynamic interfaces. This applies to both IPv4 and IPv6 families. Use filter-based forwarding for service provider selection when customers have Internet connectivity provided by different ISPs yet share a common access layer. When a shared media (such as a cable modem) is used, a mechanism on the common access layer looks at Layer 2 or Layer 3 addresses and distinguishes between customers. You can use filter-based forwarding when the common access layer is implemented using a combination of Layer 2 switches and a single router. With filter-based forwarding, all packets received on an interface are considered. Each packet passes through a filter that has match conditions. If the match conditions are met for a filter and you have created a routing instance, filter-based forwarding is applied to a packet. The packet is forwarded based on the next hop specified in the routing instance. For static routes, the next hop can be a specific LSP. NOTE: Source-class usage filter matching is not supported on an interface configured with filter-based forwarding (FBF). To configure filter-based forwarding, perform the following tasks: Create a match filter on an ingress router. To specify a match filter, include the filter filter-name statement at the [edit firewall] hierarchy level. A packet that passes through the filter is compared against a set of rules to classify it and to determine its membership in a set. Once classified, the packet is forwarded to a routing table specified in the 325

346 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches accept action in the filter description language. The routing table then forwards the packet to the next hop that corresponds to the destination address entry in the table. Create routing instances that specify the routing table(s) to which a packet is forwarded, and the destination to which the packet is forwarded at the [edit routing-instances] hierarchy level. For example: [edit] routing-instances { routing-table-name1 { instance-type forwarding; routing-options { static { route /0 nexthop ; routing-table-name2 { instance-type forwarding; routing-options { static { route /0 nexthop ; Create a routing table group that adds interface routes to the forwarding routing instances used in filter-based forwarding (FBF), as well as to the default routing instance inet.0. This part of the configuration resolves the routes installed in the routing instances to directly connected next hops on that interface. Create the routing table group at the [edit routing-options] hierarchy level. NOTE: Specify inet.0 as one of the routing instances that the interface routes are imported into. If the default instance inet.0 is not specified, interface routes are not imported into the default routing instance. This example shows a packet filter that directs customer traffic to a next-hop router in the domains, SP 1 or SP 2, based on the packet s source address. If the packet has a source address assigned to an SP 1 customer, destination-based forwarding occurs using the sp1-route-table.inet.0 routing table. If the packet has a source address assigned to an SP 2 customer, destination-based forwarding occurs using the sp2-route-table.inet.0 routing table. If a packet does not match either of these conditions, the filter accepts the packet, and destination-based forwarding occurs using the standard inet.0 routing table. Figure 6 on page 327 shows the topology used in this example. On Device P1, an input filter classifies packets received from Device PE3 and Device PE4. The packets are routed based on the source addresses. Packets with source addresses 326

347 Part 2: Configuring Firewall Filters for Forwarding, Fragments, and Policing in the /24 and /24 networks are routed to Device PE1. Packets with source addresses in the /24 and /24 networks are routed to Device PE2. Figure 6: Filter-Based Forwarding SP 1 Customer / /24 PE3 fe-1/2/0 PE1 SP 1 P2 P / /24 PE4 Input Filter Classifying Customers PE2 SP 2 SP 2 Customer g To establish connectivity, OSPF is configured on all of the interfaces. For demonstration purposes, loopback interface addresses are configured on the routing devices to represent networks in the clouds. The CLI Quick Configuration on page 327 section shows the entire configuration for all of the devices in the topology. The Configuring the Firewall Filter on page 328 and Configuring the Routing Instances on the Device P1 on page 329 sections shows the step-by-step configuration of the ingress routing device, Device P1. Configuration CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands, paste them into a text file, remove any line breaks, change any details necessary to match your network configuration, and then copy and paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. Device P1 set firewall filter classify-customers term sp1-customers from source-address /24 set firewall filter classify-customers term sp1-customers from source-address /24 set firewall filter classify-customers term sp1-customers then log set firewall filter classify-customers term sp1-customers then routing-instance sp1-route-table set firewall filter classify-customers term sp2-customers from source-address /24 set firewall filter classify-customers term sp2-customers from source-address /24 set firewall filter classify-customers term sp2-customers then log set firewall filter classify-customers term sp2-customers then routing-instance sp2-route-table set firewall filter classify-customers term default then accept set interfaces fe-1/2/0 unit 0 family inet filter input classify-customers set interfaces fe-1/2/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces fe-1/2/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces fe-1/2/2 unit 0 family inet address /30 set protocols ospf rib-group fbf-group set protocols ospf area interface all set protocols ospf area interface fxp0.0 disable set routing-instances sp1-route-table instance-type forwarding 327

348 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches set routing-instances sp1-route-table routing-options static route /0 next-hop set routing-instances sp2-route-table instance-type forwarding set routing-instances sp2-route-table routing-options static route /0 next-hop set routing-options rib-groups fbf-group import-rib inet.0 set routing-options rib-groups fbf-group import-rib sp1-route-table.inet.0 set routing-options rib-groups fbf-group import-rib sp2-route-table.inet.0 Device P2 set interfaces fe-1/2/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces fe-1/2/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces fe-1/2/2 unit 0 family inet address /30 set protocols ospf area interface all set protocols ospf area interface fxp0.0 disable Device PE1 set interfaces fe-1/2/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 set protocols ospf area interface all set protocols ospf area interface fxp0.0 disable Device PE2 set interfaces fe-1/2/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 set protocols ospf area interface all set protocols ospf area interface fxp0.0 disable Device PE3 set interfaces fe-1/2/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 set protocols ospf area interface all set protocols ospf area interface fxp0.0 disable Device PE4 set interfaces fe-1/2/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 set protocols ospf area interface all set protocols ospf area interface fxp0.0 disable Device PE4 set interfaces fe-1/2/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 set protocols ospf area interface all set protocols ospf area interface fxp0.0 disable Configuring the Firewall Filter Step-by-Step Procedure The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5 in the CLI User Guide. To configure the firewall filter on the main router: 1. Configure the source addresses for SP1 customers. [edit firewall filter classify-customers term sp1-customers] user@host# set from source-address /24 328

349 Part 2: Configuring Firewall Filters for Forwarding, Fragments, and Policing set from source-address /24 2. Configure the actions that are taken when packets are received with the specified source addresses. To track the action of the firewall filter, a log action is configured. The sp1-route-table.inet.0 routing table on Device P1 routes the packets. [edit firewall filter classify-customers term sp1-customers] user@host# set then log user@host# set then routing-instance sp1-route-table 3. Configure the source addresses for SP2 customers. [edit firewall filter classify-customers term sp2-customers] user@host# set from source-address /24 user@host# set from source-address /24 4. Configure the actions that are taken when packets are received with the specified source addresses. To track the action of the firewall filter, a log action is configured. The sp2-route-table.inet.0 routing table on Device P1 routes the packet. [edit firewall filter classify-customers term sp2-customers] user@host# set then log user@host# set then routing-instance sp2-route-table 5. Configure the action to take when packets are received from any other source address. All of these packets are simply accepted and routed using the default IPv4 unicast routing table, inet.0. [edit firewall filter classify-customers term default] user@host# set then accept 6. Configure the action to take when packets are received from any other source address. All of these packets are simply accepted and routed using the default IPv4 unicast routing table, inet.0. [edit firewall filter classify-customers term default] user@host# set then accept Configuring the Routing Instances on the Device P1 Step-by-Step Procedure The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5 in the CLI User Guide. To configure the routing instances: 1. Configure the interfaces. [edit interfaces fe-1/2/0] user@host# set unit 0 family inet address /30 329

350 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches [edit interfaces fe-1/2/1] set unit 0 family inet address /30 [edit interfaces fe-1/2/2] user@host# set unit 0 family inet address /30 2. Assign the classify-customers firewall filter to router interface fe-1/2/0.0 as an input packet filter. [edit interfaces fe-1/2/0] user@host# set unit 0 family inet filter input classify-customers 3. Configure connectivity, using either a routing protocol or static routing. As a best practice, disable routing on the management interface. [edit protocols ospf area ] user@host# set interface all user@host# set interface fxp0.0 disable 4. Create the routing instances. These routing instances are referenced in the classify-customers firewall filter. The forwarding instance type provides support for filter-based forwarding, where interfaces are not associated with instances. All interfaces belong to the default instance, in this case Device P1. [edit routing-instances] user@host# set sp1-route-table instance-type forwarding user@host# set sp2-route-table instance-type forwarding 5. Resolve the routes installed in the routing instances to directly connected next hops. [edit routing-instances sp1-route-table routing-options] user@host# set static route /0 next-hop user@host# set static route /0 next-hop Group together the routing tables to form a routing table group. The first routing table, inet.0, is the primary routing table, and the additional routing tables are the secondary routing tables. The primary routing table determines the address family of the routing table group, in this case IPv4. [edit routing-options] user@host# set rib-groups fbf-group import-rib inet.0 user@host# set rib-groups fbf-group import-rib sp1-route-table.inet.0 user@host# set rib-groups fbf-group import-rib sp2-route-table.inet.0 7. Apply the routing table group to OSPF. This causes the OSPF routes to be installed into all the routing tables in the group. [edit protocols ospf] user@host# set rib-group fbf-group 330

351 Part 2: Configuring Firewall Filters for Forwarding, Fragments, and Policing 8. Apply the routing table group to OSPF. This causes the OSPF routes to be installed into all the routing tables in the group. [edit protocols ospf] set rib-group fbf-group 9. If you are done configuring the device, commit the configuration. [edit] commit Results Confirm your configuration by issuing the show interfaces, show firewall, show protocols, show routing-instances, and show routing-options commands. show interfaces fe-1/2/0 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input classify-customers; address /30; fe-1/2/1 { unit 0 { family inet { address /30; fe-1/2/2 { unit 0 { family inet { address /30; user@host# show firewall filter classify-customers { term sp1-customers { from { source-address { /24; /24; then { log; routing-instance sp1-route-table; 331

352 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches term sp2-customers { from { source-address { /24; /24; then { log; routing-instance sp2-route-table; term default { then accept; user@host# show protocols ospf { rib-group fbf-group; area { interface all; interface fxp0.0 { disable; user@host# show routing-instances sp1-route-table { instance-type forwarding; routing-options { static { route /0 next-hop ; sp2-route-table { instance-type forwarding; routing-options { static { route /0 next-hop ; user@host# show routing-options rib-groups { fbf-group { import-rib [ inet.0 sp1-route-table.inet.0 sp2-route-table.inet.0 ]; Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. 332

353 Part 2: Configuring Firewall Filters for Forwarding, Fragments, and Policing Pinging with Specified Source Addresses Purpose Send some ICMP packets across the network to test the firewall filter. Action 1. Run the ping command, pinging the lo0.0 interface on Device PE1. The address configured on this interface is Specify the source address , which is the address configured on the lo0.0 interface on Device PE3. ping source PING ( ): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=0 ttl=62 time=1.444 ms 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=1 ttl=62 time=2.094 ms ^C ping statistics packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 1.444/1.769/2.094/0.325 ms 2. Run the ping command, pinging the lo0.0 interface on Device PE2. The address configured on this interface is Specify the source address , which is the address configured on the lo0.0 interface on Device PE4. user@pe4> ping source PING ( ): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=0 ttl=62 time=1.473 ms 64 bytes from : icmp_seq=1 ttl=62 time=1.407 ms ^C ping statistics packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 1.407/1.440/1.473/0.033 ms Meaning Sending these pings activates the firewall filter actions. Verifying the Firewall Filter Purpose Make sure the firewall filter actions take effect. Action 1. Run the show firewall log command on Device P1. user@p1> show firewall log Log : Time Filter Action Interface Protocol Src Addr Dest Addr 13:52:20 pfe A fe-1/2/0.0 ICMP :52:19 pfe A fe-1/2/0.0 ICMP :51:53 pfe A fe-1/2/0.0 ICMP :51:52 pfe A fe-1/2/0.0 ICMP

354 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Related Documentation Example: Configuring Multitopology Routing Based on Applications Copying and Redirecting Traffic with Port Mirroring and Filter-Based Forwarding Using Filter-Based Forwarding to Export Monitored Traffic to Multiple Destinations Filter-Based Forwarding Overview on page

355 CHAPTER 11 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address Understanding Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address on page 335 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface on page 337 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Destination IP Address on page 341 Understanding Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address Policy-based routing (also known as filter-based forwarding) refers to the use of firewall filters that are applied to an interface to match certain IP header characteristics and to route only those matching packets differently than the packets would normally be routed. Starting in Junos OS Release 12.2, you can use then next-interface, then next-ip, or then next-ip6 as an action in a firewall filter. For example: from { set of match conditions then { IP-address (or) IPv6-address (or) Interface name The set of match conditions can be as follows: Layer-3 properties (for example, the source or destination IP address or the TOS byte) Layer-4 properties (for example, the source or destination port) 335

356 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches The route for the given IPv4 or IPv6 address has to be present in the routing table for policy-based routing to take effect. Similarly, the route through the given interface has to be present in the forwarding table for next-interface action to take effect. This can be achieved by configuring an interior gateway protocol (IGP), such as OSPF or IS-IS, to advertise Layer 3 routes. The firewall filter matches the conditions and forwards the packet to one of the following: An IPv4 address (using the next-ip firewall filter action) An IPv6 address (using the next-ip6 firewall filter action) An interface (using the next-interface firewall filter action) Suppose, for example, that you want to offer services to your customers, and the services reside on different servers. An example of a service might be hosted DNS or hosted FTP. As customer traffic arrives at the Juniper Networks routing device, you can use filter-based forwarding to send traffic to the servers by applying a match condition on a MAC address or an IP address or simply an incoming interface and send the packets to a certain outgoing interface that is associated with the appropriate server. Some of your destinations might be IPv4 or IPv6 addresses, in which case the next-ip or next-ip6 action is useful. Optionally, you can associate the outgoing interfaces or IP addresses with routing instances. For example: firewall { filter filter1 { term t1 { from { source-address { /32; then { next-interface { xe-0/1/0.1; routing-instance rins1; term t2 { from { source-address { /32; then { next-interface { xe-0/1/0.2; routing-instance rins2; 336

357 Chapter 11: Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address routing-instances { rins1 { instance-type virtual-router; interface xe-0/1/0.1; rins2 { instance-type virtual-router; interface xe-0/1/0.2; Related Documentation Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface on page 337 Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 103 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface This example shows how to use then next-interface as an action in a firewall filter. Requirements on page 337 Overview on page 337 Configuration on page 338 Verification on page 341 Requirements This example has the following hardware and software requirements: MX Series 3D Universal Edge Router as the routing device with the firewall filter configured. Junos OS Release 12.2 running on the routing device with the firewall filter configured. The filter with the next-interface (or next-ip) action can only be applied to an interface that is hosted on a Trio MPC. If you apply the filter to an I-chip based DPC, the commit operation fails. The outgoing interface referred to in the next-interface interface-name action can be hosted on a Trio MPC or an I-chip based DPC. Overview In this example, Device R1 has two loopback interface addresses configured: and On Device R2, a firewall filter has multiple terms configured. Each term matches one of the source addresses in incoming traffic, and routes the traffic to specified outgoing interfaces. The outgoing interfaces are configured as VLAN-tagged interfaces between Device R2 and Device R3. 337

358 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches IS-IS is used for connectivity among the devices. Figure 7 on page 338 shows the topology used in this example. Figure 7: Filter-Based Forwarding to Specified Outgoing Interfaces Configuration This example shows the configuration on Device R2. CLI Quick Configuration Device R2 To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands, paste them into a text file, remove any line breaks, change any details necessary to match your network configuration, and then copy and paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. set interfaces ge-2/1/0 unit 0 family inet filter input filter1 set interfaces ge-2/1/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-2/1/0 unit 0 description to-r1 set interfaces ge-2/1/0 unit 0 family iso set interfaces ge-2/1/1 vlan-tagging set interfaces ge-2/1/1 description to-r3 set interfaces ge-2/1/1 unit 0 vlan-id 1001 set interfaces ge-2/1/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-2/1/1 unit 0 family iso set interfaces ge-2/1/1 unit 1 vlan-id 1002 set interfaces ge-2/1/1 unit 1 family inet address /30 set interfaces ge-2/1/1 unit 1 family iso set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family iso address set firewall family inet filter filter1 term t1 from source-address /32 set firewall family inet filter filter1 term t1 then next-interface ge-2/1/1.0 set firewall family inet filter filter1 term t2 from source-address /32 set firewall family inet filter filter1 term t2 then next-interface ge-2/1/1.1 set protocols isis interface all level 1 disable set protocols isis interface fxp0.0 disable set protocols isis interface lo0.0 Step-by-Step Procedure The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5 in the CLI User Guide. To configure Device R2: 1. Configure the interfaces. [edit interfaces] user@r2# set ge-2/1/0 unit 0 family inet filter input filter1 user@r2# set ge-2/1/0 unit 0 family inet address /30 user@r2# set ge-2/1/0 unit 0 description to-r1 user@r2# set ge-2/1/0 unit 0 family iso 338

359 Chapter 11: Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address user@r2# set ge-2/1/1 vlan-tagging user@r2# set ge-2/1/1 description to-r3 user@r2# set ge-2/1/1 unit 0 vlan-id 1001 user@r2# set ge-2/1/1 unit 0 family inet address /30 user@r2# set ge-2/1/1 unit 0 family iso user@r2# set ge-2/1/1 unit 1 vlan-id 1002 user@r2# set ge-2/1/1 unit 1 family inet address /30 user@r2# set ge-2/1/1 unit 1 family iso user@r2# set lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 user@r2# set lo0 unit 0 family iso address Configure the firewall filter. [edit firewall family inet filter filter1] user@r2# set term t1 from source-address /32 user@r2# set term t1 then next-interface ge-2/1/1.0 user@r2# set term t2 from source-address /32 user@r2# set term t2 then next-interface ge-2/1/ Enable IS-IS on the interfaces. [edit protocols is-is] user@r2# set interface all level 1 disable user@r2# set interface fxp0.0 disable user@r2# set interface lo0.0 Results From configuration mode, confirm your configuration by entering the show interfaces, show firewall, and show protocols commands. If the output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the configuration instructions in this example to correct it. user@r2# show interfaces ge-2/1/0 { unit 0 { description to-r1; family inet { filter { input filter1; address /30; family iso; ge-2/1/1 { description to-r3; vlan-tagging; unit 0 { vlan-id 1001; family inet { address /30; 339

360 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches family iso; unit 1 { vlan-id 1002; family inet { address /30; family iso; lo0 { unit 0 { family inet { address /32; family iso { address ; user@r2# show firewall family inet { filter filter1 { term t1 { from { source-address { /32; then { next-interface { ge-2/1/1.0; term t2 { from { source-address { /32; then { next-interface { ge-2/1/1.1; user@r2# show protocols isis { interface all { level 1 disable; interface fxp0.0 { disable; 340

361 Chapter 11: Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address interface lo0.0; If you are done configuring the device, enter commit from configuration mode. Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. Checking the Paths Used Purpose Make sure that the expected paths are used when sending traffic from Device R1 to Device R4. Action On Device R1, enter the traceroute command. user@r1> traceroute source traceroute to ( ) from , 30 hops max, 40 byte packets ( ) ms ms ms ( ) ms ms ms ( ) ms ms ms user@r1> traceroute source traceroute to ( ) from , 30 hops max, 40 byte packets ( ) ms ms ms ( ) ms ms ms ( ) ms ms ms Meaning The output shows that the second hop changes, depending on the source address used in the traceroute command. To verify this feature, a traceroute operation is performed on Device R1 to Device R4. When the source IP address is , packets are forwarded out the ge-2/1/1.0 interface on Device R2. When the source IP address is , packets are forwarded out the ge-2/1/1.1 interface on Device R2. Related Documentation Understanding Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address on page 335 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Destination IP Address on page 341 Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page 103 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Destination IP Address This example shows how to use then next-ip as an action in a firewall filter. Requirements on page 342 Overview on page

362 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Configuration on page 343 Verification on page 349 Requirements This example has the following hardware and software requirements: MX Series 3D Universal Edge Router as the routing device with the firewall filter configured. Junos OS Release 12.2 running on the routing device with the firewall filter configured. The filter with the next-interface (or next-ip) action can only be applied to an interface that is hosted on a Trio MPC. If you apply the filter to an I-chip based DPC, the commit operation fails. The outgoing interface referred to in the next-interface interface-name action can be hosted on a Trio MPC or an I-chip based DPC. Overview In this example, Device R2 has two routing instances that are interconnected with physical links. Traffic from certain sources is required to be directed across the upper link for inspection by a traffic optimizer, which acts transparently on the IP layer. When the traffic optimizer fails, the traffic moves to the lower link. Flows in direction R1>R3 and R3>R1 follow identical paths. Figure 8 on page 342 shows the topology used in this example. Figure 8: Filter-Based Forwarding to Specified Outgoing Interfaces On Device R2, a firewall filter is applied to interface ge-1/0/8 in the input direction. The second term matches the specific source addresses /24, and routes the traffic to address This address resolves to next-hop If the link connected to interface ge-1/1/0 goes down, the address will resolve to next-hop On Device R2, a firewall filter is applied to interface ge-1/0/0 in the input direction. The second term matches the specific destination addresses /24, and routes the traffic to address This address resolves to next-hop If the link connected to interface ge-1/3/8 goes down, the address will resolve to next-hop

363 Chapter 11: Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address NOTE: The address configured using the next-ip action is not automatically resolved. On Ethernet interfaces, it is assumed that the configured address is resolved using a routing protocol or static routes. Internal BGP (IBGP) is used between Device R2-VR1 and Device R2-VR2. External BGP (EBGP) is used between Device R1 and Device R2-VR1, as well as between Device R2-VR2 and Device R3. BGP operations proceed as follows: R2-VR1 learns 10/8 from R1, and 0/0 from R2-VR2. R2-VR2 learns 0/0 from R3, and 10/8 from R2-VR1. R1 advertises 10/8, and receives 0/0 from R2-VR1. R3 advertises 0/0, and receives 10/8 from R2-VR2. The firewall filter applied to Device R2 needs to allow control-plane traffic for the directly connected interfaces, in this case the EBGP sessions. This example shows the configuration on Device R2. Configuration CLI Quick Configuration To quickly configure this example, copy the following commands, paste them into a text file, remove any line breaks, change any details necessary to match your network configuration, and then copy and paste the commands into the CLI at the [edit] hierarchy level. Device R1 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 set interfaces ge-1/0/8 unit 0 family inet address /24 set routing-options autonomous-system set protocols bgp group ebgp neighbor peer-as set protocols bgp group ebgp export Announce10 set policy-options policy-statement Announce10 term 1 from route-filter /8 exact set policy-options policy-statement Announce10 term 1 then accept set policy-options policy-statement Announce10 term 2 then reject Device R2 set interfaces ge-1/0/8 unit 0 family inet address /24 set interfaces ge-1/0/8 unit 0 family inet filter input SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer set interfaces ge-1/1/0 unit 0 family inet address /24 set interfaces ge-1/1/1 unit 0 family inet address /24 set routing-instances VR1 instance-type virtual-router set routing-instances VR1 interface ge-1/0/8.0 set routing-instances VR1 interface ge-1/1/0.0 set routing-instances VR1 interface ge-1/1/1.0 set routing-instances VR1 routing-options static route next-hop set routing-instances VR1 routing-options static route qualified-next-hop metric 100 set routing-instances VR1 routing-options autonomous-system set routing-instances VR1 protocols bgp group ebgp neighbor peer-as set routing-instances VR1 protocols bgp group ibgp neighbor peer-as

364 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches set routing-instances VR1 protocols bgp group ibgp neighbor export AcceptExternal set firewall family inet filter SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer term 0 from source-address /24 set firewall family inet filter SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer term 0 then accept set firewall family inet filter SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer term 1 from source-address /24 set firewall family inet filter SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer term 1 then next-ip routing-instance VR1 set firewall family inet filter SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer term 2 from source-address /8 set firewall family inet filter SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer term 2 then accept set interfaces ge-1/0/0 unit 0 family inet address /24 set interfaces ge-1/0/0 unit 0 family inet filter input SteerDstTrafficOptimizer set interfaces ge-1/3/8 unit 0 family inet address /24 set interfaces ge-1/3/9 unit 0 family inet address /24 set routing-instances VR2 instance-type virtual-router set routing-instances VR2 interface ge-1/0/0.0 set routing-instances VR2 interface ge-1/3/8.0 set routing-instances VR2 interface ge-1/3/9.0 set routing-instances VR2 routing-options static route /32 next-hop set routing-instances VR2 routing-options static route /32 qualified-next-hop metric 100 set routing-instances VR2 routing-options autonomous-system set routing-instances VR2 protocols bgp group ebgp neighbor peer-as set routing-instances VR2 protocols bgp group ibgp neighbor peer-as set routing-instances VR2 protocols bgp group ibgp neighbor export AcceptExternal set firewall family inet filter SteerDstTrafficOptimizer term 0 from source-address /24 set firewall family inet filter SteerDstTrafficOptimizer term 0 then accept set firewall family inet filter SteerDstTrafficOptimizer term 1 from destination-address /24 set firewall family inet filter SteerDstTrafficOptimizer term 1 then next-ip routing-instance VR2 set firewall family inet filter SteerDstTrafficOptimizer term 2 from destination-address /8 set firewall family inet filter SteerDstTrafficOptimizer term 2 then accept set policy-options policy-statement AcceptExternal term 1 from route-type external set policy-options policy-statement AcceptExternal term 1 then accept Device R3 set interfaces lo0 unit 0 family inet address /32 set interfaces ge-1/0/0 unit 0 family inet address /24 set routing-options autonomous-system set protocols bgp group ebgp neighbor peer-as set protocols bgp group ebgp export Announce0 set policy-options policy-statement Announce0 term 1 from route-filter /0 exact set policy-options policy-statement Announce0 term 1 then accept set policy-options policy-statement Announce0 term 2 then reject 344

365 Chapter 11: Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address Step-by-Step Procedure The following example requires you to navigate various levels in the configuration hierarchy. For information about navigating the CLI, see Using the CLI Editor in Configuration Mode on page 5 in the CLI User Guide. To configure Device R2: 1. Configure the interfaces. [edit interfaces] user@r2# set ge-1/0/8 unit 0 family inet address /24 user@r2# set ge-1/0/8 unit 0 family inet filter input SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer user@r2# set ge-1/1/0 unit 0 family inet address /24 user@r2# set ge-1/1/1 unit 0 family inet address /24 user@r2# set ge-1/0/0 unit 0 family inet address /24 user@r2# set ge-1/0/0 unit 0 family inet filter input SteerDstTrafficOptimizer user@r2# set ge-1/3/8 unit 0 family inet address /24 user@r2# set ge-1/3/9 unit 0 family inet address /24 2. Configure the routing instance. [edit routing-instances] user@r2# set VR1 instance-type virtual-router user@r2# set VR1 interface ge-1/0/8.0 user@r2# set VR1 interface ge-1/1/0.0 user@r2# set VR1 interface ge-1/1/1.0 user@r2# set VR2 instance-type virtual-router user@r2# set VR2 interface ge-1/0/0.0 user@r2# set VR2 interface ge-1/3/8.0 user@r2# set VR2 interface ge-1/3/ Configure the static and BGP routing. [edit routing-instances] user@r2# set VR1 routing-options static route next-hop user@r2# set VR1 routing-options static route qualified-next-hop metric 100 user@r2# set VR1 routing-options autonomous-system user@r2# set VR1 protocols bgp group ebgp neighbor peer-as user@r2# set VR1 protocols bgp group ibgp neighbor peer-as user@r2# set VR1 protocols bgp group ibgp neighbor export AcceptExternal user@r2# set VR2 routing-options static route /32 next-hop user@r2# set VR2 routing-options static route /32 qualified-next-hop metric 100 user@r2# set VR2 routing-options autonomous-system user@r2# set VR2 protocols bgp group ebgp neighbor peer-as user@r2# set VR2 protocols bgp group ibgp neighbor peer-as user@r2# set VR2 protocols bgp group ibgp neighbor export AcceptExternal 4. Configure the firewall filters. [edit firewall family inet] 345

366 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches set filter SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer term 0 from source-address /24 user@r2# set filter SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer term 0 then accept user@r2# set filter SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer term 1 from source-address /24 user@r2# set filter SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer term 1 then next-ip routing-instance VR1 user@r2# set filter SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer term 2 from source-address /8 user@r2# set filter SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer term 2 then accept user@r2# set filter SteerDstTrafficOptimizer term 0 from source-address /24 user@r2# set filter SteerDstTrafficOptimizer term 0 then accept user@r2# set filter SteerDstTrafficOptimizer term 1 from destination-address /24 user@r2# set filter SteerDstTrafficOptimizer term 1 then next-ip routing-instance VR2 user@r2# set filter SteerDstTrafficOptimizer term 2 from destination-address /8 user@r2# set filter SteerDstTrafficOptimizer term 2 then accept 5. Configure the routing policy. [edit policy-options policy-statement AcceptExternal term 1] user@r2# set from route-type external user@r2# set term 1 then accept Results From configuration mode, confirm your configuration by entering the show interfaces, show firewall, and show protocols commands. If the output does not display the intended configuration, repeat the configuration instructions in this example to correct it. user@r2# show interfaces ge-1/0/0 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input SteerDstTrafficOptimizer; address /24; ge-1/0/8 { unit 0 { family inet { filter { input SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer; address /24; ge-1/1/0 { unit 0 { family inet { address /24; 346

367 Chapter 11: Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address ge-1/1/1 { unit 0 { family inet { address /24; ge-1/3/8 { unit 0 { family inet { address /24; ge-1/3/9 { unit 0 { family inet { address /24; user@r2# show firewall family inet { filter SteerSrcTrafficOptimizer { term 0 { from { source-address { /24; then accept; term 1 { from { source-address { /24; then { next-ip /32 routing-instance VR1; term 2 { from { source-address { /8; then accept; filter SteerDstTrafficOptimizer { 347

368 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches term 0 { from { source-address { /24; then accept; term 1 { from { destination-address { /24; then { next-ip /32 routing-instance VR2; term 2 { from { destination-address { /8; then accept; user@r2# show policy-options policy-statement AcceptExternal { term 1 { from route-type external; then accept; user@r2# show routing-instances VR1 { instance-type virtual-router; interface ge-1/0/8.0; interface ge-1/1/0.0; interface ge-1/1/1.0; routing-options { static { route /32 { next-hop ; qualified-next-hop { metric 100; autonomous-system 65002; protocols { bgp { group ebgp { 348

369 Chapter 11: Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address neighbor { peer-as 65001; group ibgp { neighbor { export NextHopSelf; peer-as 65002; VR2 { instance-type virtual-router; interface ge-1/0/0.0; interface ge-1/3/8.0; interface ge-1/3/9.0; routing-options { static { route /32 { next-hop ; qualified-next-hop { metric 100; autonomous-system 65002; protocols { bgp { group ebgp { neighbor { peer-as 65003; group ibgp { neighbor { export NextHopSelf; peer-as 65002; If you are done configuring the device, enter commit from configuration mode. Verification Confirm that the configuration is working properly. 349

370 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Checking the Paths Used Purpose Make sure that the expected paths are used when sending traffic from Device R1 to Device R3. Action On Device R1, enter the traceroute command before and after the link failure Before Failure of the Traffic Optimizer traceroute source traceroute to ( ) from , 30 hops max, 40 byte packets ( ) ms ms ms ( ) ms ms ms ( ) ms ms ms user@r1> traceroute source traceroute to ( ) from , 30 hops max, 40 byte packets ( ) ms ms ms ( ) ms ms ms ( ) ms ms ms After Failure of the Traffic Optimizer user@r1> traceroute source traceroute to ( ) from , 30 hops max, 40 byte packets ( ) ms ms ms ( ) ms ms ms ( ) ms ms ms user@r1> traceroute source traceroute to ( ) from , 30 hops max, 40 byte packets ( ) ms ms ms ( ) ms ms ms ( ) ms ms ms Meaning The output shows that the second hop changes, depending on the source address used in the traceroute command. To verify this feature, a traceroute operation is performed on Device R1 to Device R3. When the source IP address is , packets are forwarded out the ge-1/1/0.0 interface on Device R2. When the source IP address is , packets are forwarded out the ge-1/1/1.0 interface on Device R2. When the link between ge-1/1/0 and ge-1/3/8 fails, packets with source IP address are forwarded out the ge-1/1/1.0 interface on Device R2. Related Documentation Understanding Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address on page 335 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface on page 337 Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page

371 Chapter 11: Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding to a Specific Outgoing Interface or Destination IP Address Related Documentation Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on Logical Systems on page 214 Example: Configuring Filter-Based Forwarding on the Source Address on page 325 Firewall Filter Nonterminating Actions on page

372 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches 352

373 PART 3 Configuration Statements Configuration Statements on page

374 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches 354

375 CHAPTER 12 Configuration Statements [edit firewall] Hierarchy Level [edit firewall] Hierarchy Level on page 355 accounting-profile on page 367 destination-address on page 368 destination-port on page 369 enhanced-mode on page 370 family (Firewall) on page 372 filter (Applying to a Logical Interface) on page 374 filter (Configuring) on page 375 firewall on page 376 interface-set on page 377 interface-specific (Firewall Filters) on page 377 ip-version on page 378 prefix-list on page 379 protocol on page 380 service-filter (Firewall) on page 381 simple-filter (Configuring) on page 382 source-address on page 383 source-checking on page 384 source-port on page 385 term (Firewall Filter) on page 386 Several statements in the [edit firewall] hierarchy are valid at numerous locations within the hierarchy.. Common Firewall Actions on page 356 Common IP Firewall Actions on page 356 Common IPv4 and IPv6 Firewall Actions on page 357 Common IP Firewall Match Conditions on page

376 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Common IPv4 Firewall Match Conditions on page 358 Common Layer 2 Firewall Match Conditions on page 358 Complete [edit firewall] Hierarchy on page 360 Common Firewall Actions This section lists statements that are valid at the following hierarchy levels, and is referenced at those levels in Complete [edit firewall] Hierarchy on page 360 instead of the statements being repeated. [edit firewall family (any ethernet-switching inet inet6) filter filter-name term term-name then] [edit firewall filter filter-name term term-name then] Common IP Firewall Actions The common firewall actions are as follows: count counter-name; forwarding-class class-name; loss-priority (high low medium-high medium-low); next term; policer policer-name; three-color-policer policer-name { (single-rate single-rate-policer-name two-rate two-rate-policer-name); This section lists statements that are valid at the following hierarchy levels, and is referenced at those levels in Complete [edit firewall] Hierarchy on page 360 instead of the statements being repeated. [edit firewall family inet filter filter-name term term-name then] [edit firewall family inet6 filter filter-name term term-name then] [edit firewall filter filter-name term term-name then] The common IP firewall actions are as follows: log; logical-system logical-system-name <routing-instance routing-instance-name> <topology topology-name>; port-mirror; port-mirror-instance instance-name; routing-instance routing-instance-name> <topology topology-name>; sample; service-filter-hit; syslog; topology topology-name; 356

377 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements Common IPv4 and IPv6 Firewall Actions This section lists statements that are valid at the following hierarchy levels, and is referenced at those levels in Complete [edit firewall] Hierarchy on page 360 instead of the statements being repeated. [edit firewall family inet filter filter-name term term-name then] [edit firewall filter filter-name term term-name then] Common IP Firewall Match Conditions The common IP version 4 (IPv4) and IP version 6 (IPv6) firewall actions are as follows: (accept discard <accounting collector-name> reject <administratively-prohibited bad-host-tos bad-network-tos fragmentation-needed host-prohibited host-unknown host-unreachable network-prohibited network-unknown network-unreachable port-unreachable precedence-cutoff precedence-violation protocol-unreachable source-host-isolated source-route-failed tcp-reset>); ipsec-sa sa-name; load-balance sa-name; next-hop-group group-name; prefix-action action-name; This section lists statements that are valid at the following hierarchy levels, and is referenced at those levels in Complete [edit firewall] Hierarchy on page 360 instead of the statements being repeated. [edit firewall family inet dialer-filter filter-name term term-name from] (with the exceptions noted at this level in Complete [edit firewall] Hierarchy on page 360) [edit firewall family inet filter filter-name term term-name from] [edit firewall family inet6 dialer-filter filter-name term term-name from] (with the exceptions noted at this level in Complete [edit firewall] Hierarchy on page 360) [edit firewall family inet6 filter filter-name term term-name from] [edit firewall filter filter-name term term-name from] The common IP firewall match conditions are as follows: address { ip-prefix</prefix-length> <except>; destination-address { ip-prefix</prefix-length> <except>; destination-class [ class-names ] destination-class-except [ class-names ]); (destination-port [ port-names ] destination-port-except [ port-names ]); destination-prefix-list { list-name <except>; (forwarding-class [ class-names ] forwarding-class-except [ class-names ]); (icmp-code [ codes ] icmp-code-except [ codes ]); (icmp-type [ types ] icmp-type-except [ types ]); 357

378 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Common IPv4 Firewall Match Conditions interface interface-name; (interface-group [ group-names ] interface-group-except [ group-names ]); interface-set set-name; (loss-priority [ priorities ] loss-priority-except [ priorities ]); (packet-length [ values ] packet-length-except [ values ]); (port [ port-names ] port-except [ port-names ]); prefix-list { list-name <except>; service-filter-hit; source-address { ip-prefix</prefix-length> <except>; (source-class [ class-names ] source-class-except [ class-names ]); (source-port [ port-names ] source-port-except [ port-names ]); source-prefix-list { list-name <except>; tcp-established; tcp-flags flag; tcp-initial; This section lists statements that are valid at the following hierarchy levels, and is referenced at those levels in Complete [edit firewall] Hierarchy on page 360 instead of the statements being repeated. [edit firewall family inet dialer-filter filter-name term term-name from] (with the exceptions noted at this level in Complete [edit firewall] Hierarchy on page 360) [edit firewall family inet filter filter-name term term-name from] [edit firewall filter filter-name term term-name from] The common IPv4 firewall match conditions are as follows: Common Layer 2 Firewall Match Conditions (ah-spi [ values ] ah-spi-except [ values ]); (dscp [ code-point-values ] dscp-except [ code-point-values ]); (esp-spi [ values ] esp-spi-except [ values ]); first-fragment; fragment-flags flag; (fragment-offset [ offsets ] fragment-offset-except [ offsets ]); (ip-options [ option-names ] ip-options-except [ option-names ]); is-fragment; (precedence [ precedence-names ] precedence-except [ precedence-names ]); (protocol [ protocol-names ] protocol-except [ protocol-names ]); (ttl [ ttl-values ] ttl-except [ ttl-values ]); This section lists statements that are valid at the following hierarchy levels, and is referenced at those levels in Complete [edit firewall] Hierarchy on page 360 instead of the statements being repeated. [edit firewall family ethernet-switching filter filter-name term term-name from] 358

379 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements The common Layer 2 firewall match conditions are as follows: destination-mac-address { mac-address <except>; (destination-port [ port-names ] destination-port-except [ port-names ]); (dscp [ code-point-values ] dscp-except [ code-point-values ]); (ether-type [ protocol-types ] ether-type-except [ protocol-types ]); (forwarding-class [ class-names ] forwarding-class-except [ class-names ]); (icmp-code [ codes ] icmp-code-except [ codes ]); (icmp-type [ types ] icmp-type-except [ types ]); (interface-group [ group-names ] interface-group-except [ group-names ]); ip-address { ip-prefix</prefix-length> <except>; ip-destination-address { ip-prefix</prefix-length> <except>; (ip-precedence [ precedence-names ] ip-precedence-except [ precedence-names ]); (ip-protocol [ protocol-names ] ip-protocol-except [ protocol-names ]); ip-source-address ip-prefix</prefix-length>; (learn-vlan-1p-priority [ priorities ] learn-vlan-1p-priority [ priorities ]); (learn-vlan-id [ vlan-ids ] learn-vlan-id-except [ vlan-ids ]); (loss-priority [ priorities ] loss-priority-except [ priorities ]); (port [ port-names ] port-except [ port-names ]); source-mac-address { mac-address <except>; (source-port [ port-names ] source-port-except [ port-names ]); tcp-flags flag; (traffic-type [ broadcast known-unicast multicast unknown-unicast ] traffic-type-except [ broadcast known-unicast multicast unknown-unicast ]); (user-vlan-1p-priority [ priorities ] user-vlan-1p-priority [ priorities ]); (user-vlan-id [ vlan-ids ] user-vlan-id-except [ vlan-ids ]); (vlan-ether-type [ protocol-types ] vlan-ether-type-except [ protocol-types ]); 359

380 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches Complete [edit firewall] Hierarchy firewall { family (any ethernet-switching inet inet6) {... the family subhierarchies appear after the main [edit firewall] hierarchy... filter filter-name { accounting-profile [ profile-names ]; enhanced-mode; interface-shared-with; interface-specific; physical-interface-policer; term term-name { filter filter-name; from {... statements in Common IP Firewall Match Conditions on page 357 AND statements in Common IPv4 Firewall Match Conditions on page then {... statements in Common Firewall Actions on page 356 AND statements in Common IP Firewall Actions on page 356 AND statements in Common IPv4 and IPv6 Firewall Actions on page hierarchical-policer policer-name { aggregate { if-exceeding { bandwidth-limit bps; burst-size-limit bytes; then { discard; forwarding-class class-name; loss-priority (high low medium-high medium-low); logical-interface-policer; physical-interface-policer; premium { if-exceeding { bandwidth-limit bps; burst-size-limit bytes; then { discard; shared-bandwidth-policer; interface-set interface-set-name { interface-name; load-balance-group group-name { next-hop-group [ group-names ]; 360

381 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements policer policer-name { filter-specific; if-exceeding { (bandwidth-limit bps bandwidth-percent percentage); burst-size-limit bytes; logical-bandwidth-policer; logical-interface-policer; physical-interface-policer; then { discard; forwarding-class class-name; loss-priority (high low medium-high medium-low); three-color-policer policer-name { action { loss-priority high then discard; filter-specific; logical-interface-policer; physical-interface-policer; shared-bandwidth-policer; single-rate { (color-aware color-blind); committed-burst-size bytes; committed-information-rate bps; excess-burst-size bytes; two-rate { (color-aware color-blind); committed-burst-size bytes; committed-information-rate bps; peak-burst-size bytes; peak-information-rate bps; firewall { family any { filter filter-name { interface-shared; term term-name { from { (forwarding-class [ class-names ] forwarding-class-except [ class-names ]); interface interface-name; interface-set set-name; (loss-priority [ priorities ] loss-priority-except [ priorities ]); (packet-length [ values ] packet-length-except [ values ]); then {... statements in Common Firewall Actions on page 356 PLUS... (accept discard); 361

382 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches firewall { family ethernet-switching { filter filter-name { interface-specific; term term-name { from { destination-address { ip-prefix</prefix-length>; destination-mac-address { mac-address; destination-port [ port-names ]; destination-prefix-list { list-name; dot1q-tag [ tag-values ]; dot1q-user-priority [ priority-values ]; dscp [ code-point-values ]; ether-type [ protocol-names ]; fragment-flags flag; icmp-code [ codes ]; icmp-type [ types ]; interface interface-name; is-fragment; precedence [ precedence-names ]; protocol [ protocol-names ]; source-address { ip-prefix</prefix-length>; source-mac-address { mac-address; source-port [ port-names ]; source-prefix-list { list-name; tcp-established; tcp-flags flag; tcp-initial; vlan [ vlan-names ]; then { (accept discard); analyzer analyzer-name; count counter-name; forwarding-class class-name; interface interface-name; log; 362

383 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements loss-priority (high low); policer policer-name; syslog; vlan vlan-name; firewall { family inet { dialer-filter filter-name { accounting-profile [ profile-names ]; term term-name { from {... statements in Common IP Firewall Match Conditions on page 357 AND statements in Common IPv4 Firewall Match Conditions on page 358 EXCEPT FOR... (ah-spi [ values ] ah-spi-except [ values ]); # NOT valid at this level (destination-class [ class-names ] destination-class-except [ class-names ]); # NOT valid at this level interface interface-name; # NOT valid at this level (loss-priority [ priorities ] loss-priority-except [ priorities ]); # NOT valid at this level service-filter-hit; # NOT valid at this level (source-class [ class-names ] source-class-except [ class-names ]); # NOT valid at this level then { (ignore note); log; sample; syslog; filter filter-name { accounting-profile [ profile-names ]; interface-specific; term term-name { filter filter-name; from {... statements in Common IP Firewall Match Conditions on page 357 AND statements in Common IPv4 Firewall Match Conditions on page then {... statements in Common Firewall Actions on page 356 AND statements in Common IP Firewall Actions on page 356 AND statements in Common IPv4 and IPv6 Firewall Actions on page prefix-action name { count; destination-prefix-length prefix-length; 363

384 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches filter-specific; policer policer-name; source-prefix-length prefix-length; subnet-prefix-length prefix-length; service-filter filter-name { term term-name { from { address { ip-prefix</prefix-length>; (ah-spi [ values ] ah-spi-except [ values ]); destination-address { ip-prefix</prefix-length>; (destination-port [ port-names ] destination-port-except [ port-names ]); destination-prefix-list { list-name; (esp-spi [ values ] esp-spi-except [ values ]); first-fragment; fragment-flags flag; (fragment-offset [ offsets ] fragment-offset-except [ offsets ]); (interface-group [ group-names ] interface-group-except [ group-names ]); (ip-options [ option-names ] ip-options-except [ option-names ]); is-fragment; (loss-priority [ priorities ] loss-priority-except [ priorities ]); (port [ port-names ] port-except [ port-names ]); prefix-list { list-name; (protocol [ protocol-names ] protocol-except [ protocol-names ]); source-address { ip-prefix</prefix-length>; (source-port [ port-names ] source-port-except [ port-names ]); source-prefix-list { list-name; tcp-flags flag-name; then { count counter-name; log; port-mirror; sample; (service skip); simple-filter filter-name { term term-name { from { destination-address ip-prefix</prefix-length>; destination-port port-name; forwarding-class [ class-names ]; 364

385 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements protocol protocol-name; source-address ip-prefix</prefix-length>; source-port port-name; then { forwarding-class class-name; loss-priority (high low medium-high medium-low); policer policer-name; firewall { family inet6 { dialer-filter filter-name { accounting-profile [ profile-names ]; term term-name { from {... statements in Common IP Firewall Match Conditions on page 357 PLUS... (next-header [ protocol-types ] next-header-except [ protocol-types ]);... BUT NOT... (destination-class [ class-names ] destination-class-except [ class-names ]); # NOT valid at this level (forwarding-class [ class-names ] forwarding-class-except [ class-names ]); # NOT valid at this level interface interface-name; # NOT valid at this level (interface-group [ group-names ] interface-group-except [ group-names ]); # NOT valid at this level (loss-priority [ priorities ] loss-priority-except [ priorities ]); # NOT valid at this level service-filter-hit; # NOT valid at this level (source-class [ class-names ] source-class-except [ class-names ]); # NOT valid at this level tcp-established; # NOT valid at this level tcp-flags flag; # NOT valid at this level tcp-initial; # NOT valid at this level then { (ignore note); log; sample; syslog; filter filter-name { accounting-profile [ profile-names ]; interface-specific; term term-name { filter filter-name; from {... statements in Common IP Firewall Match Conditions on page 357 PLUS... (next-header [ protocol-types ] next-header-except [ protocol-types ]); (traffic-class [ code-point-values ] traffic-class-except [ code-point-values ]); 365

386 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches then {... statements in Common Firewall Actions on page 356 AND statements in Common IP Firewall Actions on page 356 PLUS... (accept discard reject <address-unreachable administratively-prohibited beyond-scope fragmentation-needed no-route port-unreachable tcp-reset>); service-filter filter-name { term term-name { from { address { ip-prefix</prefix-length>; (ah-spi [ values ] ah-spi-except [ values ]); destination-address { ip-prefix</prefix-length>; (destination-port [ port-names ] destination-port-except [ port-names ]); destination-prefix-list { list-name; (esp-spi [ values ] esp-spi-except [ values ]); (interface-group [ group-names ] interface-group-except [ group-names ]); (next-header [ protocol-types ] next-header-except [ protocol-types ]); (port [ port-names ] port-except [ port-names ]); prefix-list { list-name; source-address { ip-prefix</prefix-length>; (source-port [ port-names ] source-port-except [ port-names ]); source-prefix-list { list-name; tcp-flags flag-name; then { count counter-name; log; port-mirror; sample; (service skip); 366

387 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements Related Documentation Notational Conventions Used in Junos OS Configuration Hierarchies accounting-profile Syntax accounting-profile name; Hierarchy Level [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name] Release Information Statement introduced before Junos OS Release 7.4. Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Description Enable collection of accounting data for the specified filter. Options name Name assigned to the accounting profile. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation interface To view this statement in the configuration. interface-control To add this statement to the configuration. Accounting for Firewall Filters Overview on page

388 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches destination-address Syntax destination-address address; Hierarchy Level [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name term term-name from], [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name term term-name from ip-version ip-version] Release Information Description Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 10.1R1. Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. IP destination address field, which is the address of the destination node for the packet. You cannot specify the destination-address and address match conditions in the same term. For IPv4, the destination-address field is 32 bits in length. The filter description syntax supports either a mask value that can be noncontiguous, such as / , or prefix notation such as /8. Simple filters do not support noncontiguous mask values. For IPv6, the destination-address field is 128 bits in length. The filter description syntax supports the text representations for IPv6 addresses that are described in RFC 2373, IP Version 6 Addressing Architecture. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation firewall To view this statement in the configuration. firewall-control To add this statement to the configuration. family on page 372 family Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Fields on page 39 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic on page 50 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic on page 60 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 72 Guidelines for Configuring Simple Filters on page

389 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements destination-port Syntax destination-port <destination-port>; Hierarchy Level [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name term term-name from ip-version ip-version protocol (tcp udp)] Release Information Description Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 10.1R1. Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Configure the destination port of the Layer 4 header. Options destination-port The destination port of the Layer 4 header. Range: 0 through 65,535 Required Privilege Level Related Documentation firewall To view this statement in the configuration. firewall-control To add this statement to the configuration. Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page

390 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches enhanced-mode Syntax enhanced-mode; Hierarchy Level [edit dynamic-profiles profile-name firewall family family-name filter filter-name], [edit firewall filter filter-name], [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall filter filter-name], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall family family-name filter filter-name] Release Information Statement introduced in Junos OS Release Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Description Limit static service filters or API-client filters to term-based filter format only for inet or inet6 families when enhanced network services mode is configured at the [edit chassis network-services] hierarchy level. When used with one of the chassis enhanced network services modes, firewall filters are generated in term-based format for use with MPC modules. If enhanced network services are not configured for the chassis, the enhanced-mode statement is ignored and any enhanced mode firewall filters are generated in both term-based and, the default, compiled format. Only term-based (enhanced) firewall filters will be generated, regardless of the setting of the enhanced-mode statement at the [edit chassis network-services] hierarchy level, if any of the following are true: Flexible filter match conditions are configured at the [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name term term-name from] or [edit firewall filter filter-name term term-name from] hierarchy levels. A tunnel header push or pop action, such as GRE encapsulate or decapsulate is configured at the [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name term term-name then] hierarchy level. Payload-protocol match conditions are configured at the [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name term term-name from] or [edit firewall filter filter-name term term-name from] hierarchy levels. An extension-header match is configured at the [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name term term-name from] or [edit firewall filter filter-name term term-name from] hierarchy levels. A match condition is configured that only works with MPC cards, such as firewall bridge filters for IPv6 traffic. NOTE: You cannot attach enhanced mode filters to local loopback, management, or MS-DPC interfaces. These interfaces are processed by the Routing Engine and DPC modules and can accept only compiled firewall filter format. In cases where both filter formats are needed for dynamic service filters, you can use the enhanced-mode-override statement on the specific 370

391 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements filter definition to override the default filter term-based only format of chassis network-service enhanced IP mode. NOTE: Do not use enhanced mode for firewall filters that are intended for control plane traffic. Control plane filtering is handled by the Routing Engine kernel, which cannot use the term-based format of the enhanced mode filters. For packets sourced from the Routing Engine, the Routing Engine processes Layer 3 packets by applying output filters to the packets and forwards Layer 2 packets to the Packet Forwarding Engine for transmission. By configuring the enhanced mode filter, you explicitly specify that only the term-based filter format is used, which also implies that the Routing Engine cannot use this filter. NOTE: The enhanced-mode and the enhanced-mode-override statements are mutually exclusive; you can define the filter with either enhanced-mode or enhanced-mode-override, but not both. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation firewall To view this statement in the configuration. firewall-control To add this statement to the configuration. enhanced-mode-override Network Services Mode Overview Firewall Filters and Enhanced Network Services Mode Overview Configuring a Filter for Use with Enhanced Network Services Mode 371

392 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches family (Firewall) Syntax family protocol-family-name { filter filter-name {... filter-configuration... prefix-action prefix-action-name {... prefix-action-configuration... service-filter filter-name... filter-configuration... simple-filter filter-name {... filter-configuration... Hierarchy Level [edit firewall], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall] Release Information Statement introduced before Junos OS Release 7.4. Logical systems support introduced in Junos OS Release 9.3. simple-filter statement introduced in Junos OS Release 7.6. any family type introduced in Junos OS Release 8.0 (not supported on PTX Series Packet Transport Routers). bridge family type introduced in Junos OS Release 8.4 (MX Series routers only). Description Configure a firewall filter for IP version 4 (IPv4) or IP version 6 (IPv6) traffic. On the MX Series routers only, configure a firewall filter for Layer 2 traffic in a bridging environment. Options family-name Version or type of addressing protocol: any Protocol-independent match conditions. bridge (MX Series routers only) Layer 2 packets that are part of bridging domain. ccc Layer 2 switching cross-connects. inet IPv4 addressing protocol. inet6 IPv6 addressing protocol. mpls MPLS. vpls Virtual private LAN service (VPLS). The remaining statements are explained separately. NOTE: The packet lengths that a policer considers depends on the address family of the firewall filter. See Understanding the Frame Length for Policing Packets. 372

393 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements Required Privilege Level Related Documentation interface To view this statement in the configuration. interface-control To add this statement to the configuration. Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Guidelines for Configuring Service Filters on page 282 Guidelines for Configuring Simple Filters on page

394 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches filter (Applying to a Logical Interface) Syntax filter { group filter-group-number; input filter-name; input-list [ filter-names ]; output filter-name; output-list [ filter-names ]; Hierarchy Level Protocol-independent firewall filter on MX Series router logical interface: [edit interfaces interface-name unit logical-unit-number], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name interfaces interface-name unit logical-unit-number] All other standard firewall filters on all other devices: [edit interfaces interface-name unit logical-unit-number family family], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name interfaces interface-name unit logical-unit-number family family] Release Information Statement introduced before Junos OS Release 7.4. Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Description Apply a stateless firewall filter to a logical interface at a specific protocol level. Options group filter-group-number Number of the group to which the interface belongs. Range: 1 through 255 input filter-name Name of one filter to evaluate when packets are received on the interface. input-list [ filter-names ] Names of filters to evaluate when packets are received on the interface. Up to 16 filters can be included in a filter input list. output filter-name Name of one filter to evaluate when packets are transmitted on the interface. output-list [ filter-names ] Names of filters to evaluate when packets are transmitted on the interface. Up to 16 filters can be included in a filter output list. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation interface To view this statement in the configuration. interface-control To add this statement to the configuration. Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Guidelines for Applying Firewall Filters on page

395 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements filter (Configuring) Syntax filter filter-name { accounting-profile name; enhanced-mode; fast-lookup-filter; interface-shared; interface-specific; physical-interface-filter; term term-name {... term configuration... Hierarchy Level [edit firewall family family-name], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall family family-name] Release Information Statement introduced before Junos OS Release 7.4. Logical systems support introduced in Junos OS Release 9.3. physical-interface-filter statement introduced in Junos OS Release 9.6. Support for the interface-shared statement introduced in Junos OS Release Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Description Configure firewall filters. Options filter-name Name that identifies the filter. This must be a non-reserved string of not more than 64 characters. To include spaces in the name, enclose it in quotation marks ( ). Firewall filter names are restricted from having the form.* (beginning and ending with underscores) or.* (beginning with an underscore. The remaining statements are explained separately. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation firewall To view this statement in the configuration. firewall-control To add this statement to the configuration. Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Guidelines for Applying Firewall Filters on page 27 Configuring Multifield Classifiers Using Multifield Classifiers to Set Packet Loss Priority simple-filter (Configuring) on page

396 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches firewall Syntax firewall { atm-policer atm-policer-name {... atm-policer-configuration... family protocol-family-name {... protocol-family-configuration... filter ipv4-filter-name {... ipv4-filter-configuration... hierarchical-policer hierarchical-policer-name {... hierarchical-policer-configuration... interface-set interface-set-name {... interface-set-configuration... policer two-color-policer-name {... two-color-policer-configuration... three-color-policer three-color-policer-name {... three-color-policer-configuration... Hierarchy Level [edit], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name] [edit dynamic-profiles profile-name], Release Information Statement introduced before Junos OS Release 7.4. Logical systems support introduced in Junos OS Release 9.3. Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Description Configure firewall filters. The statements are explained separately. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation firewall To view this statement in the configuration. firewall-control To add this statement to the configuration. Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Guidelines for Configuring Service Filters on page 282 Guidelines for Configuring Simple Filters on page 307 Configuring Multifield Classifiers Using Multifield Classifiers to Set Packet Loss Priority 376

397 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements interface-set Syntax interface-set interface-set-name { interface-name; Hierarchy Level [edit firewall], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall] Release Information Statement introduced before Junos OS Release 7.4. Logical systems support introduced in Junos OS Release 9.3. Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Description Configure an interface set. Options interface-name Names of each interface to include in the interface set. You must specify more than one name. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation firewall To view this statement in the configuration. firewall-control To add this statement to the configuration. Filtering Packets Received on an Interface Set Overview on page 262 interface-specific (Firewall Filters) Syntax interface-specific; Hierarchy Level [edit dynamic-profiles profile-name firewall family family-name filter filter-name], [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall family family-name filter filter-name] Release Information Statement introduced before Junos OS Release 7.4. Logical systems support introduced in Junos OS Release 9.3. Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Description Configure interface-specific names for firewall counters. NOTE: A firewall filter cannot be both interface-specific and interface-shared. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation interface To view this statement in the configuration. interface-control To add this statement to the configuration. Configuring Firewall Filters and Policers for VPLS Interface-Specific Firewall Filter Instances Overview 377

398 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches ip-version Syntax ip-version ip-version { match-conditions; protocol (tcp udp) { match conditions; Hierarchy Level [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name term term-name from] Release Information Description Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 10.1R1. Option ipv6 introduced in Junos OS Release 12.2R1. Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Configure the IP version for the firewall filter. Options ip-version Version of the IP addressing. ipv4 IP version 4 ipv6 IP version 6 Required Privilege Level Related Documentation firewall To view this statement in the configuration. firewall-control To add this statement to the configuration. Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Fields on page 39 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic on page 50 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic on page 60 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page

399 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements prefix-list Syntax prefix-list name { ip-addresses; apply-path path; Hierarchy Level [edit dynamic policy-options], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name policy-options], [edit policy-options] Release Information Statement introduced before Junos OS Release 7.4. Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 9.0 for EX Series switches. Support for configuration in the dynamic database introduced in Junos OS Release 9.5. Support for configuration in the dynamic database introduced in Junos OS Release 9.5 for EX Series switches. Support for the vpls protocol family introduced in Junos OS Release Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Description Define a list of IPv4 or IPv6 address prefixes for use in a routing policy statement or firewall filter statement. You can configure up to 85,325 prefixes in each prefix list. To configure more than 85,325 prefixes, configure multiple prefix lists and apply them to multiple firewall filter terms. Options name Name that identifies the list of IPv4or IPv6 address prefixes. ip-addresses List of IPv4 or IPv6 address prefixes, one IP address per line in the configuration. The remaining statement is explained separately. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation routing To view this statement in the configuration. routing-control To add this statement to the configuration. Understanding Prefix Lists for Use in Routing Policy Match Conditions Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Fields on page 39 Example: Configuring Routing Policy Prefix Lists Example: Configuring a Filter to Limit TCP Access to a Port Based On a Prefix List Specifying BGP Peers on page

400 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches protocol Syntax protocol (tcp udp); Hierarchy Level [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name term term-name from ip-version ip-version] Release Information Description Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 10.1R1. Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Configure the protocol field of IPv4 or the next-header field of the IPv6 address. Options tcp Transmission Control Protocol. udp User Datagram Protocol. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation firewall To view this statement in the configuration. firewall-control To add this statement to the configuration. Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page

401 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements service-filter (Firewall) Syntax service-filter filter-name { term term-name { from { match-conditions; then { actions; Hierarchy Level [edit firewall family (inet inet6], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall family (inet inet6)] Release Information Statement introduced before Junos OS Release 7.4. Logical systems support introduced in Junos OS Release 9.3. Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Description Configure service filters. Options filter-name Name that identifies the service filter. The name can contain letters, numbers, and hyphens (-) and can be up to 255 characters long. To include spaces in the name, enclose it in quotation marks ( ). The remaining statements are explained separately. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation firewall To view this statement in the configuration. firewall-control To add this statement to the configuration. Guidelines for Configuring Service Filters on page 282 Guidelines for Applying Service Filters on page

402 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches simple-filter (Configuring) Syntax simple-filter filter-name { term term-name { from { match-conditions; then { forwarding-class class-name; loss-priority (high low medium); Hierarchy Level [edit firewall family inet], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall family inet] Release Information Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 7.6. Logical systems support introduced in Junos OS Release 9.3. Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Description Configure simple filters. Options filter-name Name that identifies the simple filter. The name must be a non-reserved string of not more than 64 characters. No special characters are restricted. To include spaces in the name, enclose them in quotation marks ( ). from Match packet fields to values. If the from option is not included, all packets are considered to match and the actions and action modifiers in the then statement are taken. match-conditions One or more conditions to use to make a match. term term-name Define a simple-filter term. The name that identifies the term can contain letters, numbers, and hyphens (-), and can be up to 255 characters long. To include spaces in the name, enclose them in quotation marks ( ). then Actions to take on matching packets. If the then option is not included and a packet matches all the conditions in the from statement, the packet is accepted. NOTE: Only forwarding-class and loss-priority are valid actions in a simple filter configuration. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation firewall To view this statement in the configuration. firewall-control To add this statement to the configuration. simple-filter (Applying to an Interface) Simple Filter Overview on page

403 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements How Simple Filters Evaluate Packets on page 305 Guidelines for Configuring Simple Filters on page 307 Guidelines for Applying Simple Filters on page 310 source-address Syntax source-address ip-address; Hierarchy Level [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name term term-name from], [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name term term-name from ip-version ip-version] Release Information Description Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 10.1R1. Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. IP source address field, which is the address of the source node sending the packet. You cannot specify the source-address and address match conditions in the same term. For IPv4, the source-address field is 32 bits in length. The filter description syntax supports either a mask value that can be noncontiguous, such as / , or prefix notation such as /8. Simple filters do not support noncontiguous mask values. For IPv6, the source-address field is 128 bits in length. The filter description syntax supports the text representations for IPv6 addresses that are described in RFC 2373, IP Version 6 Addressing Architecture. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation firewall To view this statement in the configuration. firewall-control To add this statement to the configuration. family on page 372 family Firewall Filter Match Conditions Based on Address Fields on page 39 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv4 Traffic on page 50 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for IPv6 Traffic on page 60 Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page 72 Guidelines for Configuring Simple Filters on page

404 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches source-checking Syntax source-checking; Hierarchy Level [edit forwarding-options family inet6] Release Information Statement introduced in Junos OS Release Description (MX Series 3D Universal Edge Routers Only) Discard IPv6 packets when the source address type is unspecified, loopback, multicast or link-local RFC 4291, IP Version 6 Addressing Architecture, refers to four address types that require special treatment when they are used as source addresses. The four address types are: Unspecified Loopack Multicast Link-Local Unicast The loopback and multicast addresses must never be used as a source address in IPv6 packets. The unspecified and link-local addresses can be used as source addresses but routers must never forward packets that have these addresses as source addresses. Typically, packets that contain unspecified or link-local addresses as source addresses are delivered to the local host. If the destination is not the local host, then the packet must not be forwarded. Configuring this statement filters or discards IPv6 packets of these four address types. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation routing To view this statement in the configuration. routing-control To add this statement to the configuration. Applying Forwarding Table Filters 384

405 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements source-port Syntax source-port <source-port>; Hierarchy Level [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name term term-name from ip-version ip-version protocol (tcp udp)] Release Information Description Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 10.1R1. Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Configure the source port of the Layer 4 header. Options source-port The source port of the Layer 4 header. Range: 0 through 65,535 Required Privilege Level Related Documentation firewall To view this statement in the configuration. firewall-control To add this statement to the configuration. Firewall Filter Match Conditions for MPLS-Tagged IPv4 or IPv6 Traffic on page

406 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches term (Firewall Filter) Syntax term term-name { from { match-conditions; ip-version ipv4 { match-conditions-mpls-ipv4-address; protocol (tcp udp) { match conditions-mpls-ipv4-port; then { actions; Hierarchy Level [edit dynamic-profiles profile-name firewall family family-name filter filter-name], [edit firewall family family-name filter filter-name], [edit firewall family family-name service-filter filter-name], [edit firewall family family-name simple-filter filter-name], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall family family-name filter filter-name], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall family family-name service-filter filter-name], [edit logical-systems logical-system-name firewall family family-name simple-filter filter-name] Release Information Statement introduced before Junos OS Release 7.4. filter option introduced in Junos OS Release 7.6. Logical systems support introduced in Junos OS Release 9.3. ip-version ipv4 support introduced in Junos OS Release Statement introduced in Junos OS Release 12.3R2 for EX Series switches. Description Define a firewall filter term. Options actions (Optional) Actions to perform on the packet if conditions match. You can specify one terminating action supported for the specified filter type. If you do not specify a terminating action, the packets that match the conditions in the from statement are accepted by default. As an option, you can specify one or more nonterminating actions supported for the specified filter type. filter-name (Optional) For family family-name filter filter-name only, reference another standard stateless firewall filter from within this term. from (Optional) Match packet fields to values. If not included, all packets are considered to match and the actions and action modifiers in the then statement are taken. match-conditions One or more conditions to use to make a match on a packet. match-conditions-mpls-ipv4-address (MPLS-tagged IPv4 traffic only) One or more IP address match conditions to match on the IPv4 packet header. Supports 386

407 Chapter 12: Configuration Statements network-based service in a core network with IPv4 packets as an inner payload of an MPLS packet with labels stacked up to five deep. match-conditions-mpls-ipv4-port (MPLS-tagged IPv4 traffic only) One or more UDP or TCP port match conditions to use to match a packet in an MPLS flow. Supports network-based service in a core network with IPv4 packets as an inner payload of an MPLS packet with labels stacked up to five deep. term-name Name that identifies the term. The name can contain letters, numbers, and hyphens (-) and can be up to 64 characters long. To include spaces in the name, enclose it in quotation marks ( ). then (Optional) Actions to take on matching packets. If not included and a packet matches all the conditions in the from statement, the packet is accepted. Required Privilege Level Related Documentation firewall To view this statement in the configuration. firewall-control To add this statement to the configuration. Guidelines for Configuring Firewall Filters on page 22 Configuring Multifield Classifiers Guidelines for Configuring and Applying Firewall Filters in Logical Systems on page

408 Firewall Filters Feature Guide for EX9200 Switches 388